*yy(*#% 






IV 



1#f 'W 



■cu - 







A PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 



PORTUGUESE AND ENGLISH, 



EXHIBITING, IN A SERIES OE EXERCISES IN DOUBLE 
TRANSLATION, 



C{j* f irtamatk Stadtrre 0f krtlj languages, 



AS NOW WRITTEN AND SPOKEN, 



ADAPTED TO- OLLENDORFF SYSTEM. 



BY THE , \ 

KEY. ALEX/^L D. D'OESEY, B.D., 

FELLOW-COMMONER OP CORPUS CHRISTI COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, 

CHAPLAIN" TO THE BISHOP OP GIBRALTAR, LATE CHAPLAIN' IN MADEIRA, ANT) 
FORMERLY MASTER IN THE HIGH SCHOOL OF GLASGOW. 



LONDON: 

TBUBKER AND CO., 60, PATEENOSTEE EOW. 

1860. 



.In 

lUOa 



LONDOI: 

THOMAS HABBILD, P*j(^ R SALISBUBY SQTTABE, 
FIBET STBEBT. 

387270 
'29 




s- 



HIS MOST FAITHFUL MAJESTY, 

DOI PEDEO V,, 

KING OF POKTUGAL, 

ETC., ETC., ETC., 
THIS aRAMMAB IS, BY EXPRESS PERMISSION, 

BY HIS MAJESTY'S 

VEBY Q-EATEPUL SEEYANT, 

THE AUTHOR. 



PREFACE 



The peculiar plan on which this Grammar* is constructed 
is so evident to the habitual student, from a mere inspec- 
tion of any of its pages, that it seems hardly necessary to 
introduce it with the now almost stereotyped formality 
of a preface. It is, however, possible that some persons 
may feel the want of a few explanatory remarks as to the 
system, sources of information, method of study, and kin- 
dred topics ; and I may, therefore, venture to offer one or 
two observations. 

The plan may be called a copy or adaptation of 
Ollendorff and Arnold's, for there is certainly enough 
of resemblance to justify the comparison; but, from 
having used the text-books of both authors in teaching 
classics and foreign languages, I can safely say that this 
little work is not a servile imitation. It aspires to fol- 
low the excellencies, without adhering to the blemishes, 
peculiar to the popular models in question. For instance, 
it does not indulge in the tedious repetition of the same 
words and phrases, which some consider the distinguish- 

* The first edition, compiled in Madeira in 1852, was printed in 
Lisbon. This, the first London edition, is greatly improved and 
enlarged. 



VI PEEEACE. 

ing merit of Ollendorf ; nor does it enter into those 
minute details and unimportant philological discussions 
with which Arnold often perplexes even the intelligent, 
and sometimes discourages the enthusiastic. How far the 
execution corresponds with the scheme, others must 
determine. 

It may, I think, be laid down as a principle, that no 
Grammar is worthy of the name which does not support 
its rules by quotations from the best authors ; and, 
though a brief treatise like the present cannot contain 
names and references, the very words of the writers 
ought in all cases to be given, as insuring purity of 
style, and exemplifying the actual state of the language ; 
or, rather, the compiler of a grammar, instead of theoriz- 
ing, ought rigidly to follow the principles of inductive 
science, and frame his rules on an extensive and impar- 
tial examination of all the forms of speech, as exhibited 
in modern standard works, periodical literature, parlia- 
mentary debates, and ordinary conversation. Such is 
the basis on which this work has been founded. Every 
page contains a "Lessor," consisting of three parts. 
Eirst, the rule or precept, placed first for the sake of 
form, but really being the inference from the authorities 
quoted; secondly, Portuguese sentences, in strict rela- 
tion to the rule, for translating into English ; thirdly, 
English phrases for rendering into Portuguese. 

The manner of using this Grammar will, of course, be 
modified by the views of the teacher and the require- 
ments of the pupils ; but it is suggested that an hour 



PKEPACE. 



should be devoted to each page, that the teacher should 
first read the foreign language slowly, making the pupil 
imitate, and that there should be constant oral examina- 
tion and practice in viva voce double translation, before 
writing the illustrations. Afterwards, the pupil should 
write out both exercises for correction by the teacher. 
The pages of this book have not been filled with long 
lists of words, whieh-auy dictionary can supply.* 

Though*a thorough knowledge of any language can 
only be gained by patient study and hard work, yet 
there are many who are forced, from want of time, to 
rest satisfied with a lower standard. Such persons are 
recommended to omit all exercises that refer to unusual 
or exceptional cases, or to write only half of each page. 
Several pages are intended more for the Portuguese than 
the English student, such as 17, 18, etc., and may be 
neglected by the latter. 

In conjunction with his course of practical grammar, 
the student is recommended to commit to memory daily 
a page, or at least half a page, of the " Colloquial 
Portuguese." 

The learner should bear in mind that the successful 
study of a foreign tongue requires a previous knowledge 
of his own, that there is no royal road to languages any 
more than to geometry, and that the ordinary hope of 
being able to "pick up" Portuguese without labour, 

* At present there is no good dictionary of the English and 
Portuguese languages ; but one is in preparation, and will, it is 
hoped, be published next year. 



V1U PEEFACE. 

by living in Portugal, and associating with peasants and 
servants, is a pure delusion ; for * less than thorough, will 
not do it." 

A. J. D, D. 
Corpus Christi College, Ca^ibridge. 
1th June, 1860. 



A PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 

OF 

POKTUGUESE AND ENGLISH. 



LESSON I. 

DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
O pal, a inai, a filha. 



Do sol, da lua. 
Ao cavallo, d egua. 
Pelo* soldado, pela igreja. 
No jardim, na rua. 
De, em, a, para, por. 



The father, the mother, the 

daughter. 
Of the sun, of the moon. 
To the horse, to the mare. 
~By the soldier, by the church. 
In the garden, in the street. 
Of, in, to, for, by. 



O sol. A liia. O cavallo. A igreja. Do soldado 
Da filha. Da egua. Do jardim. Ao jpai. A fillia Jo 
soldado. A mai Ja governador. ^0 tempo. No fim Jo 
mez. A'gua na bacia. iVa mesa. No campo. Delo 
caminho de ferro. Ao principio. No inverno. No 
mar e na terra. Ao ar. Ao presente. A casa do gover- 
nador. O fim do anno. Para a cama. O cavallo do 
soldado. Ao sul do rio. O exemplo do bispo. Na flor 
da idade. Ao tempo do dominio romano. A historia do 
paiz. A bocca da grata. A vinda Jo conde com um 
exercito. A innuencia da rainha. Para o progresso da 
civilisacao. Na cama. Ao mercado. No chao. 



The horse. :Z%# mare. The garden of the father. 
At the beginning of the year. On the table. Of the 
door. The history of the country. The influence of the 
governor. The progress of civilization in the Eoman em- 
pire. The railroad in the country. To the entrance of 
the grotto. In the garden of the soldier. The father of 
the governor. The church in the street. At present. 
The count and the soldier. The sun and the moon. At 
market. On the ground. The end of the year. The 
governor's horse. In the garden of the soldier. The 
progress of the railroad. 

* JPelo is a contraction for por o, no for em o, na for em a. 



LESSON II. 

DEFINITE AETICLE. 
Genekal Eule. — The Plural is formed, as in English, by adding s. 



Os livros, as cartas. 
Dos amigos, das casas. 
Aos irrnaos, as irmas. 
Pelos campos, pelas pdrtas. 



The books, the letters. 
Of the books, of the houses. » 
To the brothers, to the sisters. 
Through the fields, by the doors. 



No servicjo, nas guerras. I In the service, in the wars. 

E, e. I And, is. 



Os livros. Os cavallos. Os soldados. Os amigos. 
As casas. As portas. As guerras. As ruas. As igrejas. 
Dos livros. Dos cavallos. Dos soldados. Aos amigos. 
Aos campos. Os livros dos Romanos. As janellas das 
casas. As ondas ; nas profundezas do mar ; as montanbas ; 
os habitantes da terra. No servico dos reis. Para a gloria 
da patria. Nos bracos dos irmaos. Pelas janellas. As 
lidras da vida. Nas universidades, nas escholas, e nos 
mosteiros. Nas gavetas. A lista dos erros. As hervas 
do cainpo. arco dos fortes. JPelos Eomanos. As 
faculdades do entendimento. Belo valor nos conibates. 
Os castellos dos rebeldes. As fortunas dos proprietaries. 



Tlie horses. The friends ofilw soldiers. The house 
of the sisters. In the castles of the kings. The inhabi- 
tants of the fields. By the arms of the kings. The 
proprietors, and the inhabitants of the cities. By Grecian 
civilization. The w aves of the seas. The caprices of the 
friends. By the faculties of the mind. By the valour of 
the brother. In the wars of the Romans. In the fields 
of the country. The friends of the sisters. The list of 
the kings. The inhabitants of the empires. The wars of 
counts. The fortunes of the Romans. By the doors of 
the houses. 



LESSON III. 



INDEFINITE AETICLE. 



Um* lid mem, uma* mullier. 
jyimH rei, d'uma rainha. 
A um mimero, a uma coroa. 
For um tempo, por uma semana. 
N'um logar, it' uma lidra. 
Com um sorriso, um vapor. 



A man, a woman. 
Of a king, of a queen. 
To a number, to a crown. 
For a time, /or a week. 
In a place, in an hour. 
With a smile, a steamer. 



Um pai. Um soldado. Um cavallo. Uma filha. 
Uma egua. Uma riia. D'umf jardim. D'um anno. D'um 
rio. A uma filha. A lima igreja. A uma mulher. D'tem 
vapor. Uma collier e um garfo. Um chapeu de palha. 
Uma deliciosa freseura. Com um terno amor. Uma 
revolta dos povos nas provincias. Um corpo de tropas, 
Um esciido, um elmo, uma espada, e uma lanca. Uma 
chavana de cha. Uma garrafa de Malaga. Um profdndo 
silencio. Um grande misterio. A. vida de um homem. 
Um membro da familia. Uma profunda melancholia. 
Umas* botas. Com uns* livros nas maos. Por uns 
valles. Por um dos notarios. 



A friend. A liouse. A queen. A crown. Of a friend. 
Of a house. To a man. To a crown. The horse of a 
king. A voyage to Punchal. A cup of coiFee. The bell 
of a church. A shield of gold. A member of the family. 
In a thought. With a smile. The glance of a moment. 
The tender love of a sister. To a king. To a queen. In 
the midst of a life of combats. An invitation from the 
king. A bruise by a fall. A revolt of the soldiers. A 
bottle of wine. A member of the counsel. Besidence 
in a family. A view of the plains. A small part of Por- 
tugal. One of the castles. A sword and a lance. A 
straw-hat. In an hour. 

* Used in the plural uns, umas, some. Um, uma, were formerly 
always spelled Hum, huma (or hua), and are so still in official docu- 
ments. 

t Ffum is a contraction for de um, as rCum is for em um; but the 
uncontracted forms are often used. 



LESSON IV. 



WITHOUT AETICLE. 



Joao, Inglaterra.* 

De Maria, de Pedro. 

A Jose, a Lisboa. 

Por G-uilherme, por Anna. 

Um sceptro de ouro. 



John, England. 
Of Mary, of Peter. 
To Joseph, to Lisbon. 
By William, by Anna. 
A sceptre of gold. 



Sem forma. I "Without the form. 



O filho de Ulysses. A guerra de Troia. No terri- 
torio de Coiinbra.t Na corte do rei de Leao. Varios 
ramos de instruccao. ISTo campo de batalha. Filho de 
Boberto e irinao de Henrique. Aos fins de Abril. tu- 
mulo de Anchises. Sem forma de templo. Uma mivem 
de poeira. Uma raca de gigantes. Os limites dos estados 
de Fernando Magno. Pela conquista de Badajoz. A 
guerra nas fronteiras de Portugal. O Administrador do* 
Funchal na Una da* Madeira. caminho por terra para 
Jerusalem. Um lenco de cambraia. Os idolos de ouro, 
e de prata, e de cobre, e de pedra, e de pan. Grande 
reduccao em precos. JEm grande escala. 



The tomb of tbe king of Portugal. In the court of 
Ulysses. By the wars of Anchises. In the territories 
q/*Eobert. The son of the king of 'Leon. On the fron- 
tiers of the states. A province of Spain. Son of John 
and brother of Peter. A silver spoon. The tomb of 
Henry. The way by land to Lisbon. A straw-hat. A 
cloud of dust. By the conquest of Coimbra. In conse- 
quence of the cloud. At the end o/* May. Idols of gold 
and silver. In the territory of Austria. John's brother. 
Henry's mother. The Island of Madeira. 

* Proper name3 sometimes take articles. (1.) Countries : A 
Lombardia, A Franca. (2.) Eivers : O Tejo, O Mincio. (3.) Great 
men: O Camoes, Q'Virgilio. (4.) Familiarly : O Phelps, O Castel- 
branco. (5.) For distinction : A Madeira, when it means the island 
of that name ; because Madeira, without the article, means vjood^ or 
timber. 

f Almost as if Queem-bra. 



LESSON V. 

ARTICLES USED IN ENGLISH, NOT IN POILTUGFESE. 



Samsgate, porto maritimo. 
Elle e medico.* 
Que bello cavallo ! 
Henrique primeiro. 
Historia de Portugal.f 
Nao iia dia. 
Em tab caso. 



;e, a seaport. 
He is a doctor. 
What a fine horse ! 
Henry the First. 
A History of Portugal. 
There is not a day. 
In such a case. 



De viva voz. Em poucas paiavras. Em terceiro lo- 
gar. Lisboa, capital do reino, residencia do rei. Setu- 
bal, villa muito notavel, com vasto e segiiro porto, exporta 
grande quantidade de sal. Coimbra, em feliz situacao, 
tern estabelecimentos de primeira drdem. Sou medico. 
ISToite calmosa de junbo. Seu. tio e hespanhol. Em 
meio dos grandes riscos. Bristol, patria de Locke, 
philosopho ilkistre. O seu amigo e tenente. Que bello 
navio ! Que accao tao infame ! Este e um paiz bellis- 
simo. Tanto melhor. E' animal ampbibio. Em bene- 
ficio dos habitantes. 



Madrid, the capital of Spain. Your brother is a 
lawyer. "What a line horse ! So much tlie less. In the 
fourth place. George the Third. A history of Madeira. 
The frog is an amphibious animal. JSTot a day passed in 
which, etc. In spite of a brave resistance. In what we 
now call the province of Estremadura. Up to a certain 
point. What a night ! It is a fact, that, etc. The 
church is a beautiful fabric. He had a good heart. His 
brother is a general. What a beautiful town ! London, 
the capital of England. In a little time. 

* The article is invariably omitted in Portuguese before names of 
professions, trades, etc., except when a special case is meant, as O 
vigario nao esta em casa." 

t Article omitted in titles of books. 



LESSOR VI. 



O homem e o senhor da terra. 
preto, o branco, e o yerde. 
A hnagem da morte. 
A virtude e amavel. 
Sobre todos os assumptos. 
Desde as 9 as tres boras. 
Por toda a Europa. 



Man is the lord of the earth. 
Blade, white, and green. 
The image of death. 
Yirtue is amiable. 
On all subjects. 
From 9 to 3 o'clock. 
Through all Europe. 



O fiin da historia e a verdade. No progresso da 
sciencia. Todas as horas da vida. O seu liome e cele- 
brado por toda a Asia, pelo seu valor nos combates. 
Venho da igreja. O almoco esta prompto. A historia 
antiga e moderna. Os soldados 311690s e os velhos. A 
rdsa e a mais bella das nores. A grandeza do nasci- 
mento. As virtudes dos sens maidres. A gloria militar. 
A influencia do ouro. As redeas do governo. meiho- 
ramento da edueacao. Em. todas as classes do povo. 
As principles nacoes da Europa. No decurso da vida. 
Das cartas em geral. 



Ancient and modern history. The constant exercise 
of virtue. The weight of authority. The voice of inde- 
pendence, reason, and truth. The energy of social life. 
All sorts of letters. The community of language. The 
old and new scholars. The elephant is the largest of 
quadrupeds. The administration of justice. To the 
north of Cape St. Yincent. In spite of all separations. 
The vast dominions of history. In the empire of Brazil. 
Some of whom. In truth. At least. In case of altera- 
tion. The islands of Europe. Xavier, the apostle of 
India. The influence of gold. 

* Tbe article is used in Portuguese before nouns in then.' widest 
sense, e. g., man for mankind ; and before abstract nouns, virtue, 
beauty, etc. 



LESSON VII. 

ARTICLES OMITTED, OR TRANSPOSED. 



Com uma tal carta. 
Em tdo vasta escala. 
Por via de regra. 
Materias de facto. 
Sem ceremdnia. 
Uma meia chicara. 



Tamanho. 



With such a letter. 

On so vast a scale. So great. 

By way of rule. 

Matters of fact. 

Without ceremony. 

Half a cup. 



Esta colleccao de cartas. Em pouco tempo. Um 
genero d'escriptura. Tao louvavel proposito. Em tal 
materia. De tal mddo. iNuiica Ihe disse tal cousa. 
Tal nome. Sem restriceao. Em tal caso. Em vdz 
baixa. Mais de meia hdra. A causa de tal mudanca. 
Em segredo. Em fdmo. Um tamanho privilegio. Sem 
duvida. Com elegancia. Com mais frequencia. Com 
drdem e methodo. Em pratica. Em silencio. Em 
parte. Por falta de esp^o. Em poucas semanas. Em 
grande parte da Asia. O motivo de similhaiite proceder. 



With energy. In a severe tone. In general. With- 
out pity. Such a man is praiseworthy. In short. This 
collection of books. In a little time. In such a case. 
In a low voice. In a few days. Such a king. More 
than half an hour. Eor want of time. In a great part 
of Europe. In practice. "With such a collection of 
letters. Such a title. In a few days. The reason of 
such a smoke. In a few months. A kind of writing. 
The cause of such a change. "Without doubt. In secret. 
In such a way. "Without restraint. Half a cup. On 
so vast a scale. Such a thins:. 



LESSON VIII. 

PECULIAEITIES OF THE AE/TICLE. 
Quatro xelins o arratel. ] Four shillings a pound. 



Duas patacas a vara. 
Com as chaves na mao. 
O ver-te, e o abracar-te. 
Levou as maos a cabega. 
O bom do monge. 



Two dollars an ell. 
With the keys in his hand. 
Seeing thee and embracing thee. 
Raised his hands to his head. 
The good monk. 



Em todos os tempos. Pagar tanto por cabeca. Boa 
gente de ambos os sexos. Paca-me ouiro par. Cao que 
ladra nao morde. A todos 05 respeitos. Instruido por 
tao memoravel acontecimento. No leito da mdrte. 
Apresentado por mao de Pernando. Eram # perto das seis 
boras da tarde do dia seis de maio do anno de 1389. Cao 
que vive com lobes, acaba por ser feroz. Com ambas as 
maos. O abuso da liberdade de imprensa. JBor espdeo 
de cinco annos. Mdu dia para comecar viagem. Metade 
de uma semana. Ao domingo de tarde. 



I was Charles's comrade. "With the stick in Ms 
hand. Make me another hat. On his death-bed. "With 
both hands. A had day for beginning an enterprise. 
The liberty of the press is precious. TJie good soldier 
raised his hand to his mouth. This is three dollars a 
pound. I gave four bits a yard for it. In all respects, 
I think it good. The money was presented by the hand 
of Frederick. Half a week. On Saturday evening. On 
Monday afternoon. Another pair. Por the space of 
nye days. He pays so much a head. Both sexes. 

* The third'person plural may end " ao " or " am," e. g., sao, 
sam ; erao, eram. The former is more usual, the latter gradually 
coming into practice. 



LESSON IX. 

AETICLES COMBINED WITH PREPOSITIONS. 



No, na, nos, nas, in the. 
Pelo, pela, pelos, pelas, by the. 
N'um, n'uma, in a. 



Nos temos, we have. 
Elles tern, they have. 
Esta, is* 



Bacia, basin; ahnogo, breakfast; mesa, table; quarto, a room . 
Idja, shop ; igreja, church ; eseacla, staircase. 



Na cama. Ao almoco. Num quarto. Nas lojas. A 
bacia nao esta no quarto. Belo filho. Beta filha. 
PeZos homens. Na bacia. * ife igrejas. Na escada. No 
liso <i# lingua. Unia difxerenca no systema. O dominio 
dos Bomanos. O alnidco esta na mesa. O progress© da 
sociedade. Na verdade. Na infaneia da historia. Nos 
tempos da revolucao. A restauracao das letras. No 
meio. Nas universidades e nas escholas. As ruinas da 
liberda.de. Pelas innueneias dos tempos. Nos temos 
agua na bacia. Elles tern livros nos quartos. Na lcja. 



In tlie beds. In the rooms. By the progress of truth. 
In a stop. In the church and in the school. In the in- 
fancy of society. The restoration of the Somans. In the 
midst of the ruins. "We have the use of the tongue. The 
basin is in the room. By the influence of liberty. "We 
have a difference in the schools. Breakfast is on the 
table. In the ruins of the church. The son is in bed. 
In the room of the man. In the times of the E-omans. 
The progress of truth. The restoration of liberty. A 
difference in the use of the book. In the boy's bed. 



* JEsta is used for is, when time, place, and circumstances are 
spoken of ; but e is employed when a permanent quality is referred 
to. "A agua esta quente," the water is hot — temporarily — but 
A agua do mar e salgada — sea water is salt — c 



10 



LESSON X. 

NUMBEE OP ^OTTN'S — BEGULAE PLUEALS. 

Lirro, book ; uva, grape ; irrnao, brother ; irnia, sister ; meia 
stocking; sapato, shoe ; navalba, razor; senhor,* lord, sir; estao, 
are; eu tiiilia, Iliad; ella tinha, she had; nos tfhhamos, tee had; 
elles tinham, they had; de-me, give me; meu, my (m.) ; rainlia, my 
(f.) ; meus (in. p.) ; rninhas (f. p.) ; todo, a, os, as, all; niestre, 
master : nao, not. 



Eu tinha livros. As discdrdias dos tres irmaos. De- 
ine as navdlhas. Urn corpo de tropas. Os irmaos tern 
sapdtos e meias. Elle tinha todas as meias. De-me os 
livros. ~Nvls f route ir as de Portugal. As dioceses dos o&- 
_£>os. Os senhores nao tern navdlhas. Guerras e conquis 
tas. Os membros da congregacao. Os estddos dos rm. 
De-ine as minhas meias. Os meus irmaos estao na nor da 
idade. As fronteiras dos estddos. As traicoes dos ww- 
migos. Todos os livros. Os descobrimentos dos navegdn- 
tes. Os 7/itos sao os meslres nnidos. 



She had not Z>o0/l\?. I had s^oes. I had not a body 
of troops. The brothers of the bishops. The zfrtrs of the 
Icings. My brother has not razors. Had I ooo^s ? I 
had not s/zoes. The stos and stockings of my brothers. 
"We had the stockings of the son. My brothers are in the 
rooms. My sisters are in the midsfc of the ruins. The 
s7zoj?s of the towns. The wars and conquests of the kings. 
The &z;zys had troops. "We had ooo&s. The king had a 
body of troops. My sisters had enemies, (xive me the 
s/^oes and stockings. She had three sisters. They had 
my fooyfo. 

* Nouns in r take es to form the plural, senhor, senhores. 
Nouns in z likewise take es, toz, yozes. 



11 

LESSON XI. 

NOUNS — NUMBER.* 



Cartas, pennas, folhas. 
Igrejas, desejos, copos. 
Senhoras, deveres, inoscas. 
Dias, rapazes, jogos. 
Caixas, rapozas, impdstos. 



Letters, pens, sheet*. 
Churches, wishes, gL 
Ladies, duties, flies. 
Days, boys, plays. 
Boxes, foxes, taxes. 



Mil agradecimentos . Grdgas a Deus. As cartas do 
ainigo. Os Urios do campo. A grandeza dos dimes. 
As cartas do Padre Vieira. As leis da honra e do mun- 
do. As miosas eram as deusas das sciencias e das dries. 
Pennas e tinta. As garrdfas e os copos. As senhoras e 
os rapazes. Os dias do anno. Oinjas, mordngos, amor as, 
e pecegos. Vestidos d'homem. tlm seculo das desco- 
bertas. As igrejas das cidddes. Hecddos a familia. ]STos 
cantos das ruas. Os rdmos d&sfdias. As cdixas de cha. 
As rapozas nos desertos. 



The letters of the man. The Ze#ws of the trees. The 
wishes of the Soys. The dresses of the ladies. The 
brushes of the men. The bottles and they/«sses. The duties 
of the families. The glories of the discoveries. The pZ^ys- 
of the 6oys. Birches, beeches, and larches are fine ft^es. 
The beauties of natnre. The ladies of the family. The 
voices of the goddesses. The houses and churches of the 
cities. The Z>oys have peaches, nuts, and cherries. The 
Jtfj/s of the week. The duties of the ladies. Lilies and 
daisies. The 5oo&s in the churches. A thousand thanks. 
The sheets of the boolcs. The luishes of the were and 6oys. 

* This page being intended to show Portuguese students the mode 
of forming English phu^als, may be passed over by Englishmen. 



12 

LESSON XII. 

NOUNS — NUMBEE. 



Mulheres, paes, facas. 
Tectos, pifanos, chefes. 
Heroes, pretos, echos. 
Nuncios. 



Wives, loaves, knives. 
Hoofs, fifes, chiefs. 
Heroes, negroes, echoes. 
Xuncios. 



Volcoes, bufalos, batatas. J Volcanoes, buffaloes, potatoes. 



Asfolhas das fores. Noe com seus filhos, sua mu- 
Iher, e as mulheres de seus fillios. Mil copos de prata, 
vinte e nove fdcas, trinta togas d'ouro. lima torta de 
cerejas. A virtude dos heroes. Os Mhos sao a/mm es 
ferozes. Os pifanos dos pretos. As mulheres dos heroes. 
Os ladroes da Syria. Os nuncios sao ernbaixadores do 
papa. Os negros n'uma roca da America. Lencinhos 
do pescoco. Veus de renda. Seis lengos de seda. Couves, 
espincfres, ervilhas e batatas. Os volcoes, os terremotos, 
as allumoes. Os oufalos da America. Os cantos da 
Lusiada. 



The wives of the men. The loaves of the thieves. 
The knives of the negroes. The roq/s of the houses. The 
fr&res of the province. The quarries of marble. Paradise 
Lost, a poem in twelve cantos. The frees on the margins 
of the rivers. Pour silk handkerchiefs. The echoes of 
the ivoods. The red and white potatoes are the most com- 
mon roote now in use. The punctilios of public cere- 
ononies. The cool grottoes. Ponderous folios. I sing of 
lieroes and of Icings. American buffaloes. Knives, forks 
and spoons. The cantos of Childe Harold. 



Eor the Portuguese student. 



13 

LESSON XIII. 

NOTJNS — NUMBER.* 

Homens, mulheres, creanc,as. ] Men, women, children. 

Pes, dentes, gansos. Feet, teeth, geese. 

P>6is, pdrcos; vintens. Oxen, swine ; pennies, pence. 

E.atos,tMorganhos,cunhos, dados, i Mice, dies, dice. 

Tafu.es, fachos, gado. I Beaux, flambeaux, cattle. 



Os homens, as mulheres e as credncas da cidade. Os 
rdtos coinem as hervilhas. Dois vintens o arratel. Os 
pes das senhoras. Tenho hois, jumentos, ovelhas, servos, 
e servas. Os seus dentes eram como os dentes dos leoes. 
Uma grande manada de pdrcos. Cunhos sao pecas d'aco 
para imprimir nas moedas ou medalhas. O vinho a seis 
vintens a garrafa. As plantas dos joes. A luz dos fdchos. 
Dados falsos. Fdchas sao tochas ou feixes de varas. As 
patas dos gansos. Os dentes dos morgdnhos. As preten- 
coes dos tafues. Os azdres dos dados. Os pes dos hois. 



The men are thieves. The ivomen have knives. The 
children have bottles and glasses. Abram had sheep, 
oxen, and asses. The hair of cats, rats, and mice. A 
gamester and the dice. Two pence a pound. The coach- 
men and footmen. The soles of the feet. Turkeys, geese 
and ducks. A herd of swine. The teeth of the lions. 
The thieves have dies. Three pence a yard. Pour silver 
pennies. Dies used in stamping money. Pour pence a 
pound. The men's children are with the women. The 
teeth of the swine and the feet of the geese. 

* Chiefly for the Portuguese student. 

t Rdtos means rats and often mice; but morgdnhos always 
mice. 



14 
LESSON XIV. 

NOUNS — NUMBEE. 



Cameiro, veados. 

Apparato, hiato, espe"cie. 

Meios, riquezas. 

Povo, gente ; hortalicas, manid- 

tas. 
Bellas-lettras, as gazetas, archivos. ' Belles-lettres, the papers, archives. 



Sheep, deer. 

Apparatus, hiatus, species. 

Means, riches. 

People ; vegetables, manacles. 



Os hornens couiem os hois, os carneiros, os gdnsos, e 
os veddos. A data do reinado de Affdnso vi do nome na 
serie dos reis de Oviedo. O born pastor da a propria vida 
pelas siias ovelhas. O apparato de guerra. Um hiato e 
lima abertura da boca occasionada pel a pronuncia das 
vogaes O povo portuguez, celebre na historia. Gente, 
multidao de pessoas. As noticias sao boas. Hortalica, 
couves, alfaces, legumes nas hortas. Riquezas, hens, e 
gloria. TJma multidao de povo. Balantes ovelhas com os 
ternos cordeiros. Luiz xiv era o protector das he'll as- 
lettras. 



The sheep and the oxen are in the fields. News of 
your brother. The crocuses and narcissuses are beautiful. 
A fine bed of asparagus. The deserted archives of Por- 
tugal. Beer, stags, and huff aloes. In the long series of 
kings. The Spanish people. The academy of ft& fine- 
arts. The apparatus of the Chemist. A series of vowels. 
Sleep, deer, and oxen. An obscure population. Thepapers 
are full of news. The arch ives of the kingdom. The riches 
of the shepherd are the sheep. The vegetables are good. 
The tender lamhs of the bleating sleep. The manacles of 
the thieves. The king is the protector of the fine-arts. 



15 

LESSON XV. 

PLTJBALS.* 

€idad«05, Christaos, mcios. \ Citizens, Christians, hands. 

Capitals, caes, -paes. j Captains, clogs, loaves. 

Accoe.s, nagoes, cov&qoes. Actions, nations, hearts. 

Andes, villaes — oes. . ( Dwarfs, country-men. 



Os cidadaos de Lisboa. Nas mcios do inimigo. 
■Capitaes de lad roes. Cinco paes e dois peixes. A for- 
macao dos plurdes. A furia dos cidadaos. Com violentas 
convulsoes. As acgoes do liomem. Os medicos, os cirur- 
gioes, e os boticarios. As intengoes, sao excellentes. As 
dissensoes do imperio. As paixoes das turbas. Christaos 
e sarraeenos. Os capitaes do exercito. Os chefes das 
nacoes. As oragoes dos arcebispos. Uma das maos. Os 
altares dos Christaos. As pretengoes do rei. A existencia 
das geragoes. As collegoes de monumentos. O alternado 
das estacoes. 



In the hands of the citizens. The captains of Chris- 
tians. The thieves in the cities. The actions of the 
chiefs. The fury of the countrymen. The intentions of 
the surgeons. The dissensions and convulsions of the 
empires. The generations of Moses. The relations of 
the king. The invasions of the Christians. The cora- 
ditions of the treaties. The council of the ancients. The 
compositions of the poets. The Jo^s of the countrymen. 
The confessions of the hearts. The definitions, the opinions, 
and the questions. The orphans of the brothers. The 
passions of the pagans. The citizens of Paris are in the 
hands of the enemy. 

* There are tf&ree ways of forming the plural of nouns in «o, for 
which see Appendix. 



16 
LESSON XVI. 

NOTJNS — PLURALS. * 



Mare?, colhere?, cruze?. 
Amimaes, soes, faroes. 
I*a,peis, tonnew, fasis. 
Homens, Jins, bens, atun,?. 
Consuls, male?, paue?. 



Seas, spoons, crosses. 
Animals, suns, lighthouses 
Papers, casks, firelocks. 
Men, ends, goods, tunnies. 
Consuls, evils, marshes. 



Os tujoes dos mares da China. Anneis e brincos 
d'ouro. O azeite das luzes. As plantas dao sdes. 
Cabeddes sao dinheiros, haveres e materides. Os homens 
sao officides de justica. Milhdres de pergarninhos. Os 
reptis da terra. Pescadores de Jidmens. A harmonia das 
vozes. O clarao nas nuvens. Pecegos, figos e nozes- 
As mdrgens do rio. Os principals da cidade. Os carto 
rios das cathedrdes. Os homens de lettras. Os caracteres 
dos persondgens. Uroqiieis de madeira ou de metal. Os 
minerdes do paiz. As ordens do rei. As vezes. Nos 
/ms do seculo. 



The voices of the officers. In the seas of Asia. The 
fishes in the seas. The oil of the lights in the cathedrals. 
The s«Zte of the plants. Thousands of papers. The 
chief- weft of the city are wm of letters. The minerals of 
the countries. The harmony of the voices of the fisher- 
men. In the archives of the cathedrals. Rings of gold. 
CM» of wine. Silver-spools. £«ms, moons, and stars. 
The virgins of the house. The firelocks of the soldiers. 
The words are the s/0w$ of £Ae ideas. The consuls in the 
c&&£. The nostrils of the mera. The rk^s of the citizens. 
The toaters of the seas. The sounds of the animals. The 
combs of the women. 

* See rules in Appendix. 



17 



LESSON XVII. 

NOUNS — PLURAL. 



Bases, eixos, crises. 
Dados, meios, camadas. 
Raios, genios, magos. 
Redomomhos, genios, indigenas. 
Lammas, borralho. 



Bases, axes, crises. 
Data, media, strata. 
Radii, genii, magi. 
Yortices, geniuses, aborigines. 
Laminae, scoriae. 



Os eixos das curvas. As crises das doencas. As oases 
das columnas. As crises sao as mudancas notaveis nas 
molestias. Dados sao nocoes, razoes, fundamentos ou 
principles. Os rdios sao semi-diainetros. Byron e Scott 
fordo genios. Os genios das lendas das Mil e tuna noi- 
tes. Bedemoinhos sao movhnentos em giro nos rios on 
mares. JN r os appendices das obras. Os arcdnos da mo- 
narchia. Os magos erao os sabios dos orieataes. Hypo- 
theses e systemas. Os phenomenos da natureza. 



The bases of the pyramids. The axes of the planets. 
The crises of the histories. The scoriae of the volcanoes. 
Strata of lime and coal. I have not data. The genii 
of death. The radii or semi diameters of the circle. The 
aborigines of Spain. The vortices in the river. The magi 
of the East. The Dons of Castile. The gifts of nature 
and grace. Laminae in the minerals. The phases of the 
moon are phenomena. Ganthar ides are insects. The foci 
of the ellipses. The Lares, amongst the Romans, were 
domestic gods, protecting genii, and guardians of the 
house. Errata in the theses. The apices of the Pyra- 
mids. 



18 



LESSOR XVIII. 



PLURALS. 



Esmdla, annaes, cinzas. 
O ptica, politica, collete. 
Tesoura, espivitaddr, tenazes. 
Bofes, folle, calcas. 
O'culos, cerdulas, as damas. 



Alms, annals, ashes. 
Optics, politics, stays. 
Scissors, snuffers, tongs. 
Lungs, bellows, trousers. 
Spectacles, drawers, draughts. 



Os amides das racas. Miiitas esmdlas ao povo. As 
cinzas de Isaac. No po e na cinza. Lucernas com seus 
espivitadores.* Lampadas e tenazes d'ouro. Os miolos 
do homem. A optica e uma parte da physica. A aveia 
e o trigo. As abas do telhado. Aprendeu as mathemd- 
ticas com Pedro Niiues. Os tropicos. Os poros das plan- 
tas. Os bofes sao os orgaos da respiracao. A politica 
e a sciencia do governo, Uma tesoura e um iDstrumento 
de diias pe9as. Dai-me as meias e as cdlgas. Onde esta 
o folle? As tenazes estao no canto. 



The alms of the Christians. The annals of the cities. 
The ashes of the dead. Optics is a "branch of science. 
The politics of the governors. The stays are new. Oive 
me the scissors and the snuffers. The lungs of the coun- 
trymen. G-olden tongs. The regimentals are on the table. 
Soots, half-boots, shoes, pumps, and slippers. The shovel 
and the tongs. The drawers are in the bed-room. The 
eaves of the roofs. The tropics are parallel to the equator. 
He learned Mathematics and Physics. The spectacles of 
the deans. A game at draughts. The brains of the 
hermits. 



* Tes6ura> ou tesouras, espivitadeira, espivitador, tesoura das 
velas, are all terms in use for snuffers. 



19 
LESSON XIX. 

PLURALS. 

Portico, portico ; casco, hoof; menfno, child ; hdmem, man ; 
mullier, woman ; pe, foot ; morganho, mouse ; raposa, fox ; ganso, 
goose; mugido, lowing ; boi, ox; dente, tooth; lobo, wolf; vitella, 
calf; ovelha, sheep ; porco, pig ; folha, leaf; herde, hero ; veado, 
deer ; echo, echo ; gloria, glory ; cereja, cherry. 



Os porticos dos temples. Os meninos dos heroes. Os 
cdscos dos cavallos. Os homems e as mulheres estao nas 
igrejas. Os pes dos ratinhos. As raposas tern os gdnsos. 
Os mugidos dos hois. Os denies dos lohos. Os pes dos 
porcos. As senhoras tern vitellas, ovellas, hois e porcos. 
Os mordngos estao n&sfolhas. Os ladroes tern os vestidos. 
Os genios da epoca.. Os genios da Lampada. Asfolhas 
das arvores. Os znnidos das moscas. Os meninos tern 
pecegos e cerejas. Os cavallos dos homens. Os denies dos 
meninos. Os gdnsos. 



The porticoes of the clmrclies. The hoofs of the cwera. 
The children of the mew and women. The fee^ of the mice. 
The feet oHhe geese. The echoes of the roofs. The glories 
of the heroes. The wives of the chiefs. He has calves, 
sheep, swine, and £?eer. The peaches and cherries are in 
the leaves. The clothes of the thieves. The ruffs of the 
ladies. The geniuses of the age. The ^ewn of the lamp. 
The buzzing o£ flies. The mew had/cwes and wolves. The 
wives and children of the heroes. Thejfee£ of the mice. 
He has cherries and peaches. 



20 
LESSON XX. 

NUMBER OF LOTUS'S. 

Cidadao, citizen; Christao, Christian; mao, hand; drgao, 
organ ; cao, dog ; capitao, captain ; escriyao, writer ; guardiao, 
guardian; ac^iio, action; coracao, heart; opiniao, opinion; mar, 
sea; cruz, cross; animal, animal; papel, paper; fossil, fossil ; 
paz, peace : nmito, — a, — os,— as, many. 



~No territorio dos Christaos. Nas niaos dos Allcmdes. 
Os olhos sao orgdos. As opinioes dos capitdes. latido 
dos ca.es. Os mares da China. Os coracoes dos animdes. 
Os papeis dos escrivdes. As niaos dos guardides. As criizes 
dos Christaos. Os cidadaos de Lisboa. Os irmaos dos 
capitdes. As bengdos dos pdes. As condicoes da vida. Os 
limoes do jardim. As affeigoes dos parentes. Ligoes de 
moral. As citagoes dos authores. As impressoes do clhna, 
das /m, dos diversos estddos da civilisacao. As producgoes 
de todos esses sublimes genios. 



The captains have three ^fo^s. The opinions of the 
Christians. In the hands of the citizens. The organs in 
the churches. The actions of the u-riters. The instinct 
of animals. The new division. The conditions of the 
citizens. By the actions of the citizens. In the hearts of 
many animals. The signals of invasions. By the papers 
of my parents. The voices of the captains. The captains 
are the brothers of the citizens. In the papers of the 
writers. In the regions of poetry. Different editions of 
books. The poetical productions. 



2] 

LESSON XXI. 

GENDER OE NOUNS (MASCULINE), 



Pedro, rei, bfspo, leao. 
Cafe, pe, valle. 
Sal, fim, ddm, ardor, prazer. 
Javali, livro, peru, nau. 
(f.) Se, fe, chamine. 



Peter, king, bishop, lion. 
Coffee, foot, valley. 
Salt, end, gift, heat, pleasure. 
Boar, book, turkey, ship. 
Cathedral, faith, chimney.. 



Pedro e medico, e seu mdno bispo. Os desejos do rei 
rugido do leao. O ladrido do cao. O cafe e bom. O 
pe do monte. O valle de lagrimas. O leite da vaca. O 
conde e do sangue dos reis. Zacre esta quente. A 
mare e ofluxo e refliixo do war. A se de Coimbra. Ajfe' 
e lima das tres virttides. Osferros da chamine. O s<iZ da 
terra. O fim da rua. O ddm da natureza. O ardor 
do conflicto. Os colmilhos d' urn j avail. TJm catalog o 
de livros. Uma ^<m.. 



A king, the father of his people. The gift of the 
Archbishop. The roaring of the lions. The clamour of 
men and boys and dogs. The coffee is strong. The foot 
of the tree. The heat of the valley. The Cathedral of 
Punchal. The milk is good. The blood of the sacrifices. 
The wax is soft. The tide is favourable. The faith of the 
Christians. 2%<s chimney of the chamber, TAe salt of 
the sea. ^4^ the end of the book. The heat of the climate. 
The feet of the boar. The wing of the turkey . The ships 
of the line. Thy grandmother Lois. A cooper's adze. 
A crowd of people. A barber's whet-stone. 



22 
LESSON XXII. 

GENDEE OE NOUNS (FEMININE). 



Kainha Maria, criada, egua. 

Liia, agua, calma. 

Mae) v - • •- 
Mgi j 11900, opiniao. 

Amizade, virtiide. 

(m.) Planeta, systema, dia. 

La, merce, lei. 



Queen Mary, servant, mare. 
Moon, water, heat. 

Mother, lesson, opinion. 

Friendship, virtue. 
Planet, system, day. 
Wool, grace, law. 



Victoria, rainha da Inglaterra, e Maria, rainlia de 
Portugal. Uma cridd-a e uma mulher que serve. Um 
cavallo e uma egua. A lua nova. A agua do mar. A 
calma e o calor do sol, e a fdlta de vento. A mae de 
Joao. Uma licao e lima leitura, ou uma exposigao de 
doutrina. lima nova opiniao. Pela sua erudicao. A in- 
vasao dos Erancezes. ISa infdncia da historia. A monar- 
chia hespanhola. A restauracao das letras Gregas. A 
verdadeira amizade e rmiito rara. Os fragmentos dos 
planetas do systema solar. As drlas do mar. 



The Queen of Spain. The servant-Am**? of the Countess. 
A new society. The light of the 1110011 in the water. The 
opinions of the mother. The experience of the past. The 
immediate consequence. The glorious traditions of the 
nation. The history is in the Latin language. The yeo- 
graphy of the Peninsula. A remote antiquity. The 
genealogy of the Portuguese nation. The Erench two- 
narchy. The restoration of Roman literature. The 
planets and comets of the system. The reign of the 
■monarch. The Aorse and the ware. Public instruction. 
A complete victory. 



23 
LESSON XXIII. 

GENDER OE NOUNS. 



Herdeiro, herdeira. 
Tutor, tutora. 
Bode, cabra. 
Pavao, pavoa. 
Peru, perua. 



Heir, heiress. 
Tutor, tutored. 
.He-goat, s^e-goat. 
Pea-coc&, ^pea-hen. 
Turkey-cock, turkey-hen. 



Herdeiros e herdeiras sao pessoas que recebem he- 
rancas em virtude da lei. A duqueza e herdeira dos 
seus bens. Tutor de seus filbos. JNTomeava a rainha por 
tutora do principe. Duzentas cobras e vinte lodes. 
pavao e ufano da sua plumagem. O actor e a actriz sao 
excellentes. Unia joven cantora. Urn lobo, unia loba, 
e um lobinbo. O embaixador e a embaixatriz estao em 
Londres. O barao e a baroneza de Goldsmid. O coW<? 
e a condessa de Castello-Melbor. A pavoa e a femea do 
vavao. pern e a, perua estao no jardim. 



Tbe heiress of the crown. An abbess is tbe superior 
or governess of a nunnery. Tbe Countess of Grlasgow. 
Rachel is a Jewess. A turkey-cock and turJcey-hen. A 
prophetess. Tbe dog-fox. A Z«^y and gentleman. A 
shepherd and shepherdess. A fo'ora and lioness. A ^er 
and a tigress. A #e«r and she-bear. Vixen is the name 
of a she-fox. A jacJc-ass and a jenny-ass. The infant 
Don Miguel. The infanta of Portugal. Presumptive 
heiress of tbe throne. The Dz^e and Duchess of Welling- 
ton. Tbe Empress of tbe French. Tbe Queen is the 
friend of the Countess. A w^Ze monkey and a female 
monkey. A Tom-cat. 



24 



LESSON XXIV. 

IEEEGELAE GENDERS. 



Bapaz, rapariga ; mano, mana. 
Rei, rainlia ; senhor, senhora. 
Yiuvo, viuva ; amo, ama. 

Herde, heroma ; 111690, 11169a. 
Cavallo, egua ; touro, vacca. 



Boy, girl ; brother, sister. 
King, queen ; lord, lady. 
Widower, widow ; master, mis- 
tress. 
Hero, heroine ; lad, lass. 
Horse, mare ; bull, cow. 



O irmao deu um livro ao rapdz e lima boneca a ra- 
pariga. O rei e a rainlia da Prussia. Meu tio e men 
tutor. O touro e a vdca. Minna tia esta doente. Uraa 
velha viuva. A senhora Rosa. gdllo e a gallinha estao 
110 gaUinheiro. O frdngo e a frdnga estao gordos. 
peru e a perua. Um gCnno e lima gdma. Um carneiro 
e lima ovelha. Uma filha, formosa rapariga, chamada 
Bernardina. macaco e a macdca chegam do Brazil. O 
vedclo e a corca. O lecw e a leva estao presos. heroe 
e a lieroina estao no templo da gloria. 



The streets of the city are full of logs and girls. The 
brothers and sisters are in the house. The King and 
Queen of Portugal. The ladies and gentlemen are ill. 
The lion and lioness are wild. A hero is an illustrious 
man ; a heroine, a heroic"; woman. The lords and ladies 
have horses and mares. The WZs and cotes are in the 
fields. The old widower is the brother of the Queen. 
Many kinds of horses. The female-monkey is in the 
garden. The King of Portugal. The Queen of Prussia. 
The milk of the cow. The horns of the ram. The wool 
of the sheep. She is a fine girl. I have a young mare. 



25 



LESSON XXV. 

GENITIVE CASE (COMPLEMENT), 



Urn piano d"educacdo. 

As possessoes da monorchia. 

Digno d'attenqao. 

A cidade de Londres. 

O duque de Wellington. 



A plan of education. 

The possessions of the monarchy. 

Worthy of attention. 

The city of London. 

The Duke of Wellington. 



Os rarcios de sciencia. Alfandega grande de Lisboa. 
Theatro de D. Maria II. Sabbado 6 de Mdrgo. Os 
jornaes do Rio de Janeiro. A camara dos Pares. Sessao 
de 9 de Marco de 1852. As diias hdras da tdrde. A' forca 
d'armas. Dez moios de trigo. Por meio de figuras. A 
arte de escrever. Lencos de seda. XJm projecto de lei. 
O grao- duque de Baden. Os caminhos de ferro. Em 
nome do rei de Dinamdrca. XJm esquadrao de lanceiros. 
Urn testemiinho de respeito. O prelado da diocese. Uma 
carta datada de 6 do corrente. 



The Marquis of Bezende. The importance of this sort 
of exposition. A glance of the eye. The Duke of Bra- 
ganza. The council of state. The rest of his days. The 
improvement of education. The true spirit of patriotism. 
Different qualities of oil. "With the rank of lieutenant- 
colonel. The municipal guard of Lisbon. A body of 
5,000 men. The names of the subscribers. The various 
branches of commerce. The first method of writing. He 
is worthy of praise. The theatre ofD. Fernando. Mon- 
day, 4th of April. On the 22nd of the current month. 
Silk handkerchiefs. The Bishop of the Diocese. 21st 
September, 1853. 



26 
LESSON XXYI. 

ACCTJSATITE CASE.* 



Celebrar uma victoria. 
Tomar o commando. 
Conciliar o respeito de- 
Publicar noticias. 
Tomar urn castello. 
Seguir o curso. 



To celebrate a victory. 
Take the command. 
Conciliate the respect of- 
Publish news. 
Take a castle. 
Follow the course. 



Eu nao tenho esse despdcho. Guardamos as nossas 
posicoes. Nao decinamos a responsabiliddde. Precisa 
explicar as cdusas. Os meios de melhorar o estddo das 
nossas colonias. Fazemos algiimas consider agoes. 
Becoinmendamos a cultura do cafe. Para beneficiar 
o povo. Seu irmao ganhou a batdllia. Ismael aceom- 
metteu e tomou o castello de Leiria. Seguindo o curso 
do Tejo. Tomamos agasdllio. Lobo nao mata a lubo* 
Como vejo fazer a tdntos auctores. As abelhas fabricam 
os fdvos. leao inspira medo. Castigar o inimigo. 



Its mission is to diminish our losses, soothe o\xr pains, 
dry our tears. He neither loves God, nor his neighbour. 
To communicate our ideas. He has read the despatch. 
He keeps his place. I decline the responsibility. To 
better the condition of our friends. To benefit the people. 
The Duke gained the battle. The Count took the castle. 
Bees make honey. The way of dating letters. I took 
shelter. My brother read the booh. John calls Peter. 
I have not read the news. The Duke has taken the 
command. I recommend the cultivation of coffee. The 
Count declines the responsibility. 

* The accusative is marked by the particle a prefixed only when 
the omission wo\dd cause an ambiguity. Joao ama a Pedro. 



27 



LESSON XXVII. 



YOCATITE CASE. 



0' mogo, traga urn cdpo de cer- 

v&ja/ 
Adeus, senhor capitao. 
A' sua satide, men senhor. 
[Nao, senhor ', nao pdsso. 
Sim, Vdssa Senhoria. 
Ja, Vdssa Excellencia. 



Boy, bring a glass of beer. 

Grood-bye, Captain. 
Your good health, Sir. 
No, Sir, I cannot. 
Yes, Sir. 
Directly, your Excellency. 



Eu so te escolho a ti, 6 virtuoso, Lydia ! Pag ens, aju- 
dae-me. 0' mogo, traga-me unia chavana de cafe e um 
pao francez. Nao temaes, 6 valordsos Portugueses. O" 
mogo, lembre-se que queremos partir as seis horas. Or 
rapdz, venha ca. Cocheiro ande ligeiro. Aonde estaes, 
minha fillia ? Estou aqui, minha mae. Bern as entendo, 
minhas senlwras. Oica, senhor a, o meu recado. Oh, 
Gory don, Corydon ! 0' Jbao, venha ca. Bostilhdo, pare. 
Muito obrigado, senhor. Mil agradecimentos, 
Rapdz, leve a minha mala. 



"Where are you, father ? * I understand you, gentle- 
men. Good-bye, Colonel. I hear you, ladies. Boy, bring 
me a glass of wine and a biscuit. Pear not, valiant 
Romans. Where art thou, my son ? Boy, carry my 
trunk. Many thanks, Sir. "Where are you, my friend ? 
Here I am, Sir„ No, my Lady, I cannot. O grave, 
where is thy victory ? Coachman, stop. Tour good 
health, Madam. My lad, bring me a cup of tea and a 
roll. Boy, take this letter. Girl, come here. John, 
give me the money. Fages, open the doors. 

* The Portuguese use the possessive pronoun in such cases ; the 
English not. 



28 



LESSON XXYIII. 

ABLATIVE CASE. 



Estabelecido por lei. 
Caus ado pelas rdehas. 
Cercado de montanhas. 
Resultante da victoria. 
Passado pelo parocho. 



Established by law. 
Caused by the rocks. 
Surrounded by mountains. 
Resulting from the victory. 
Certified by the parish priest. 



docmnento prodazido por Jodo Pedro. O impera- 
dor foi accompanhado por Adridno. De certo, nao e por 
culpa sua. Banhado pelo mar. Urna subscripcao pro- 
movida pelo digno governador civil. Certos livros recen- 
temente publicados por algims dos professores do lyceu. 
Proclamado imperador pelos soldados. systema pecca 
por excesso e por falta. Uma arvore conhecida pela excel- 
lencia dos seus oleos. Nacoes espalhadas por tdda a 
terra. Uma nan. assaltada por contrarios ventos. As 
tropas coininandadas^e/o diique. 



Caused hy the leaves. A city surrounded hy moun- 
tains. The paper produced hy William. The King was 
accompanied hy the Duke. Certain documents published 
hy Herculano. John was proclaimed hy the soldiers. The 
troops commanded hy the Count. The castle bathed hy 
the sea. The tree known hy the goodness of its fruits. 
The steamer assailed hy contrary winds. The ruin of 
the city caused hy the rocks. A book published hy the 
professor. The paper signed hy me. Certified hy the 
doctor. Caused hy the dog. The city surrounded hy the 
sea. 



29 



LESSON XXIX. 

PEOPEE NOUNS. 



A Eurdpa, a A'sia, a A-'frica. 
A Madeira,* o Eunchal, o Porto. 
L6ndre3, Paris, Lisboa. 
O Algarve, a Beira, a Castella. 
Os Lusiadas, o Milton, Carlos. 



Europe, Asia, Africa. 
Madeira, Funchal, Oporto. 
London, Paris, Lisbon. 
Algarve, Beira, Castile. 
The Lusiad, the Milton, Charles. 



Os costumes da Furopa moderna. As margens do 
Lima, Minho e do Douro. As vastas regioes da Africa 
e da Asia. As novellas do Cid. governador civil do 
districto do Funchal. No servi90 de Hannibal. A barra 
de Lisboa. As guerras civis de Cesar e JPompeu. No 
throno dos Cesares. Em Burgos, capital de Castella. A 
guamicao de Santarem. A exporta9ao de cereaes para a 
Madeira. O Camoes nos Lusiadas dedicados ao desco- 
brimento da Tndia. Os ciimes do Ararat. niosteiro 
da Se'rra do Filar. O Imperador de Franga.f 



The laws of Asia. The banks of the Tagus. The 
governor of Castile. In the service of Napoleon. In 
London, the capital of England. The port of Funchal. 
In the university of Oxford. The Cato of Addison. The 
taking of Lisbon. The summits of the Alps. Territory- 
bounded on the north by the Douro. The vast regions 
of modern Furore. The city of Oporto. Charles XLL. 
was the Alexander of the north. The Virgils of the cen- 
tury. 

* When the name of a place is also the name of a thing, the 
proper noun takes the article; thus, "Madeira" means "wood," in 
its original sense. 

f Franca, Italia, Portugal, Hespanha, with or without the article, 



30 



XESSON XXX. 

COMPOUND NOUNS. 



Chapeu de paiha, collier de prata. 
Peixe de rio, agua do mar. 
Palacio de guerra, correio, 
Hdmem d'armas, mestre de canto. 
Dentes d'aUios. Friita de caroco. 



Straw-hat, silver-spoon. 
River- fish, sea- water. 
War-office, post-office. 
Man-at-arms, singing-master. 
Cloves of garlic. Stone-fruit. 



Os brincos d'ouro. TJina mesa de carvdlho. arsenal 
da manuka. TJma collier de clid. TJma dor de cabega. 
Duas cadeiras de brdgos. Uma bandeja magnifica. Offi- 
cial da alfdndega. A cdsa da moeda. A cdsa de j ant dr. 
Os dedos dos pes. IT in rdmo de flares. TJma todlha de 
mesa. O cantdr do gdllo. Urn cavdllo de sella. O gudrda- 
livros. Uma estagao de policia. JJmespelho. Acgao de 
grdgas. Fivellas d'dgo. JSIanteiga de porco. Holho de 
peixe. O nascer do sol. Tela de ardnlia. lid mem do 
lime. Os moinhos de vento eram gigantes. TJma estante 
para livros. 



A tea-cup. A singing-master with a straw-hat. Two 
arm-chairs are in the dining-room. The gunpowder in 
the box. A custom-house officer. A railway. Sun-set. 
Wind-mills. Cloves of garlic. A tooth-brush. A church- 
yard. A war-horse. A counting-house. Whale-fishery. 
Gunpowder. The .Foreign Secretary. A straw-hat with- 
in a hat-box. The tea-pot, sugar-basin, and milk-pot. 
The pen-Jcnife and the sealing-wax. A leg of mutton. A 
round of beef. Fish-sauce. A book-case. Stone-fruit. 
A sheet of paper. A linen-draper 's shop. Dancing-shoes. 



31 
LESSON XXXI. 

ABSTKACT NOUNS. 



Natureza, virtude, vicio. 
Amizade, crueldade, heroismo. 
Valor, altivez, esperanca. 
Diligencia, dociira, alegria. 
Clareza, simplicidade. 



Nature, virtue, vice. 
Friendship, cruelty, heroism. 
Bravery, haughtiness, hope. 
Diligence, meekness, mirth. 
Clearness, simplicity. 



Pela natureza das cousas. A amizade e um sentimento 
duradouro. Os motivos de respeito e de gratiddo. O go- 
verno. As influencias da inveja. Deus aborrece ava- 
rezas. A tyrannia do rei de Gralliza. Os maiores bens 
sao a saude, a fovea, o dnimo, apdz, a uniao dai familias, 
a liberddde das cidadaos, a abunddncia das cousas neces- 
sarias, o desprezo das superfluas, a applicacdo ao trabalho, 
e o horror da oeiosidade, a emulacao da virtude, a s^6- 
missdo as leis, e o temor dos Deuses. Pobreza nao e 
w7ez<z. 



The friendship of the king. The poverty of the fami- 
lies. The respect and gratitude of the citizens. The w«- 
tfwre of man. The authority of the prince. The £n^& of 
the maxim. The designs of the enemy. The term of life. 
Dignity without pride, affability without meanness, ele- 
gance without affectation. The appearance of merit. The 
influences of tyranny. The foundation of luealtli %&& pros- 
perity. The £ra^<? of the English colonies. The sanctity 
of the day. The solemnity of the scene. The nothingness 
of humanity. Two centuries of ingratitude. The simpli- 
city of the work. The friendship of the Queen. 



32 



LESSON XXXII. 



COLLECTIVES. 



Exercito, marinha, frdta. 
Par, parelha, tropel. 
JReuniao, partida, eardiime. 
Ma-nada, rebanho, bando. 
Serra, cordilheira. 
Pilha, riina. 



Army, nary, fleet. 
Pair, yoke, troop. 
Assembly, party, shoal. 
Herd, flock, flight. 
Chain of hills. 
Pile, heap. 



O exc'rcito do rei de Prussia. As deliberacoes da 
assembled. Urn par de meias. Uma parelha de bestas. 
TJmpdr de botas finas. Uma m a ta de coelhos. I7m bdndo 
d'aves. Uma ninhdda de pintos. A infanteria Celtibera 
e a cavallaria Andaluza. Um rebanho de ovelhas, urn fdto 
de cabras, uma vara de porcos. Cinco grvpos principles 
de tribus barbaras. Um grcsso curpo de soldadesca. Um 
punliddo de Todos. Um troco de cavalleiros. Um cardume 
de peixes. Um cacho d'uvas. Uma mandda de gado. 
Os rebdnhos de carneiros, exercitos de irdmigos. 



The army of the Queen. The navy of England. The 
fleet in the Tagus. Two pairs of gloyes. Six pairs of 
stockings. A cloud of locusts. The Portuguese infantry. 
A shoal of fish. Flocks of sheep. A pair of boots. 
A. flight of birds A swarm of bees. A large body of 
cavalry. A^azV of shoes. A multitude of people. Two 
pairs of sheets. A collection of flowers, A bunch of 
grapes. The acting committee. A. forest of masts. An 
assortment of books. Herds of cattle and ponies. Rows 
of houses. The Congress of Yienna. An assembly called 
the diet. 

* Andaluz is often used as the feminine form, instead of 
Andaluza, 



33 
LESSON XXXIII. 

TITLES, TEADES, ETC. 



Diique, marquez, conde. 
Banqueiro, barbeiro, barqueiro. 
Mei'cador, ferrador, pescador. 
Droguista, oculista, perfumista. 
Bibliothecario, empregado. 
Mestre, official, trabalhador. 
Porteiro, portador, gallego.* 



Duke, marquis, earl. 
Banker, barber, boatman. 
Shopkeeper, farrier, fisher. 
Druggist, optician, perfumer. 
Librarian, official. 
Tradesman, workman, labourer. 
Gatekeeper, messenger, porter. 



Urn banqueiro tern banco de commercio. Seu pai e 
barbeiro. Os baroes de Portugal. Com o titulo de conde. 
O casamento do infante. Trabalhadores para a vinha. 
Eii era mercador e pescador, O chronista da idade media. 
O barco do pescador. O guar da mor. Cada homem e 
fabricador da sua fortuna. Os seg adores sao os anjos. Os 
pedes da terra. Um ourives de prata, por nome Demetrio. 
O presidente interino. Ajuddnte de campo do rei com o 
grau de coronet. Joao e medico, e Pedro negocidnte. Por- 
teiro, homem que guarda a porta. Portador, pessoa que 
leva carta ou carga. 



The officer of the law. The mind of the statesman. 
The fishermen and the reapers. Greorge the Third was 
King of England. The gardener, the miller, and the cow- 
herd. The woodcutter, labourer, and ploughman. The 
Queen of Sweden. Marquis of Pombal. The Earl of 
Derby. The merchants of Scotland. The Counts of Bar- 
celona. The DuJce of Saldanha. The minister of the in- 
terior. The grand-master of the order. The treasurer 
of the palace. Ministers and secretaries of state. The 
Professor of Portuguese Grammar. The second lieu- 
tenants. The librarian is not at home. The gatekeeper 
of the quinta. 

* " Gallego" literally means a Gallician ; but the Gallicians in 
Lisbon are the ivater-carriers and porters of the city. " Mariola" — 
translated " porter" (!) in the dictionaries — means blackguard. 



34 
LESSON XXXIV. 

NAMES OP PLACES.* 

Officma, fabrica. I Work-shop, manufactory. 

Tinturaria, cordoaria. Dve-house, rope-yard, 

Moniho de vento, momho d'agua. Wind-mill, water-mill. 
Pombal, laranjal, pomar. , Dovecot, orangery, orchard. 

Tapada, achada, ramada. j Park, leTel, bower. 

Oratorio, observatorio. j Oratory, observatory. 



As officinas de imprimir. paldcio da marinha. 
escriptorio dos passapdrtes. Fnndicao dos typos. Uma 
se, uma igreja, e uma cape'lla. O pdco episcopal. Uma 
cdsa de trabalho. asylo dos surdo-mudos. Uma tin- 
turaria e uma qfficina de tingir. A torre de Londres. 
Os arsendes, estaleiros, e officinas onde se fabricam as 
nans. Urn pombdl e uma casa de criacao dos pombos. 
Um laranjal e um pomar de laranjeiras. A qfficina typo- 
graphica. Um distillatorio. Uma loja. Uma cdsa de 
pdsto. Ape'sca do arenque. 



The war-office, the custom-house, and the wu>^. A 
fish-market. An eating-house. Wind-mills and water-mills 
are in the country. An eagle in a dovecot. A kitchen- 
garden is a more pleasant sight than the finest orangery. 
Baths, o? , chards,&Tid fish-pools. The palace of Holyrood. 
The observatory of Greenwich. An orchard and a kitchen- 
garden. The museum of natural history. The Royal 
library. A lunatic asylum. Paper-mills. Carpet-manu- 
factory. A cannon-foundry. An oratory is a private 
place for prayer. Steam-engine manufactory. Type- 
foundry. The Ajuda palace. A printing-office. 



* The usual terminations indicating to7iere a thing is, is done, 
or a trade carried on, are al, ada f ia, ina, orio. 



35 
LESSON XXXV. 

DIMINTJTITES.* 

Ribeirfnho, braceletinho, folhinha. Eivulet, braceletinho, leaflet. 

Gansinho, patmho. ; Gosling, duckling. 
Cordeirmho, anao ou anaosmho. Lambkin, mannikin. 
Gatmho, cachorrmho, caosinho. Kitten, puppy, whelp. 
Particula, corpusculo. Particle, corpuscle. 

Monticulo, Guilhermmho. Hillock, "Willie." 

Vasilha. Coitadfnho ! ! Utensil. Poor little thing ! 



As arrecadas e braceletes nas maos de sua irma. A 
margem do ribeirinho. O bracelete d'Annicas. patmho 
da poca. O gansinho da criacao. O cordeirinho da niaii- 
jadoura. O anao do pa^o. gatmho do pastorinho. Os 
cachorrinhos da moceta. TJma particula da cartinha. 
Urn corpusculo do escudete. Os livrinhos da escola. 
velhaquete do criado. As maosinhas da menina. Os 
cavallinhos do circo. TJma ilhota deserta. A luzinha 
da aurora. A coroasinlia da condessa. Uma febrinha e 
uma pequena febre. Coitandinho ! 



By fountain or by shady rivulet. Bracelets of gold. 
An odorous chaplet of sweet buds. Drakes, ducks, and 
ducklings. The coronets of the dukes. The islets in the 
river. Eaglets. The levrets were in the field. A. brood 
of goslings. Clean as young lambkins. Whelps or kittens. 
The gilded puppets. Young puppies are blind. Particles 
of bodies. Corpuscles are atoms or small fragments . The 
mountain and a few hillocks. Here are rolls. The poor 
puppj. The little steamer. Little William was the 
youngest son. My little son. The little brother was in 
the house. The. dwarf is in the rivulet. A leaflet is a 
little leaf. 

* Diminutives are much used in Portuguese, and the correct 
employment of them is no slight test of a foreigner's proficiency. 
They do not always imply diminutiveness, but very often express 
compassion or affection. 



36 



LESSON XXXVI. 

atjgmentatives {often slang). 



Hdruemzarrao, sabidiao. 

Doutoraco. 

Toleiriio, mocetao, casacao. 

Rapazao, papelao,* ratao.f 

Velhacaz, mulherao, chapeirao. 

Mocetona, mullierona. 



Large man, wiseacre. 

A mighty doctor. 

Great fool, bumpkin, great-coat. 

Iiig boy, thick paper. 

Old rake, amazon, " bad hat." 

Stout lass, big woman. 



homemzarrdo da Patagonia. O doutordgo de Coim- 
bra. O toleirao do entremez. O mocetao do criado. Pa- 
pelao de desenho. O velhacaz do boieiro. O rapazao do 
arrieiro. cura era bonacheirao. Os mestrdgos de direito. 
As mocetonas da feira. As mulheronas do arraiaJ. Os^>a- 
peloes do theatro. Os paspalhoes da praca publica. Os 
rapazoes de freguezia. Os toleiroes da plateia. Os 
bonacheiroes da republiea. Os Allemaes sao hdmemzarroes. 
O velhacaz do porteiro. Sabidiao em direito. casacao 
do meu amigo. O toleirao tern o teu casacao. 



The wiseacres bave general ideas on the question. 
He is a mighty doctor of Oxford. Tbe inhabitants of 
Patagonia are immense men. The blockhead of a boy has 
not his lessons. The great fool was in the theatre of D. 
Fernando. Ton bave a " shocking bad hat." Your 
great-coat is in your room. Tbe curate is a " right-good 
fellow." The bumpkin of a groom is in tbe stable. Tbe 
big lads of the parish. Tbe good felloivs of tbe city. 
The G-ermans are jolly men. This is my old great-coat. 
John is a queer fellow. 



* Papelao also means " a swell" a braggart. 

t Ratao is a term of contempt, equal to "queer fellow, 



odd 



fish," etc. 



37 



LESSON XXXVII. 



ADJECTIVES. 



Delicioso, doloroso. 
Perigoso, precioso. 
Terr^stre, celeste, planetario. 
Brutal, pessoal, formal. 
Branqumho, negrmho. 



Delightful, painful. 
Dangerous, precious. 
Earthly, heavenly, planetary. 
Brutal, personal, formal. 
Whitish, blackish. 



TJhi jardim delicioso. TJma operacao dolorosa. N'um 
logar perigoso. Yinho hrdnco. Urn perigoso visinho. 
Urn momento de cruel incerteza. Uni velho soldado de 
valor. Kpreciosa purpura do seu vestido comprido. Os 
espiritos celestes. A guerra divide-se em terrestre e mari- 
tima. Moco estrangeiro. Um genio brutal. Urn ser- 
vico pessoal. Um cavallo Arabe. Uma declaracaoybrwaZ. 
O negro esta calado e immovel. Uma reform ageral no 
governo. O progresso do ensino publico. Obrigacao 
pessoal. Um chapeu de veludo preto. Os preciosos res- 
tos da antiguidade. 



A rustic simplicity. Warm water. In a delicious 
place. A personal service to the young stranger. The 
war by land. The precious wine. The operation is dan- 
gerous. The man is silent. In the variety of contradic- 
tory opinions. The planetary system. A dangerous 
disease. The white hat. A. furious horse is a dangerous 
neighbour. In the military college. Good counsel is the 
first duty of a true friend. A view of the principal city. 
In a historical work. A delightful climate. Delightful 
music. A painful loss. A dangerous enterprise. The 
precious gifts of nature. Celestial blue. 



38 
LESSON XXXVIII. 

ADJECTIYES. 

Activo, antigo, fugitive Active, ancient, fugitive. 

Horrivel, agradavel, singular, Horrible, agreeable, singular. 

Amado, vestido, continuado. Beloved, dressed, continued. 

Domestico, humano, moderno. Domestic, human, modem. 

Constante, decente, differente. j Constant, decent, different. 



mum do antigo. Um hdmem activo. Uma morte 
horrivel. Urna voz agradavel. reifugitivo. Uma coiu- 
cidencia singular. Um animal domestico. Um vento 
constante. O altar vestido de brocado. Uma continudda 
primavera. O poder independente. O genero humano. 
O poder absoluto. Sabbado pass ado. A guerra incessdnte 
com o bellicoso rei. O sentimento de independencia na- 
tional. Com gerdl applause Na seguinte noite. Uma 
guerra domestica. O valente rei de Leao. prado ves- 
tido de relva. Portugal modtrno. Uma terra abunddnte 
de fructas. 



An active king. The horrible death of the Arabian 
horse. The agreeable voice of the queen. Domestic 
affairs. A steady wind. The power of national indepen- 
dence. The new world. The fugitive animal. The royal 
palace is an irregular edifice. A fatal and horrible pre- 
sentiment. The singular aspect. A short period. Natural 
history. A terrible example. The public authority. An 
active life. Ancient customs. Fugitive years. A horrible 
monster. The singular number. A man clothed with 
honour. The fugitive slave. Continued labours. Disco- 
veries continued by new explorers. A domestic animal. 
Human weakness. 



N6vo, nova ; perfeito, a ; velho, a. 
Chris- ( a ") ; bom, boa; vao, va, 

tao, (, an ) mao, ma. 
Portuguez, a ; Hespanhdl, a -. 

mi, a. 
Breve, final, feh'z, fiel. 



39 
LESSON XXXIX. 

ADJECTIVES (GENDEE.) 

New, perfect, old. 



Christian, good, bad, vain. 
Portuguese, Spanish, naked. 

Short, final, happy, faithful. 



Em perfeita saude. altar da velha cathedral. Urn 
novo meio. Os tempos da restaura^ao christd. TJma noite 
linda. Em boa occasiao. Pedro o cru. Carne crua. Urn 
mdu jantar. TJma gravata brdnca. A minha casaca nova. 
A ultima mdda. Cerveja brdnca. Urn homem sdo. TJma 
doutrina sa. Agu&fria. TJma espada nua. Em seguuda 
mao. Muita moeda falsa. A curta distancia. O vdsto 
corpo da monarchia Sespanhola. Um calor excessivo. 
TJma boa e bonita carruagem. O grao Tiirco. A Gra- 
Bretanha. fjma frondosa arvore. Elle e vao. Um 
bello dia. 



My faithful friend is in perfect health. Vain ambi- 
tion. The girl is young and vain. Sound advice. A 
volcanic eruption. The populous city of Turin. Books in 
the Spanish and Portuguese languages. In the principal 
street of Burgos. The coat is new, in the last fashion. 
The man has a beautiful voice. At a short distance from 
the old cathedral. A new and excellent bridge. The 
'premature death of the king. A town pretty, well-built, 
and clean. It is not a new thing. A naked sword. His 
barefoot. A perfect work. A good climate. Good fruit. 
Good air. 



40 
LESSON XL. 

ADJECTIVES (sIKGULAE). 



Um dia* bonito. 
Cerveja branca. 
Um trem especial. 
Um quarto retirado. 
Bom anno ; anno bom.f 
Seis pes de largo. 



A beautiful day. 
Ale (white beer). 
A special train. 
A retired room. 
Abundant year ; neiv year. 
Six feet broad. 



Neste empenho patriotico. O correio estrangeiro. A 
camara municipal. Uma febre aguda. Nenhuma desco- 
berta importdnte. A primeira necessidade. O unico 
meio. Mappa geogrdphico do theatro da guerra. Nossa 
bella provincia. Uma communicacao regular. Uma mulher 
casdda. Seu mdu procedimento. No dia seguinte. A 
grdnde cidade industrial de Birmingham. Um Undo ta- 
pete de verdiira. Um famoso dia.* Um prato limpo. 
Agua quente. Manteiga fresca. Meu sempre cliorddo 
sobrinlio. O meu culpdvel esquecimento. seu obse- 
quioso convite. 



A strong defensive position. A severe fever. The 
beautiful province. Cold water. An irregular commu- 
nication. The first discovery. Last year. The kind 
proposal of the governor. The large commercial city of 
Bristol. His ever-lamented sister. The civil governor 
of the province. The bad behaviour of the captain- 
general. Fresh butter and a clean plate. A married 
man. On the following day. By the first ship. The 
patriotic general. The culpable forgetfulness of the cap- 
tain. In such a case. In this important employment. 
Our beautiful house. 

* A few words in " a" are masculine. 

t The adjective generally follows the noun in Portuguese, but 
sometimes precedes. Usage determines ; but the sense is altered by 
the relative position, as above; like "petit homme," and "homme 
petit." 



41 
LESSON XLL 

ADJECTIVES (PLTJBAL*). 



Noticias estrangeiras. 
As condic^es seguintes 
Ar vores fructiferas. 
Actos immordes. 
Os redes hdspedes. 
As authoridades civis. 



foreign intelligence. 
The following conditions. 
Fruitful trees. 
Immoral acts. 
The royal guests. 
The civil authorities, 



Sens servicos pessodes. Os nieus agradecimentos sin- 
ceros. Os capitaes-yewmzes de differentes districtos. Os 
officiaes superiores tem tido febres epidemicas. As es- 
quadras combinddas. Cronstadt tem immensas fortifica- 
coes abundantemente artilhddas. Cartas fechddas. As 
boas maneiras do commandante, e o bom arranjo de todas 
as cousas. Yunecioiiirios publicos bem escolhidos e bem 
pdgos. ISTos primeiros dias do corrente mez de Julho. 
Gruerras civis. Estes excellentes pianos. As vinhas do- 
entes. Coracoes insensweis. Pagamentos igudes. 



The following proposals. Important news. The civil 
and military authorities. The personal services of the 
public functionaries. The first days of the week. The 
English officers in the combined squadrons. The pleasant 
manners of the French generals. The immense fortifica- 
tions of Sebastopol. The naval and military resources. 
Useful letters. The royal generals. The excellent hearts 
of the princes. Two English steam-frigates of the com- 
bined squadrons. The foreign generals have serious 
apprehensions. The three great powers. His sincere 
thanks. 

* Adjectives form their plurals as nouns do. For Eules, see 
Appendix. 



42 

LESSON XLIL 

adjectives (plural continued). 
Good ; two ; bad. 



Bons, boas ; dois, duas ; maus 

mas. 
Saos, sas ; delicidsos, osas. 
Allemaes, as ; nacionaes, suaves 
Faceis, amaveis, difficeis. 
Posteriores, civfs, urgentes. 



Sound, delicious. 
German, national, sweet. 
Easy, amiable, difficult. 
After, civil, urgent. 



B,aro co mo os bans dias. A publicacao dos primeiros 
dois volumes. As duas grandes epochas. Os periddicos 
Allemaes. Ares saos. Cidades sas. As divisoes territo- 
rides. dvos quentes. As cores nacionaes. Os linea- 
mentos principdes da idade. Os sudves accentos da sua 
voz. Estes delicidsos sitios. Uma latada de tenras vides. 
As riias sao limpas e as casas bem edificddas. As coudi- 
qoesfdceis. Hdmens amaveis. Estudos difficeis. Pri- 
vilegios pessodes. JNegdcios urgentes. As senhoras 
Allemas. Pennas metdllicas. As memdrias cliristds. Os 
successos posteriores. 



Civil wars. The days are short. The paintings are 
admirable. Cities large and small. The roads are good. 
Two volumes of the German book. The two great cities. 
The national privileges. The civil rights. Streets good 
and bad. The sweet accents of the beautiful voices. The 
difficult aiFairs. The German institutions. The principal 
streets of the new cities are clean. Terrible difficulties. 
Irreconcilable enemies. The remarkable buildings. 
Happy men. Royal persons. Fertile fields. The ad- 
acent provinces. The streets are narrow. Fossil riches. 



43 
LESSON XLIIL 

ADJECTIVES (COMPARATIVE).' 



Mdis esclarecido que-^- 
Menos agradavel que — 
Tao alto e tao branco. 
!Nao tao quente como — 
Melhdr, peidr, mendr, maidr. 
Tanto melhdr; muito.* 



More enlightened than — 

Less agreeable than — 

So tall and white. 

Not so hot as — 

Better, worse, less, greater. 

So much the better ; very. 



bom resultado e menos duvidoso. Esse desciiido e 
muito mdis notdvel. Um logar era menos importdnte e 
menos pingue, outro mdis importdnte e mdis rendoso. O 
fim foi mdis agradavel que o principio. Mdis curto na 
saia. Quero as calcaa mdis compridas. Acho a cama muito 
dura. Porque esta a carne mais cdra ? cabello deve 
estar mais liso e lustroso. clima nao e tao quente 
como na Inglaterra no verao, nem tao frio como la no 
inverno. Aquellas mulheres nao sao tao ooas como estes 
homens. Bases mdis solidas que as da forca material. 



The hand is more exposed than the foot. The battle 
was less doubtful. The woman was more remarkable than 
the man. The climate is less agreeable than that of 
Madeira. My brother is better to-day. The place was 
more important but not so lucrative. The winter is more 
agreeable than the summer. Henry is not so tall as 
James. I want the trousers not so long, but wider. The 
water is not so cold as it is in the hills. Longer in the 
waist. This bed is harder than yours. His health is 
icorse than mine. So much the worse. Europe is more 
enlightened than Asia. These girls are better than those 
boys. 

* " Miiito" used adverbially in comparisons means both very 
and too; e.g., "Miiito grande" may mean "very large" or "too 
large," according to the context. " Mais melhor " is, though common, 
an odious vulgarism. 



44 



LESSON XLIY. 

adjectives (coitPA"RATiYES continued). 

Tao infeliz como grande. f As unhappy as great. 
S. e mdis formosa que eu. S. is handsomer than I. 

O mdis bravo dos dois. The braver of the two. 

MaiorzinJio. j A little larger. 

Menos preguicoso que eu. ! Less lazy than I. 



Joao e mdis generoso que Carlos. Nada ha tao con- 
tagioso como o exeiuplo. filho e mellwr medico que 
o pae. Mdis cldro que o sol. Mdis hrdnco que a neve, 
Muito mdis sujeitos a fadigas. O sol e mdis orillidnte 
que as estrellas. Com miiita mdis furia e pressa do que, 
etc. Uma casa mdis illustre do que rica. Um trata- 
mento menos duro do que era usual. As mulheres pobres 
com paciencia metis propria d'Allemas que de Portu- 
guezas. Mdis que provdvel. Uma toalha mais fiua. 
Joao e tao sdbio como seu irmao. 



My patience is as great as yours. Mary is more 
generous than Jane. The swain is happier than his mo- 
narch. Iron is harder than wood. Mary is lazier than 
Anna. Nothing is so white as snow. The son is as 
learned as the father. The queen is more beautiful than 
the countess. The sun is much more brilliant than the 
moon. Homer was the greater genius. Yirgil the better 
artist. The shorter road of the two. The poor women 
are more subject to fatigue than the men. The bread is 
better than ever. The more dangerous, the more ho- 
nourable. 



45 



LESSON XLV. 

ADJECTIVES (STJrERLATIVES), 



As metis bellas sao as que — 

Com o mdis prqfmdo respeito. 

~Bdbr&t'issimo. Optimo. 

Os paizes mdis ciiltos. 

Nem o menor favor. 

A maior opposicao possfvel. 



The handsomest are those which . . . 

With the greatest respect. 

Very cheap. Very good. 

The most civilized lands. 

Not the least favour. 

The greatest possible opposition. 



As mdis vivas sympathias. Os poritos mdis expdstos 
ao sol. Com a maior affabilidade. Eazendo os maior es 
mas os mdis bem merecidos. E-einava a melhdr intelli- 
gencia entre os Erancezes e Inglezes das duas esqua- 
dras. O principe tern mostrado grandissima actividade. 
Em todos os paizes mdis adiantddos na carreira da civili- 
sacao ha o maior desvelo, etc. Admiraveis exemplos do 
mdis esclarecich zelo. O governador e sem diivida pessoa 
da maior respeitabilidade. Tern havido sempre a melhdr 
vontade de acabar com o trafico da escravatiira. 



The greatest possible favour. The most civilized coun- 
try. The most lively sympathy. Tour friend is doubt- 
less a person of the greatest respectability. She was my 
best pupil. This wine is very cheap. The house most 
exposed to the sun. He is my best friend. Show me the 
best cloth you have. The lest deserved praises. The most 
polite attentions. Not the least opposition. The best 
understanding between the pupils. The tiger is very 
cruel. The Queen has exhibited very great activity. The 
country is the most advanced in civilization. The hand- 
somest flowers. 



46 



LESSON XLYI. 

adjectives (superlative continued). 



A guerra a mdisfeliz. 
O mdis sdbio de tddos. 
Os inimfgos mdis per igosos. 
Virgilio e mux grdnde poeta. 



The most fortunate Tvar. 
The wisest of all. 
The most dangerous foes. 
Virgil is a very great poet. 



Homero e um poeta grandissimo. \ His are exceedingly great poem 



O Capitolio era o mais celebre edificio de Roma. Na 
parte mais oriental da cidade. O sol esta brilhantissimo. 
O sol e o mdis brilliante dos astros. Yarrao foi o mdis 
douto dos Romanos. A mdis importdnte noticia. O modo 
mdisfdcil para os cultivadores. As durissimas guerras. 
Nesta gravissima historia. Uma das qualidades mais no- 
tdveis. Um cavalleiro mui illustre, chamado Ermigio. 
Uma cousa certissima. A sciencia dos mdis habeis cirur- 
gioes. As profimdezas mdis obscuras do universo ideal. 
Utilissimos servicos. 



The newest works in the language. The most skilful 
engraver. The newest patterns. The most beautiful 
flowers. The most eminent authority. The civilization 
of India is the most ancient of the old civilizations of 
Asia. In the most western part of the city. The moon 
is very bright. Cicero was the most eloquent of the 
Romans. The most important service. The nearest way. 
The fields are very fertile. One of the most illustrious 
cavaliers. The eyes of the Portuguese are very black. 
The most remarkable qualities of the poet. The most 
certain proofs. 



47 



LESSON XLVIL 

ADJECTIVES (iKEEOTLAR IN" COMPARISON). 



( o maidr, max- 
Grande, maidr, •< imo. 

(. grandissimo. 

P6uco, menos, \ P°^ s ™> 

Quente, mais i quentissimo. 
quente, ( o mais quente. 



•I 



Great, greater, 

' B ' (very great. 

Few, fewer, (fewest, 

Small, \ very few. 

Hot, hotter, J hotte J* ' 

' 7 ( very not. 



Com grandissimo difficuldade, A maior das pracas e 
a de Luiz XV. Menos orgiilho. Grandissimo gosto. Urn 
inimigo acerrimo. Proximo a ruina. Urn asperrimo 
castigador. Um poeta celeberrimo. Yossa Magestade 
Christianissima. Palavras dulcissimas. Um clima frigi- 
dissimo. Humilliwia miseria. De pouquissima impor- 
tancia. Perpetua era pobre, pobrissima. IJma porcao 
tenuissima. Uma cidade antiga. IJma antiquissima 
villa. Os ultimos momentos do artista. O rei fidelis- 
simo. Os Eomanos onagnificentissimos nas obras publicas. 



The greatest soldier. The largest of the cities. Byron 
was a very celebrated poet. The climate of Canada is very 
cold. A most ancient castle. A very bloody battle. A 
most cruel punishment. "With very great eloquence. A 
very bitter enemy. A most noble intellect. The largest 
of the trees. The greatest danger. The Greeks very 
magnificent in temples, This holds less liquid than that. 
Very near death. The need century. A very cold climate. 
The house next to the castle. Less vanity. A very cele- 
brated author, She is very poor. 



48 



LESSOX XLVIII. 

ADJECTIVES (IREEGTJLAB BOTH IN ENGLISH AXD 

Portuguese). 



Born, melhdr, 



o melhor. 

( o dptimo. 
Man, } . , ( o peior. 

Ruirn, ) 1 ' ( o pessiino. 

C o rnais pe- 
Pequeno, menur, < queno. 

(. o mmimo. 



G-ood, better, best. 
Bad, worse, worst. 
Little, less, least. 



O sol e mawr que a terra. Indo na melhor ordem. 
Que melhores documentos ? As terras negras sao as me- 
lhores. Este instrumento e melhor que o outro. O filho 
e peior que o pae. O vinho commum e pouco horn. Al- 
guma cousa peior. lienor quantidade. A Eurdpa e 
menor que a Asia. Com a maior clareza. A plebe pela 
maior parte e poire. melhor meio de ser feliz. Cora 
pequenas excepcoes. Eaz muitissimo frio. melhor de 
mens amigos. Com wzh'fopressa. Da melhor qualidade. 
Elle tinha metis que os outros. As melhor es hospedarias. 



Last, test, and greatest. In the worst inn's uws£ room. 
The earth is greater that the moon. The house is in the 
lest order. A greater service. Freedom's lest and bravest 
friend. With the least difficulty. The streets of the 
city are in the lest order. Black soil is the lest. The 
wine is of the lest quality. The lest things are in the city. 
The houses are very lad. The streets are very good and 
clean. One of the most amiable men. The first of his 
class. One of the most lamentable instances. Patriot- 
ism is the worst counsellor of the historian. These are 
good and lad. A planet is greater than a satellite. A 
smaller number. 



LESSON XLIX. 



ADJECTIYES (nUMEEAL). 



lfvros, diias cartas. 



XJm Ifvro, uma carta. 

Dois 

Dous 

O primeiro dia, a segunda vez. 

So, o diiplo, o triplo. 

12 de Maio de 1852. 



One book, one letter. 

Two books, two letters. 

The first day, the second time. 
Single, double, treble. 
12th Mar, 1852. 



Cento e um. Trezentos e cincoenta e cinco. Em segundo 
logar. Livro primeiro. Capitulo quinto. Jorge Quarto. 
Luiz Quatorze. Em cinco de Julho. As duas primeiras 
cartas. O terco. Um dos primciros deveres do hdmem. 
Em vinte e nove dias. Dous mil quinhentos e trinta e 
qudtro homens. Mil e quinhentas casas. A carta e 
datada de vinte e dous de Marco. Em quinze de Maio. 
E uma hora. Sao duas horas menos um quarto. As 
qudtro. Tres arrateis. Setenta e dous francos. De tres 
bracas de comprido e duas e meia de largo. Uma decima 
septima. 



Four hundred and fifty men. "William the Fourth. In 
the third place. Chapter the sixth. In the fourth place. 
The letter is dated the twenty-second of January. On the 
fourth of July. Three pounds of coffee. Monday at two 
o'clock. Three leagues long and two broad. Four thou- 
sand two hundred and forty houses. It is a quarter to 
three o'clock. Twelve to fourteen leagues. The fourth. 
The seventh of March. In three minutes. 7th January, 
1850. In the year 1824. Peter the First. Two-thirds 
of the nation. Five thousand persons. Not a single 
word of truth. Two hundred and ten soldiers. The 6th 
of January, 1854. 



50 



LESSON L. 

ADJECTIVES (INDEFINITE, DECLINABLE). 

Todo, total, ambos. 1 All (or the -whole), total, both. 

Os inais, todos os nidis. The rest, all the rest. 

Algum,* nenhum. | Some, an) 7 ; no one, no, none, not 



Certo, rruiito, qualquer. 



any. 
cert 
ever. 



Todos os dias. Todos os povos. Algwns navios da es- 
quadra. Tula a tarde. TCdas as novidades. A ruina 
toted. Alguns defeitos. Algumas peras. Nenhwn dos 
juizes. < trio homem diz. ]S 6s todos. Todos elles. 
Muita gente. Miiitos livros. Alguma pessoa. Pessoa 
algum a. A somma total. Tdl amo, tdl crm&o. ~Ne\x\um, 
nera outro. Alguns cem soldados. Ambos cemtao o 
mesmo ciiso. JSao facas tdl. Por outra maneira. O 
outro dia. Os bispos Ano-|h-anos sao ricos, os outros ec- 
clesiasticos pobres. Muitas razoes. Os mats. Ntnhwm 
dos dons. Sem nenhum vestigio. 



All the family. Every day. Another time. So much 
work. Something. All of us. Many letters and many 
books. The sum total is 4-00 dollars. M. Such-a-one 
says. One brother is in Canada, the other in Madeira. 
Some geographers. Any man. No man. Not much 
warmth of imagination. The first of all the Soman 
kings. Some time. As the parent, so the child. Others 
say. To such a woman. All the rest. They are all our 
friends, as-many-as you see. Some of the men. I do 
not remember such. Some inscription. Some letters. 
Without any vestige. 

* It has a negative force after the noun. " Arvore alguma se 
encdntra nos desertos d' Africa," " No tree is met within the 
deserts of Africa." 



51 



LESSON LI. 

ADJECTIVES (INDEFINITE, INDECLINABLE). 



Cada : niais, cada urn. 
Nada,* tudo. 
Ninguem, outrem. 



Each, every ; more, every one. 
Nothing ; everything, all. 
None, nobody, no one ; another. 



Alguein ; quemquer. I Anybody ; -whoever, whatever. 



Cdda dia. Mdis crimes que virtiides. Tudo esta 
perdido. Cdda um para si. Men tudo ! Mais vinho que 
agua. Ninguem e feliz. Aquillo que pertence a outrem. 
Ninguem d'elles. Se alguem vier — . Pela resposta de cdda 
pergunta. Cdda vez mais. Quantos medicos, mdis mo- 
lestias. Nao e ndda. Ndda menos. Homem capaz de 
tudo. Ndda de novo. Cdda periodo da vida tem prazeres. 
Mdis gloria que proveito. Em cdda julgado ha um juiz. 
Outro qualquer meio. Quemquer que esta ahi, 1'a.lle. 
Alguem cliz o que nao sabe. Quer ir ? Nada* 



Every night. More money than wit. All is done. 
Every man for himself. John is my all. No one in this 
world is happy. Nothing new in the papers. Every man. 
Every tenth soldier. She had more knowledge than the 
others. "Will you go ? By no means* All was going 
well in the ship. He is a nobody. In generosity he yields 
to no one. In every city of the kingdom. More water 
than wine. More and more. Every language has its 
defects. Every word and action. If any one comes. 
My all. Any other away. It is nothing. Every period 
of life. All is lost. 

* Often used, in denying emphatically, for " nao" {t por r.wdo 
nenhiim" " not at all," " by no means." 



52 
LESSON LII. 

ADJECTIVES (PEC-PEE).* 



O publico Porttiense. 
A nacao Portugueza. 
Sua magestade Britdnnica. 
O general Austriaco. 
O governo Saxonio. 
Um comniissario Twrco. 



The Oporto public. 
The Portuguese nation. 
Her Britannic Majesty. 
The Austrian general. 
The Saxon government. 
A Turkish commissioner. 



Uma peca de panno Hespanhol. Hiate Portuguez Oli- 
ve ira. ~Brigue Biglez Alpha. Umafragata Ingleza. Biirca 
Prussidna Lucifer. Uma galeota Hollandeza. Luas 
escimas Inglezas. Urn barco de vapor de guerra Srasi- 
leiro. A associacao industrial Portuensc. As tropas 
Austrian as. As potencias Allemds. O embaixador Pusso. 
O publico Lisbonense. Sua magestade Belga. As malas 
Poruguezas. Os generaes Pussos. O governo Francez. 
As cortes Allemds. Os generaes sao todos emigrados 
Poldcos, Hungaros e Italianos. Brigue Sueco Maryanna. 
A bandeira Americana. 



The Saxon general. The Spanish mails. The English 
government. The Portuguese ambassador. The Prussian 
troops. The Hungarian generals. The 'Brazilian par- 
liament. The Russian flag. Three French schooners 
and an American war-steamer. The German generals 
and the French ambassadors. The British nation and the 
Portuguese government. The Banish public. The Greek 
language. A French brig and three English frigates. 
Many Hungarian and Italian refugees are (estao) in the 
Turkish armies. A Banish family is (esta) in the Ameri- 
can steamer. 

* Portuguese authors sometimes write proper adjectives with 
capital letters ; sometimes not. The former practice is more Portu- 
guese, the latter more French. 



LESSON LIIL 
adjectives (peoper continued.) 



As ilhas Britannicas. 
Cinco reis Mouros. 
A dynastia AvMriaca. 
O iinperio Grego. 
Varias tribus Indias. 



The British Islands. 
Five Moorish kings. 
The Austrian dynasty. 
The Greek empire. 
Various Indian tribes. 



arsenal do exercito Fortuguez. Exposicao da in- 
dustria Madeirense. TJm rico fidalgo Genovez. A monar- 
chia Hespanhola. AconquistaiiWcm#. A lingua Hebrdica. 
A musa Homerica. governo Britdnnico. A igreja An- 
glicdna. A raca Hottentote. O verdadeiro camello Arabe. 
Nas Indias Orientdes. Chandernagor, capital dos esta- 
belecimsntos Francezes no territorio Bengalim. IMbens, 
graude artista Flamengo. A lingua Allema. Oscaracteres 
do alphabefco Germdnico. Na provincia Fussidna de Ozen- 
burgo. Esta casta Africdna. O publico Lisbonense. 



The British army. The Madeira people. The Latin 
language. The Arabian horse. The English establish- 
ments in India. The Russian forces. The Caspian sea. 
A great Roman bridge. A superb Gothic cathedral. 
The French Empire. The German confederation. The 
Teutonic knights. The German states of Austria. Eng- 
lish horses. The Lisbon Cathedral. Some Greek monks. 
The Portuguese flag. The French republic of 1848. The 
Lisbon press. The Banish territory. The Judaic law. 
He is a Flemish painter. The Hebrew text. 



54 
LESSON LIV. 

ADJECTIVES (COMPOUND). 

Recem-chegadOj recern-vmdo. ' Newly-arrived, newly-come. 

Bemaventurado, bemdito, bem Fortunate, blessed, well-born. 

nascido. 

Siipracitado, bem vindo. | Above-quoted, welcome. 

Abaixo assignado. j Undersigned. 

Mal creado, mal dizente, malfeito. j Ill-bred, evil-speaking, ill-made 

Sempre-viva, sempre-verde. ' Ever-living, ever-green. 



Guide para esta cella o recem-chegado. Diante dos 
freguezes recem-vindos. Os filhos rccem nasci'dos. Aquel- 
laa ilhas hemaventurddas. Os campiuos ficarao cabisbdixos. 
O author da carta supracitdda. Os abdioco assignddos. 
G-16ria sempre-viva. Eriicta sem-sabor . O man to awri- 
fulgente. O homem e recem-defuncto. Bemdito seja 
Deos ? E miiito mal creddo. Herva sempre-verde. 
Alma bemfazeja. JBenemerito de penna. Unia planta 
sempre-viva e uma planta que se conserva verde todo o 
anno. E urn homem semsahor. 



The child is newlg-dead. The new-comer is my bro- 
ther's friend. The new-born child is very strong. In- 
sipid wine. In a fortunate hour. A benevolent heart. 
Deserving well of his country. The words of the above- 
quoted letter. The tricolor flag. Animals carnivorous 
and herbivorous. The' young man is very ill-bred. The 
antepenultimate syllable. The benevolent soul of the old 
man. Blessed be God. Those happy lands. The trees 
ever-green. The poor sailor was half-dead. The under- 
signed members of the society. "Well deserving of punish- 
ment. He is welcome. 



55 



LESSON LY. 

ADJECTIVES (AUGMENT ATI VES AND DIMINUTIVES), 



Sosmho, friosmho, bomzfnho. 
Innocentfnho, fraqumho, doen- 

tfnho. 
Baixmho, tenrmho, acabadmho. 
Soberbao. 

Cabeciido, nerviido. 
Doutoraco. 



All alone, cold, good. 
Innocent, weakly, poorly. 

Short, tender, done. 

Proud. 

Blockhead, strong-nerved. 

Wiseacre. 



TJm cavalleiro chegou sosmho a porta. A filha inno- 
centinha. A velha comecou a fallar baixmho. Sua mes- 
quinha irma. Os cavalleiros forao sahindo do paco tris- 
tonhos. IJnia roseirinha pequenina, bonitinha. Hdinem 
cabegudo. Ha iiuias certas boquinhas gravesinlias e es- 
premidinhas pela doutorice. . . Estamos sosinhas nos 
diias neste mundo. Elle bateu devagarinho. Elle tem 
olhar de soberbao. Tem-se em conta de doutordgo- XJma 
casa lindinha. coelho e mviito tenrmho. O velhinho 
esta muito acabadinho. Tem bracos nervudos. 



He is a good Utile fellow. We were all alone in the 
house. She is a sweet little innocent. The daughter of 
the little man is pretty. The child is weakly. Little 
John is naughty. The poor little blind girl. The little 
negress is poorly. His little feet are cold. Your frock is 
new and clean. The boy began to speak loiv. My neat 
little house. My brother knocked softly. Thomas considers 
himself a learned man. The melancholy cavaliers. He 
reached the gate all alone. We two are all alone. That 
wicked little monkey ! She has a siveetly pretty bonnet. 
Such a darling child. 

* The diminutive power of the adjective often qualifies the noun 
with which that adjective agrees. 



o6 

LESSON LVI. 
pEowoxrars (pebsoxal). 



Eu, de mini, a mim, mim, rac. 
Nds, de nds, a nds, nds. 
Tu, de ti, a ti, ti. 
Vds, de vds, a vds, vds. 
Elle, delle, a elle, elle * 
Ella, della, a ella, ella. 
Elles, delles, a elles, elles (ra.). 
Ellas, deltas, a ellas, ellas (f.). 



I, of ine, to me, me, me. 
We, of us, to us, us. 
Thou, of thee, to thee, thee. 
You, of you, to you, you. 
He, of him, to him, him. 
She, of her, to her, her. 
They, of them, to them, them. 
They, of them, to them, them. 



Elle e generdso. JSfos somos venturdsos. Elles estao 
occupados. Nao sou siirdo. Dous delles. Tu aban- 
donas os amigos. Eu o chamo. Eu amo. Elle esta 
prompto. Elle ia corn elles. Elles fallao de mini. Eu 
nunca fallo delles. Elle e inais 111690 que eu. Eu o 
amo. Amo-o como meu prdprio irmao. Nds os moder- 
110s. Elle e mais rico que elles. O assiimpto em que 
V. S. ine tern fallddo. Eutre elle e mim. Nds o cham- 
amos. Ellas amao. Elle Hies disse. A onion. Belle. 
Lembro-.we delta. Eu por mim. No meio delles. 



J have a knife. I have no husband. Thou hast a 
fork. He has 110 shoes. We have good wine. He is 
deaf. She is blind. We are lazy. Thou lovest the 
friends. I love him. He loves her. She is my sister's 
friend. The women are beautiful, and they are sisters. 
He has spoken to me. We love him. He is in the midst 
of them. My mother who sent one with them. She is richer 
than he. They (f.) love their father. With me. With 
thee. They (m.) are ready. Of her. Without one. 
Without him. She loves tcs. We love her. She is good. 

* O, a, os, as, are often used for the accusative of the third per- 
sonal pronouns. " Eu o chamo," I call Mm ; " N ao a vejo," I do not 
see her, etc. 



57 



LESSON LVIL 

PEONOUNS (CONJUNCTIVE). 



Me, te, se, The. 

JSos, vos, Dies. 

Me, te; o,* a,*lo,*la.* 

Nos, vos, 08,* as,* los,"*" las.* 

Comigo, com-tigo, coni-sigo. 



To me, to thee, to him, her, it. 
To us, to you, to them. 
Me, thee ; liim, her, it. 
Us, you, them. 
With me, thee, etc. 



Di-lhe uma penna. Nao Ihe digo. Eaca-?»£ o favor. 
V. S. pode fazer-me um grande servico. Yico-lhe muito 
obrigado. Agradeco-Z/j<s infiuitamente. Sinto dar-//*<? 
tanto incommodo. E o que Ihe posso dher. Eu o sup- 
ponko. ^ JSTao o creio. Eu o quero. Elle deu-me um 
livro. Elle falla contra mim. Elle deu-nos duas patacas. 
Ella dea-lhes miiito dinheiro. Com-Wsco. Levei o cao 
ao rio, e lancei-o na agua. Montei a egua, e levei-a ao 
rio. DigSL-me. Diga,-lhe. T)iga,-lhes. Quero ve-lo. JNao 
posso Ye-la. Eaca-we um par de bdtas. 



It seems to me. I give you these books. Do him the 
favour. Give me the new pens. I am much obliged to 
you. I thank them. It is what I can tell you. She gave 
me two beautiful books. Tell them that the money is 
good. Zwish to see her. /cannot see them. Make me 
a pair of shoes. I do not believe him. He gave one a 
dog, and I threw it into the river. Give him a book. 
You can do him a great favour. She gave him a pen. Tell 
him that I cannot give him the horse. He gave them a 
pair of boots. They speak against me. I am sorry to 
give them so much trouble. 



* Used after in 
rectly "amal-o." 



as " JSTao pdsso ama-/o," or more cor- 



58 



LESSOR lyiii. 

PBONOTTEFS (MIXED CONJITN CTITE) .* 

M'o, m'a. I It or him to me, lier to me. 

M'os, m'as. Them to me. 

T'o, t'a, t'os, t'as. I Him, her, it or them, to thee. 

Lh'o, lli' a, lh'os, lh'as. | Him, her, it or them, to you. 



Dai-in'o. En comprei-o para ddv-Wo. livro e novo, 
eu Wo darei. A penna e boa, elle m'a dara. Elles Ilia 
le\arao. Eaca-w'^s largas. De-m'as. Disse-ra'o certa 
pessoa. Deixe-m'o ver. JNao Wo direi. Assim m'o dis- 
serao. Nao Wo diga. Perdoa-w'o, se o fiz. Dizia-ZA'o 
o seu espelho. Perguntai-?;2'0 a mim. Nao Wo posso 
dizer. Eu ZA'o darei. Mtiito Wo agradeco. Deixe~?;z'o 
alguns dias. Eu Wo tenho dito. Faca-m'os ver. Quan- 
do m'os podera dar ? Eu Wos mandarei. De-me lic&nca 
de Wos provar. Eu Wo affianco. Pois dir-w-Zo-hei eu. 



Give it me. Give it him. Give it them. I bought it 
to give it to them. These pens are good, give one them. 
The mare is beautiful, and I gave her to him. The letter 
is beautiful, let me see it. Is the book good ? I will give 
it you. Give me leave to show them to him. I shall pay 
■it you. I will give it you for less. The rings are pretty, 
I will show them to thee. I thank you much for it (m.). 
"When shall you be able to show them to me ? I assure 
yon of it. I shall tell you it. He gave it me. The house 
is new, I will it to you. The horse is gentle, will you 
give it to her ? Give him leave to try them for me. 

* These pronouns are compounds of the dative of the person 
with the accusative of the thing. Il'o stands for me o, it to one, the 
accusative of course agreeing with the noun to which it refers. 



59 

LESSON LIX. 

pronouns (possessive). 

Meu, meus ; minha, mmhas. I My, mine. 

Teu, teus ; tua, tiias. i Thy, thine. 

Seu, seus; sua, suas. j His, her, its, their, your.* 

Ndsso, nossos ; ndssa, ndssas, ' Our, ours. 

Ydsso, vdssos ; vdssa, vdssas. ! Your, yours. 



Meu pae, minha mae e minlias irmas estao no campo. 
Seu filho e sabio. Seu irmao e moco. Of seu jardim e 
maidr que o meu. Vdsso amigo e o meu. Este chape u e 
meu. Com os seus parentes. Como esta minha irma. 
Os nossos amigos nos abandonao. Sua Magestade. No 
seu leito. seu primeiro impulse TJma das suas maos. 
(Tm meu patricio. % Dons amigos seus. No uieio dos seus 
concidadaos. A energia da sua alma. Meus amigos. 
Londres tern suas bellezas. Os seus mais pequenos mo- 
vimentos. Yan-Dyck foi o seu melhor discipulo. 



My mother and my brothers are in the garden. His 
son is young. Your house is larger than mine. He is 
my friend. He is one of my friends. One of your coun- 
trymen. In the midst of his friends. The image of my 
mother. He was the victim of the ideas of his time, as 
so many are of those of ours. With his hand between 
hers. Two volumes of this our journal. One of my legs. 
My aunts. With all my heart. Three friends of his. 
This house is mine. l£is garden is large. In other 
countries, especially in ours. 

* When speaking to any one in the third person, seu stands for 
your, e.g., " Grdsto do seuestylo," I Yikeyour style. When speak- 
ing to a person of another person, use d'elle, " Grdsto do estylo 
d'elle/' I like Ms style. 

t The article is prefixed to the possessive when emphasis is 
required. 

X One of my countrymen. 



60 



LESSON LX. 
pronouns (demonstrative). 

Itste, esta; estes, estas; isto.* j This; these; this.* 

Esse, essa; esses, essas; o,f a, ' That; those; that ;f that.* 

os, as ; isso.* 

Aquelle, aquella; aquelles; aquel- '■ That; those; that. 

las ; aqufllo. 

Est'outro, ess'outro. | This other ; that other. 



JEste tapete. Aquella arvore. Estes livros. Aquelles 
homens. Essa casa. Esses rios. JEste quadro e liudo. 
Isto* e para lnim. Estas botas sao de Paulo. JEste e o 
seculo das revolucoes. Aquellas mulheres nao sao tao 
boas como estes homens. JEste homem e o author deste 
livro. Sou desta opiniao. Nadadi'sfo* e assim. Urn dia 
destes. Como e isto* possivel ? Nao gdsto disto. No- 
quelle logar. No aspecto daquellas lindaspaizagens. Por 
este vil preco. Nesta capital. Neste momento. Isto* 
nao e provavel. JEssas representacoes. Esta especie 
cruelissima. 



This house. TJiat tree. These houses. Those trees. 
This book is beautiful. Of this house. Of those books. 
In these representations. Those books are John's. This 
is for him. In these rivers. This is not possible. The 
leaves of those beautiful trees. These (f.) are not good. 
He is of that opinion. Of these two men. In this case. 
This other one has a disagreeable voice. Those cavaliers. 
In that. Of this. The ground is that of a Eoman town. 
The voice is that of a man. One of these days. Those 
sheets are damp. The door of this house. 

* Isto and zsso, this and that, are used without nouns, like ceci 
and cela in French. 

f In contrasted allusion : "Oar da cidade e man ; o do campo, 
"bom," — The air of the town is bad ; that of the country, good. 



61 

LESSON LXI. 

PEONOUNS (RELATIVE), 



O qua!,* os quaes; a qual, as 

quaes. 
Cujo, uuja; cujos, ciijas; de 

quem. 
Q.uem ; o que. 
Que,t a quem. 
Aquelle que, aquella que ; o que. 



Who, which. 

Whose. 

Who, he, who, whoever ; what. 
Who, which, that, whom. 
He who, she who ; that which, 
what. 



Encontrei um homem, o qual me reconheceo. O 
novo relogio que elle tem. O passaro que canta. A mulher 
que eu estimo. O homem de cujo cavallo lhe fallei. Deus, 
ciijas obras admiramos. Camoes, cujo merito conhe- 
cemos. IJma nor, cujo cheiro e agradavel. Quem mais 
tem, mais deseja. E lima cousa de que elle nao e capaz. 
As circunstancias em que, etc. Somos quem somos. Os 
que sao sabios sao felizes. Esta Y. S. certo do que diz ? 
A penna com que eii escrevo. Os que pensao. negocio 
de que trato. Isto e tudo o que elle me disse. 



He saw a man in the house, wlw said, etc. The situa- 
tion in which. To know what was the substance of the 
petitions. In every place in ivhich. Lorenzo was he 
who knew him. Yery different from what it at present 
appears. One of those men in whose hands. If I judge 
by what I see. He who is religious knows, etc. Whoever 
has most, wants most. This sea whose waves, etc. I am 
sure of what I say. The pencil with which I write is 
yours. He that has most, wants most. The man that is 
in the garden is my friend. The house in which he lives. 

* Qual preceded by the article corresponds to the Latin qui, not 
quis or qualis. It is like the old English, " the which" or to the 
French " le quel,'" and reproduces the idea of the object already 
designated. 

f Que is equal to ivho, tvhich, that, and whom t and is inde- 
clinable. 



62 
LESSON LXIL 

PRONOUNS (INTERROGATIVE). 



Qual* destes ? | Which of these? 

What man is this ? 
What troops are those ? 
Who is it ? What ? 



Que homem e este ? 

Que trdpas sao essas ? 

Quern e ? que ? 

^e quern. j aquein _ ? | Whose? To whom ? Whom? 



Quern e? Quern esta alii ? Qudl de seus irmaos? 
Que livros tern o rapaz ? Qudl delles ? Quaes sao as 
suas razoes ? Quern esta a porta ? Qwew serao os paes 
destes meninos ? De quern e este quadro ? Ellas sao 
dtias irmas : a quern da V. S. a prefere'ncia ? Que e isso ? 
Q«e horas sao ? Quern sao elles ? Qwe vergonha ! Qudl 
dos ddus? Que lhe parece disto? Q Mm t'o disse? Que 
novidades? Que boas novas ha? Que e a virtude ? 
Quern sabe se essas sao verdadeiras ? Que idade tern 
sen tio ? Q^ e o meu livro ? JS'enhum destes. Em 
torn de quern quer ser obedecido. Quern forao os pri- 
uieiros. 



Which of your sisters ? What is that ? What books 
have the girls ? What woman is that ? What a pity ? 
Whose hat is this ? Wliat age is your son ? Which of 
them ? Who is in the garden ? They are brother*, 
which do you prefer ? What ship is that ? To whom ? 
Who knows ? What news to-day ? What o'clock is it? 
Whose pen is this ? What are your reasons ? What is 
truth ? What horse is this ? Who art thou ? Who is 
the master of the house ? Which of these monuments ? 
What are the requisites of a good soldier ? Who were 
the second boys ? 

* Qudl, interrogative, corresponds nearly to the Latin ."quails." 



63 

LESSON LXIII. 

PRONOUNS (EEPLECTITE AND INTENSITIYE) . 



Eu mesmo, elle mesmo. 
Ella mesma. 
Elles mesmos. 



I myself, lie himself etc. 

She herself. 

They themselves (m.). 



Ellas mesmas. \ They themselves (f.). 

Jfe, fe, .*?. ! MyseZ/; thyse//; hhnseZ/'. 

De si mesmo. ! Oi one's self 

Contentar-»o,?, em si. ; To content oiirself ; in ^seZ/*. 

I To, for, of, by one's self; 

A, para, de, por si. i himself 

Falla-se de paz ; por si so. i 27ie?/ speak of peace ; alone. 



Eu mesmo o fiz. A mini mesmo. Lembro-wzi? disso 
no mesmo dia. Qi^aZ e o homem que minca se engana ? 
Elle fez-se soldado. Eaz-setarde. Limito-we a questao. 
Desejo-rae no catnpo. You.-me para casa. A falsidade e 
odiasa em si mesma. Isto por simesmo esta claro. Lan- 
odu longe de si a arma fatal. Ellas mesmas m'o disserao. 
Aqui mesmo. Como se chama isto ? Elle nao esta em 
si. Chama-se milho. Ealla-se, conversa-se, e o tempo se 
passa. Fazem mal a si os que abusao da saiide. Nao se 
sabe. A mim mesma comeca a turvar-se-we a cabeca. 



I do not remember this. In itself. Alone. He limits 
himself to the fact. "Whose origin is unknown. I saved 
7/er, and he saved himself He became a sailor. They 
are of importance to we. [Nothing subsists by itself 
yave God. I myself was present. I o«j going home. 
Yice is odious in itself The women themselves went 
away. Henry killed himself. He said to himself. He 
threw far from him the gold. That wine is called " bual." 
I forgot to write the letter. They themselves said it to 
him. He did it himself I limit myself to this question. 
To content themselves. 



64 



LESSON LXIY. 

PEES0NAL AND CONJUNCTIYE PKOtfOUNS WITH 
INDICATIVES. 



Doixao-rov a honra. 

Dax-me-haa prazer. 

A mim me daras, etc. 

Deus apraz-.se da humildade. 

Assim o prometterao. \ So they promised it, 

En ro-lo digo. i I tell you it. 

Addrao-no,* na, nos } nas. i They adore Mm, her, them. 



They leave you the honour. 
Thou wilt gire me pleasure. 
To me myself thou wilt give, etc. 
God delights in humility. 



Perdoae-we. Gabas-me o bom genio. Affigurava- 
se-me que ella estava junto de mim. Depois ergueu-s^, e 
assent bu-se-llie ao lado. Elle obrigou-o a tomar alguma 
refeicao. Elles matarao-w'o. Ca\e\-me. T)e\i-me uma 
das siias maos, levei-« a boca, e beijei-#. Esta palavra 
senti-« soar, palpava-#, via-a escripta, affigurava se-me 
convertida em efieito. Arripiarao-su-we os cabellos. 
Aqui me matarao urn fillio. Encaminhei-we para a porta. 
Bepito-f<? que nao me importa. Elle assent on- se-me ao 
lado. Elles matarao-na. 



I went to led, but could not sleep. I told him all. 
It remains for us to know. Without his knowing it. 
His bands, above all, incommoded him. He gave me one 
of his bands ; I pressed it between mine, raised it to my 
mouth, and kissed it. A dagger glittered in my band. 
My pulse beat with feverish force. I told Mm I was 
ready. Let them leave us the honour. Eame lias exalted 
Mm. They love Mm. They honour Tier. These men 
leave Mm the glory. They killed my daughter here. 
The heathen adore her. The old man seated himself at 
my side. 

* The " n" is for the sake of sound, instead of addrao-o. 



65 



LESSON LXV. 

CONJUNCTIVE PBONOUNS WITH INEINITIVES. 



Quero perdoar-Z7ie. 

Que perigos se me pddem offe- 

recer ? 
Pois mais vos quero dizer. 
Vim de casa para te ver. 
Quiz ve-lo* \e-la } ve-los, \e-las. 



I wish to pardon him. 
What dangers can present them- 
selves to me ? 
Then more I wish to tell you. 
I came from home to see thee. 
I wished to see him, her, them. 



Kaleb sahiu da cidade, fingindo abandona-Z<z de tddo. 
O velho vein acoinpanhal-o. bom do monge eorreu 
a abracal-o. Gusto \i-me a conhecer-ZA<? as feicoes. Ye- 
Zo-heis ja. Pensa-Zo e faze-Zo sao cousas bem differentes. 
JNao queria demorar-?w<? alii mais. Custava-me a cre-Zo 
O aspecto far-tws-ha crer. Enganar-vos-heis. Ve-Z«-heis. 
O sol eomecava a tingiv-me a cama de todas as cores das 
vidracas de lima fresta que me ficava fronteira. Cortar- 
ZAe-hemos uma talhada. Disse-^<? que seu senhor preci- 
sava de idllkv-me. Ouvi, sem irvit&r-me. 



After giving him. He resolved to ask her in marriage. 
"We are going to help you to raise it. No one dared to 
contradict me. I wish to spare you some trouble. I 
began to observe myself, % and to study myself, in order 
to know myself They come to consult him. I cannot 
bear you. He offered to give him the horse. The good 
priest ran to tell him. He desires to see them. I came 
from Lisbon to see you. He told me that the duke wished 
to speak to we. I can hardly believe him. After par- 
doniug him. To say it and to do it are not the same 
thing. I wish to see you at home. 

* Ve-lo is contracted for ver o, or ver lo. 

t Often divided " abandonaZ-a" instead of " abondan«-Z«." 

% Rendered by "me." 

3? 



66 



LESSON LXYI. 

CONJUNCTIVE PEONOTJNS WITH IMPEBATIVES. 



Deus vos prospere ! 
6ra nao* me importune. 
Faca-we este favor. 
T)e-me lima rdsa. 
Traga-wo-fo. 
Nao Hie diga isso. 



May God prosper yow ! 
Now, do not teaze me. 
Do me this favour. 
Give me a rose. 
Bring v.s some. 
Don't tell Awn that. 



Abraca-we, falla-we de meu pae. Tragn-me. De-me 
de que beber. JS"ao se mova d'ahi. Traga-wos azeite. 
Traga-wo-Z«5. Eaca-wz<s o banho mais quente. Ya-one 
busear lima carruagem. Diga-Uie que me tr&ga os sa- 
patos. Senhor, salvages. Segue-one. Expliea-^os essa 
parabola. Levantae-t'os. Paga-«?e o que me deves. 
Tira-fe d'ahi. Dae-one esse livro. Yeste-me. Traga-we 
as meias. Deixa-o entrar. Assente-se ao pe do lume. 
M6stre-w<? o melhor que tiver. Acorde-nos cedo. Diga- 
Uies que me tragao o meu bahu. Eaca-w<? obsequio de 
dizer. 



Give Mm a tulip. Don't leave me. Don't tell mc 
tbat. Speak to me of my friend. Bring me a glass of 
water. Tell Mm to bring me my coat. Follow one. Pay 
we the money. Do one this kindness. Bring us some 
wine. Embrace him. Give Am some drink. Don't 
move from this house. Explain to one this history. Give 
Mon these new books. Let tliem come in. Sit down 
here. Show /?m the best cloth you have. Do us the 
favour to show it to Mon. Do not strike tliem. Tell Mm 
to bring one the new boots. Do one the favour to tell 
Mon the way. 

* In negative sentences the pronoun precedes. 



67 



LESSON LXYIL 



CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS "WITH GERUNDS. 



Proniettendo-me nao cakir. 
Em vos vendo. 
Estou-me aprestando. 
Queimando-me* o cerebro. 
'Pedindo-nos o ndsso vdto. 
Tendo-os ouvido. 



Promising me not to fall. 
In seeing you. 
I am getting ready. 
Burning my brain. 
Asking our vote. 
Having heard them. 



Elle fazendo-os cahir era uma cilada, os destrocou. 
Obrigaudo-se a entregar Toledo. Pdndo-Me a mao no 
hombro. Chegando-se ao pe do leito. Yoltando-se para 
mim. Parece-we que o estou vendo. Comparando-we 
a outrem. Ealtando-Z&e as forcas, retirou-se para a sua 
cidade. Comparando-as. Elevando-0 acima das nuvens. 
O servo lancando-se-ZAe aos pes. Tendo-os deixado, reti- 
rou-se elle. Chamando-os. Assegurando-ZAe que achara. 
Deixando-o cheio. Offerecendo-se-lhe a vista. Pondo- 
nos de joelhos diante della. Pendurando-0. 



Listening to him. Placing my band on Ms shoulder. 
Asking me that. Promising me not to go. In hearing 
you. Jam dressing myself. Asking Mm for Ms vote. 
Having seen them. Sis strength failing, he went home. 
The man falling at my feet. Palling on my koees before 
Mm. Hanging them. Cutting my hand. Raising him 
above other men. Making me fall. Obliging them to 
retire. Placing his hand on my head. Leaving them. 
Having left one. Placing his foot on the ground. Com- 
paring the one with the other. Seeing him. 

* This form is often equal to a possessive pronoun. 



LESSON LXYIII. 

PRCXN'OTJXS (dEIIOXSTRATITE EELATIYE). 

Por o serem. I On account of then being so. 

Sem o* serem. Without their being so. 

As casas contrastuvao com as The houses contrasted with those 

que — which — 

As mais bellas sao as que — ; The handsomest are those which — 

Sem a ouvir. i Without hearing it. 

E realmente o nao e. j And really it is not so. 



Os meios erao os da persuasao, nao os da forca. 
3Sssas sao as minhas razoes, boas ou mas digo-as como as 
sinto. O mimero daquelles e mui pequeno, o destes in- 
finito. Quando a nossa razao discdrda da dos outros, 
etc. Os males da primeira vida sao nada comparados 
com os da segunda. Ha verdades que a nos o nao 
parecem. A esperanca terrestre e fragil, como o* sao 
todas as cousas da terra. Que hymnos podem entrar em 
parallelo com os que David cantava ? A situacao nao e a 
da duvida. Uma so ainbicao, a de agradar a l)eus. 



This condition is worse than that of excited passions. 
Its sphere is inferior to that of truth. Some books, as 
those of the Egyptians, etc. The handsomest flowers are 
tlwse which perish soonest. The number of servants 
exceeds that of the masters. I know the end of the story 
without hearing it. It is necessary to be just, and in 
order to be so, it is indispensable, etc. Political questions 
are those which, etc. I say them as I feel them. The 
more I am contented with my heart, the less I am with 
my pen. The situation is not one of difficulty. My opi- 
nion is not that of the Court. 

* Lite the French " sans Tetre." 



69 



LESSON" LXIX. 

PRONOUNS (CONJUNCTIVE AND PERSONAL, REELECTIYE 
EOR POSSESSIYE). 



Ahaixar-lhe a soberba. 

'Va a casa delle.* 

ITica-me o pe mais a vontiide. 

Arranhou-we a orelha. 

~D6e-me a garganta. 

Em The morrendo o pae. 



To lower Ms pride. 

Gro to Ms house. 

My foot is easier. 

You have scratched my ear. 

My throat is sore. 

As soon as Ms father is dead. 



Arripiarao-se-me os cabellos. Gusto u-we a conhecer- 
Jlie as feicoes. Eic6u-»ie bem estampado na memoria. 
JNTotei que os besteiros me vigiavao os passos. Ergui 
o punhal, e cravei-ZA'o diias vezes no peito. O suor corria- 
me da fronte. Elle devia seguir os passos do homem, 
vigia-lo, escutar-ZAe as palavras, e estudar-ZAe o menor 
gesto. Os cabellos ericaraq-se-ZAe de horror. Viao-se-ZZje 
na testa rugas, que, etc. Elle Ihe falla ao ouvido. Quer 
que Ihe leve a sua mala ? Tenha a bondade de m'os 
mandar a casa. Elle tocou-Z7*e na mao. 



These sounds, instead of causing me pleasure, made 
my hair stand erect. A smile played on his lips. To 
lower his pride. My head aches. To diminish their im- 
portance. My head begins to turn. He seated himself 
at my side. It puzzled me to recognize his features. 
He touched their eyes. To remedy an evil, one must 
know its causes. He took the ring from his* own hand, 
and put it on his* (another's). He put around his neck 
a collar of gold. I closed his eyes. "Will you cut ony 
hair ? The scene remained impressed on my memory. 
She touched my hand. 



* It is important to note the difference between "sua casa" and 
casa delle." See p. 59, note. 



70 



LESSON LXX. 

SfiE — TO BE (indicative, always) . 

Sou, es, e ; somos, s6is, sao. : Am, art, is ; are, are, are. 

!Era, eras, era ; eramos, ereis, | Was, wast, was ; were, etc. 

erao. 
Pui, foste, foi; fomos, fostes, ! "Was, wast, was; were, etc. 

forao. 
Fora, foras, fora ; foramos, foreis, Had been, Ladst been, bad been. 

forao. 
Serei, as, a ; emos, eis, ao. '' I snail l>?, etc. 



Sou siirdo. Sou monge. JEs inglez. Eu sou Jose. 
JE tempo de dizer-lhe adeus. JE urn facto. JE certo 
que .... JE uma histdria. Isto e impossivel. JE bem 
triste. Que feliz que sou ! Nao e tarde. Os dias sao 
curtos. Era o Mo excessivo^ JE este o caminho ? 
E o mais curto caminho. JElle era medico. JEWe e 
dos ndssos. Isto e natural. Que boras sao ? JE ver- 
dade. Sou apaixonado delles. Sou eu em pessoa. Sou, 
um delles. Urn so sera bastante. Eu serei pintor. 
!N6s seremos sapateiros. Como foi isso ? Cesar foi um 
grande general. O irmao delle e soldado. 



I am an Englishman. She is Erench. He is blind and 
deaf. It is improbable. The evenings are long. This 
needle is too large. The flowers are beautiful. It is 
I myself. It is nothing. This pen is bad. The bed is 
good. These chairs are very beautiful. It is more than 
probable. It is ten o'clock. "What is the price ? Is he 
a German ? It was night. John and Henry were the 
sons of Charles. It is late. It is time to go, It is 
possible. I am fond of it. John will he a soldier. Is 
it all the same ? Hannibal was a very great general. 

* et Ser " expresses attributes or permanent qualities. "Sou 
doente" is, " I am always ill, an invalid ;" but "JEstou doente" means 
" I am at present unwell." 



71 

LESSON LXXI. 
SEE,— TO be (subjunctive). 

Que eu seja, as, a ; amos, ais, ao. j That I be, or may be. 

Se eu fosse, es, e ; emos, eis, em. | If I were, or might be. 

Se eu for, es, for ; mos, des, em. | If I be, were. 
,F6ra, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. Would be ; were, had been. 

Se eu for, etc. If I should be, or were. 

Sena, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. I should be. 



E possivel que assim seja ? A fim de que eu seja 
rico. Se isso fosse comigo. E preciso que ella seja 
prudente. Era preciso que fosse niais modesta. Se a 
manteiga/or boa, traga quatro arrateis. Importa que os 
trabalhos sejdo acabados. E possivel que nao seja feliz. 
Sefor da sua vontade. Sentiria que fossem recusadas. 
Era possivel que fossemos diligentes. Que as bdcas 
sejao de bom cabedal. E necessario que V. S. seja apre- 
sentado. A diseussao entre nos for a impossivel. Se eu 
for em seu logar. Sentiria que V. S. fosse cansado. 
Importa que a obra seja completa. Fosse o que fosse. 



It is impossible it can be so. That I may be wise. 
It is necessary that be should he good. You must he 
diligent. Discussion would he improbable. If I were 
prudent. I am sorry that the story is so short. He 
will he our friend, li he were a rich merchant. It was 
necessary he should he more diligent. I am sorry they 
are refused. Let the gloves he good. If the cheese is 
good, buy it. It is not possible for you to he quiet. 
You. must he presented to the king. In order that he 
may he Happy. Let the shoes he ol" the best leather. If 
I -were in his place. 



LESSON LXXII. 

SEE — TO BE . (tSTIKITITE, IMPERATIVE, PARTICIPLES). 



Ser ; ser eu, seres tu.* 

Ser elle, ser ella. 

Sermos nds, serdes vds, serem 

elles. 
Sendo, sido ; em ser. 
Se tu, seja elle; sejanios nds, 

sede vds, sejao elles. 



To be ; my being : thy being. 
His being, her being, its being. 
Our being, your being, their 

being. 
Being, been ; in being. 
Be thou, let him be, let us be. 



Ser feio. Nao ser bcmito. O que tem de ser nao sc 
pode evitar. Tenho de ser julgado. Para sermos julga- 
dos. Eu estive sendo o guarda. Pois bem, seja assim. 
O seres tu formosa. As feias, nem por o serem. O re- 
sultado foi o serem exterminados. Os sentimentos nao 
podiao deixar de lhe serem presentes a memdria. Que 
nao seja tao comprido. A ser assim. /Ser-lhe-hei reco- 
nhecido. Sejanios virtuosos, e seremos felizes. Sendo 
tao tarde. Em ser inais usado. Em ser o amigo d'elle. 
Para sermos amigos. Que lhe parece sejvramos dar um 
passeio. Sendo assim. 



Not to he brave. "What has to he done, must not he 
neglected. The man must he judged. In being punished. 
Whatever it might he. Let us he good, and we shall he 
happy. The youth heing better taught, will he more 
competent. In order to their heing friends. To he 
old. In heing more useful. The result was our heing 
almost exterminated. Ear from heing. In spite of my 
stature heing rather diminutive. It was no great merit 
my heing good. In spite of my heing a child. If it is so. 
This heing so. Our being English. Being early. Yery 
good, let it he so. 

* A peculiarity in Portuguese is the possession of a personal or 
declined infinitive, equal to the English L participle with a possessive 
pronoun. 



73 



LESSON LXXIIL 

SEE — TO BE (compound tenses). 



Eu tenho sido, tu tens — , elle 

tem — . 
Eu tinha sfdo, tu tmhas — , elle 

tfnha — . 
Eu heide ser, tu hasde ser, elle 

hade ser. 



I liave been, thou hast ■ — , lie 

has — . 
I had been, thou hadsfc — , he 

had—. 
I shall be, thou shalt — , he 

shall—. 



Tenho sido nrni infeliz. Tu Ms de ser minha esposa. 
Elles terao sido mais fortes. Terias sido sua victiina. 
Eu nao tinha sido o primeiro. Eu. nao teria sido com- 
merciante. O futuro ha de ser crente. Aquillo nunca 
ha de ser. Teve grande felicidade em nao ser descoberto. 
Se assiin tiver de ser. Se tiveres saudades de mim. Ser- 
me-hia impossivel. Nao ter sido vencido. Osca ficou 
sendo o centro da reforma intellectual. N'uma velha 
estrebaria que tinha sido habitada por tima vaca. rapaz 
teria sido o amigo d'elle. 



He will be my husband. The boy lias teen very un- 
happy. That will never he. He was fortunate in not 
being punished. If such take place. He had a house 
which had been inhabited by robbers. It will be impos- 
sible for him. If I had been a Frenchman, I should have 
paid the money. If I had been blind, I should have been 
very unhappy. He would not have been a soldier, if he 
had been the heir. The sun, being the centre of the 
system. She has been very unhappy in not being 
rewarded. It would have been impossible for me to pay 
the money. He would have been the victim of the 
robber. 



74 



LESSON LXXIY. 
ESTAE,— TO BE (at present, indicative). 



Estou, as, a; amos, aes,* ao.t | Am, art, is; are, 
Estava, avas, ava ; avanios, aveis, 

avao. 
Estive, iveste, eve ; ivemos, 

ivestes, iverao. 
Estivera, iveras, ivera; iveramos, 

ivereis, iverao. 
Estarei, as, a ; emos, eis, ao. 



Was, wast, was ; were. 
Was, wast, was ; were. 
Had been, hadst been, etc. 
I shall be, thou, etc. 



Estou doente. Estou, contentissimo. Como estd V.S. ? 
A porta estd aberta. O tempo estd bom. Estou can- 
sado.J Estd dormindo. A agua estd quente. Estdva 
viuvo. O almoco estd prompto. Todos estdo em casa. 
Onde estd o livro ? Aqui estd a carta. Estdo ricos. 
As toalhas estdo na gaveta. JNTisso estdva toda a diivida. 
Oh ! que dura que estd ! Minha irma estd em Alle- 
manha. Estdmos no inverno. A sala estdva cheia. 
Estd o sol no zenith. O Senhor B. estd em casa ? Eu 
nunca estive em Inglaterra. Estou de saiide. Estarei 
aqui dentro n'um mez. 



I am old. She is at table. He is not ill. The door 
is not open. The water is cold. Where is the letter ? 
The book is in the drawer here. I am pleased with him. 
They were rich. Dinner is on the table. Here is the 
boy. They are afflicted. All the ladies are in the hall. 
My brother is in England. I was there last month. 
She is much better. He is so-so. I am angry. The 
weather is showery. He is delighted. My friend is in 
Prance. I was at my brother's. He is ill. We are 
in a very difficult case. He will be here within a week. 

* Often ais. f Am is more usual. 

% Estdr refers to accidents, or temporary states, qualities, posi- 
tions, circumstances. Hence "Estou, cansado," but "So%i Inglez." 



75 



LESSON LXXV. 
ESTAH — TO be (subjunctive), 

Esteja, as, a ; amos, aes, ao. . That I be, may be 



fee estivesse, ses, se ; semos, seis, 

sem. 
Se estiver, es, er ; mos, des, em. 
Se estivera, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. 



If I should be, were. 

If I (shall) be. 

If I were, had been. 



Estaria,* as, a ; amos, eis, ao. I I should be. 



]Nada tenho que nao esteja as drdens de Y. S. Muito 
me alegro que esteja a seu gosto. Espero que esteja bem 
disposto. Esteja quieto. Nao sabia que elle estivesse 
doente. Se o coronel estivesse aqui, etc. Se estivermos 
longe. Esteja a sua vontade. Se estivera no seu logar. 
Hoje nao havera estrella, por pouco importante que seja, 
que nao esteja comprehendida em alguma das constella- 
tes. Eaca como se estivesse em sua casa. Esteja o 
jantar prompto as seis horas. Se estiveres pelo que dfgo, 
estd justo. Elle faria isso, se estivesse, etc. Estava^ 
eu bem servido ? 



If be were in my place, be would not pay the money. 
If my friend had been here, I should bave been quite 
bappy. Be quiet. Let dinner he ready at five o'clock. 
I did not consent tbat she should be here. If he were 
here, be would sing. I should be content, if I could see 
my brother. He has nothing which is not at your ser- 
vice. If I were in your place, I should not go to Lisbon. 
Let the horse be ready at 4 o'clock. If he agrees to what 
I say, the thing is settled. He would do this, if he 
tvere at home. Be quiet, if you can. 

* The imperfect is often used for the future conditional, i. e., was 
for " would bej' e. g., "Desejdva muito vel-o," instead of "Desejarz'a ;" 
like the French, " Sifallais," or the English, " If I went, I should 
get wet." 



70 



LESSON LXXYI. 
ESTAK TO BE (infinitive, imperative, and 

PAKTICIPLES). 



Estar ; estar en, estares tu.* 

Estar elle, estar ella. 

Estarmos nds, estardes yos, esta- 

rem elles. 
Estando, estado, tenho estado. 
Esta tu, estae vos. 



To be ; my being, thy being. 

His being, ber being. 

Our being, your being, their 

being. 
Being, been, haying been. 
Be, be you. 



O estares padre, a mini m'o deves. Estar para mor- 
rer. Nao podem os homens estar alegres sem contender ? 
O estar em elles aqui nao me impdrta. Deixe estar. Es- 
tejak sua vontade. Apesar de estar sentado ao seulado. 
Em urn hdmem estando contente, tudo vae bem. Ha 
~V. S. de estar em casa ? Para estarmos satisfeitos falta 
pouco. Estar eu aqui nao vos incommode. Estde certos 
do que vos digo. O desejo de estar na sua companhia. 
Ella tern estado a chorar. Estando 611a melhdr, tudo se 
faz. Estdrem elles tristes, a si o devem. 



My being sure of his aid. In order that we may be 
satisfied. Their being warm does not depend on me. To 
be about to fall. In spite of being satisfied. "Without 
being clear. Their being unhappy is owing to their 
laziuess. Eor our being happy, little is needed. Your 
being a soldier you owe to him. Can the boy not be 
quiet ? Let it be. The desire of being with me. The 
sky begins to be clear. My being here is not agreeable. 
In spite of being in my house. Their being unwell is not 
my fault. In order to our being certain. 



* This declined or personal infinitive is peculiar to the Portuguese 
It is often used, as in Greek and German, with the 
article prefixed. It seems best rendered by the present participle, 
and a possessive pronoun. 



77 



LESSON LXXVII. 
ESTAE, — to be (compound tenses). 
Tenho estado, tens — ■, tern. — . 
Tmha estado, trnhas — , tniha — 
Hei de estar, has de — } ha de — 
Terei estado, teras — , tera — . 



Teria estado, e(c., etc. 
Se eu tiver estado. 
Se eu tivesse estado. 



I have been, thou hast — , he 

has — . 
I had been, thou hadst — , he 

had — . 
I shall be, thou shalt — , he 

shall — . 
I shall have been, thou shalt — - 3 

he shall (or will) — . 
I should have been. 
If I had been. 
If I should have been. 



s Tenho estado muito doente. Eu tinlia estado em casa. 
Eli teria estado, em casa, com aviso teu. Hei de estar 
militar ainanha. Terei estado la. Elle ha de estar bom. 
Elle nao soube que eu thiha estado la. Ter estado. 
Se eu tivesse Id estado, nada acconteceria. Quando eu 
tinlia estado a mesa, etc. Depois de ter estado tao alegre ! 
Se eu tiver estado la, niinca mais o chegue a ver. Nao e 
o cuco que estou ouvindo ? Tera estado uo templo. Ellas 
teem estado no escriptorio. Depois de elles terem estado 
tao tristes. Ha de estar em casa antes de elles chegarem. 



He has leen very ill. "We have leen quite well. 
Having been in bed. They had leen in the street. He 
will he a sailor next week. If he had leen on horseback, 
be would have gone quickly. If I had leen rich. If the 
weather had leen bad, I should have staid at home. If 
the lady had leen well, she would have gone to the 
country. To have leen at home. He has leen. We 
have leen here. I should ham leen in church. He has 
leen well. After having leen very ill. We had leen 
there. The men had leen with you. To have leen at 
home. 



78 
LESSON LXXYIII. 

TEE — TO HATE (INDICATIVE). 

Tenlio, tens, tem; temos, tendes, j Have, hast, lias ; have. 

teem.* 
Tfhha, tmhas, tfhha ; tinhanios, . Had, hadst, had ; had. 

tinheis, tinhao. 
Tfve, tiveste, teve ; tivcmos, ; Had, hadst, had ; had. 

tivestes, tiverao. 
Tivera, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. | Had had. 

Terei, as, a; emos, eis, ao. ' Shall have. 

Tenlw uvas. Ellafeirafigos. Elle fe//£laranjas. Temos 
vinho. Tendes cerejas. Elles teem nozes. Nao tenlio 
meias. Nao tenlio chapeu. Nao temos sapatos. Ellas 
nao teem rendas. Eu tinha lima folha de papel. EUe 
tinha urn chapeu de pallia. Tern ella lima faca ? Tem 
vinho Ft Temos nos pennas ? Tinha el\e am prato ? 
Elles nao tinhao luvas. Nao tenlio eu um cao ? Nao 
teremos nos chiivas ? Que ida.de tem V. S. ? Tenlw vinte 
annos. Nao the tempo para ir. Tenho esperancas de 
ser o primeiro. Ja o tenlio. Nao term eu a desgraca ? 



"We have a fine morning. We have time enough. 
Have you change ? Every thing has an air of life. I 
shall have the honour. "What disease have you ? Shall 
we have time ? "We had no winter this year. We shall 
have rain. I have a great weakness. I had a sore throat. 
He had had a headache. Has he ? Will you have the 
goodness ? I should have much pleasure. We shall not 
have a fine day. I shall be very angry. Would you 
have the goodness to ? How old are you ? I am thirty. 
I had not time. They have a sheet of paper. 

* It is better to use teem or tem than tem for the plural. 

f "Have you wine?" — the third person singular being often 
employed without Y. M. or V. S. The Portuguese speak to each 
other generally in the third person, as if, " Has he wine? 1 ' and yet, 
strange to say, when they represent a dialogue, in a novel, they do 
not give it in the language as spoken, but transform all the third 
■person singular into the second person plural, vos I 



LESSON LXXIX. 
TEE — TO hate (stjbjukctiye). 



Que eu tenha, as, a ; amos, aes, 

ao. 
Que eu tivesse, esses, esse ; esse- 

mos, esseis, essem. 
Se eu tiver, eres, er; ermos, erdes, 

erem. 
Se eu tivesse, etc., etc. 
Teria, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. 



That I may have, thou, etc. 

That I might have ; if I had 

etc., etc., etc. 
If I (shall) have, etc. 

If I (should) have ; if I had. 
I should have, etc. 



Que eu tenha cha. Que elle tenha nata. Que tenhd- 
mos queijo. Tenlia a bondade de dar-me um bocadinho. 
Que eu tivesse mostarda. Se eu tivesse cinco patacas. 
Eeceio que tenhdmos um verao quente. A fim que elle 
tenha bons exemplos. Nao creio que elle tenha fome. 
Quero que meu filho tenha amelhor instruccao. Quando 
eu tiver sede. Virei amanha, se tiver tempo. Sentiria 
que os meus amigos tivessem frio. Temo que elle nao 
tenha dinheiro. Ainda que nao tivessemos os livros, etc. 
Qualquer for tuna que eu tivesse, etc. 



That we may have coffee. That they may liave good 
wine. Save the goodness to show him the book. If I 
had money. If your brother had five pounds. I fear 
we may have bad news. We do not believe that they are 
hungry. In order that he may have new books. When 
I am hungry, I shall have bread. If I have time, I shall 
have that pleasure. They fear they may not have money. 
I should be sorry if the poor boys ivere hungry. What- 
ever fortune we might have. I fear I shall not have ten 
dollars. I shall write to-day, if I have time. He wishes 
his son to have the best masters. 

* If I had, -where future (i. e., if I sliould have), is, tf {3e eu tiv- 
esse;" whevepast (i. e., if I had had), " £e eu feW 



80 



LESSON LXXX. 



TEE — TO HATE (iNEIKITIYE, IMPERATIVE, PAR- 
TICIPLES, ETC.). 



Ter ; ter eu, teres tu. 

Tor elle, ter ella. 

Termos nds, tercles yds, terein 

elles. 
Tendo, tido, tendo tfdo. j Having, had, having had 

Tern tu, tende vds. , Have thou ; have ve. 



To have ; my having, thy having. 
His having, her having. 
Our having, your having, their 
having 






Tenho receio de ter necessidade de seu auxilio. Ter 
algum medo. Ter fome. Ter sede. Nao ha de que ter 
medo. E melhor ter muito que pouco. Parece-rne te-\o 
alcancado. terem elles concebido esse projeeto. Nao 
tenha susto. Este rio tern tres leguas de largo. Tenhd- 
onos paciencia. Tenlia por certo o que lhe digo. Onde 
vae ter esta estrada ? Sem £er-mos urn monumento. 
Depois de ter acabado. Tendo de xnencionar os Erancezes. 
Os que casao com Diulheres maiores no ser, no saber e no 
ter, estao em grandissimo perigo. 



"We begin to Jiave some hope. To he hungry and 
thirsty. It is better to have hope than fear. My having 
conceived this scheme was lucky. Without our having 
money. The man begins to be hungry. After my having 
the horse in the stable. This road leads to the palace. 
There is nothing to be afraid of in the garden. Don't be 
afraid. Sis having patience is important. The boy 
begins to be thirsty. This house is fifty feet high. In 
spite of their containing the money. Your having finished 
this monument is a proof of your talent. That I may 
have a new book. 



81 



LESSON LXXXI. 

T£lB TO HATE (COMPOUND TENSES). 



Eu tenho tido, tu tens tido, elle 

tern tido, etc. 
Eu tmha tido, tu tmhas tido, etc. 
Eu heide ter, tu hasde ter, elle 

hade ter. 
Eu terei tido, tu teras tido, etc. 
Que eu tenha tido, etc. 



I have had, thou hast had, he 

has had, etc. 
I had had, thou hadst had, etc. 
I must (or shall) have, thou shalt 

have, he shall have. 
I shall have had, thou shalt — 
That I had had, etc. 



Tenho tido febre. Tu tens tido sede. Eu tinha tido 
laranjas. Heide ter vinho. Tu teras tido um chapeu de 
palha. Nao temos tido sapatos. Heide ter o gosto de o 
ver amanha. Heide ter a satisfacao. Elle esta todo mi, 
e Mde ter miiito frio. Heide ter noticias de men pai. 
Nao terei a ousadia. . . Hade ter tiido as 8 horas. Heide 
ter fdme. Tern tido medo. Esta rua vai ter a praca. 
Come90 a ter vontade de comer. Se eu tiver tido di- 
nheiro. Tenho tido miiito dinheiro. rapaz hade ter 
uma fortiina immensa. Elles teem tido a molestia. Terei 
tido o gosto de ver o rei. 



I have had money. He has had hope. "We had had 
friends. The boy must he thirsty. I shall be cold. 
I shall have had the satisfaction. Having had the plea- 
sure. If I had had a sword. Having had fever. They 
had had news of my brothers. He has had the boldness 
to — We shall have the satisfaction of — The children 
must oe hungry. This street leads to the cathedral. We 
begin to he hungry. You shall have the boots at 4 
o'clock. We shall have hope. Having had. They have 
had the pleasure of seeing the queen. He must have 
news of his brother. They had had plenty of money. 



82 



LESSON LXXXII. 

HAVER* — TO HATE, TKEEE TO BE, MUST. 



Hei, has, ha ; havemos,f haveis, 

hao. 
Havia, J havias, havia, haviamos, 

havfeis, haviao. 
Houve, houveste, houve ; houve- 

mos, houvestes, houverao. 
Haverei, as, a: emos, eis, ao. 



Have, liast, has ; have. 
Had, hadst, had ; had. 
Had, hadst, had ; had. 
Shall have. 



Ha gente que. Ha dous annos. Hei de confessar. 
Tu has de ir. Elle ha de ter muito frio. Que ha de ser 
de mim ? Nao ha cousa mais provavel. Havia muita 
gente. Ha nmito ouro no Brazil. JNao ha pennas. Ha 
outras linguas. Houve vinte mortos. Havia lima mu- 
lher. Ha orvalho. Ha de fazer-se. Que se ha de fazer ? 
Quantas leguas ha d'aqui a Camacha ? Ha lima legua e 
meia. Nao ha mais d'unia milha. Mostrar-lhes-7*e«20s. 
Ha de ser um pouco tarde. Haverd muitos insectos este 
anno. Nao ha perigo. Espero que haverd muita fructa. 



TJiere are men that never pay. Eive years ago I was 
in this house. You must confess that you have done 
wrong. I have to read. We shall he very cold. What 
will become of us? There is nothing more certain. There 
were many people in the fields. How many leagues is it 
to Lisbon. Is titer e danger on the road ? It is not 
more than a league. There will be much fruit this year. 
"We shall show (to) them the road to Lumiar. I hope 
there will be many peaches. There teas a long interval 
of profound silence. There was a feast. It is ten years 
since I had that horse. Are there many soldiers ? 

* Haver is principal and auxiliary ; but is now less used than 
ter. Its chief use as an auxiliary is to form the compound tenses 
of verbs expressing future actions or states, as "Wei de escrever ;" 
also used by itself, "Se liowoer tempo." Impersonally, its use is 
very general; Ha, "there is," with both singular and plural nouns, 
e. g., " Ha vinho" and " Ha miiitas pessoasP 

t Or hemos. 

% Hia, or ia in compounds ; " Ser-me^a," but better " Ser-me-hia.' ' 



83 



LESSON LXXXIIL 
HAVEK — TO HA ye (subjunctive). 

That I may have ; that there be. 



Que eu haja, hajas, haja, hajamos, 

hajai3, hajao. 
Que eu houvesse, houvesses, 

houvesse; houvessemos, hou- 

vesseis, houvessem. 
Se eu houver, houveres, houver ; 

houvermos, houverdes, hou- 

verem. 
Se eu houvesse, etc. 
Haveria, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. 



That I might be ; that there 
were. 

If I have : if there were or be. 



If I had ; should have. 
I should have. 



Tenho medo que haja grande poeira. E necessario 
que haja premios para que haja soldados. Hajdmo-nos 
por outra maneira. Nao e para admirar que eu nao haja 
chegado a tempo ? Pode ser que haja. Haja saiide ! 
Se eu houver de ir. Se houveres de ver. Queres que 
hajamos saiide. Se houvesse de escutar, elle saberia. Se 
elle houver de pagar. Ainda que isso me houvesse de 
custar a vida. Se houvesse occasiao, eu lhe escreveria. 
Se houver occasiao, eu lhe escreverei. Logo que haja 
occasiao, escreva-me. Termos medo que haja um tem- 
poral. Se elle houver de sahir esta noite. 



I fear there may oe a shower. It is necessary to 
rewards that we may have good scholars. It may be 
there are. See if there is beer. If they woidd listen, 
they would know. Good-bye. As soon as there is an 
opportunity, write me a long letter. If there he (or is) 
an opportunity, I will send you the money. "We must 
manage another way. If he has to pay the money. Even 
though this battle should cost me my life. If these boys 
do anything of the kind, they must suffer punishment. 
If a chance should occur, I should of course write. If 
you have to go, you must go at once. 



84 



LESSON LXXXIY. 

HAYEK — TO HATE (infinitive, imperative, 
participles). 



Haver ; haver eu ; haveres tu. 
Haver elle, haver ella. 
Havermos nos, haverdes vds, 

haverem elles. 
Havendo, havido. 
Ha, havei. 
Haver, ter havido. 



your having, their 



To have ; my having, thy having. 
His having, her having. 
Our having 

having. 
Having, had. 
Have, have ye. 
To have, to have had. 



Para haver de fallar. Haver mister. Saver eu dito 
isso, nao me pesa. Haver elle ido nao pode ter causado 
isso. Para haver de ser teu amigo, e preciso saber isso. 
O havermos feito isso nao importa. Havei compaixao de 
mim. Estao havendo muitas chuvas. Elle sabe como se 
ha de haver. Ha de haver mister dinheiro. Nos ha- 
vermos mister dinheiro. ISTio pode haver tal. Haver 
pao importa-nos. Eu hei de haver dinheiro de fulano. 
Ha-se de fazer o que elle quizer. Haver por bem. Para 
haver de ouvir. Haver por mal. Havendo* chuva, nao 
You. 



My having done that does not affect me. In order 
to bug. He knows how to behave himself. In order to 
speak. To have good wine is important for us. His 
having said that does not grieve him. I am to receive 
twenty dollars from Mr. Stuart. A good deal of rain is 
falling. The queen has thought Jit. He is determined 
to take it amiss. The troops have need of money. To 
nave said so much to the poor boy was very bad. The 
tailor has to get fifty dollars. His having spoken was 
unfortunate. Your having money gives me pleasure. 



* Havendo has a future meaning, e.g., " havendo mdo tempo" 
means, " there being had weather," that is, " if there is bad weather." 



85 



LESSON LXXXY. 
HAVEB TO HATE (compound tenses). 



Tenho havido,* tens — , tern — . 
Tinha — , tmhas — , tinha — . 
Hei de haver, has de haver, etc. 
Terei havido,* teras — ,tera — , etc. 
Teria havido, terias — , etc. 
Que eu* tenha havido. 
Se eu tiver havido. 
Se eu tivesse havido. 



I have had, thou hast had, etc. 

I had had, thou, etc. 

I shall have ; it will be. 

I shall have had. 

I should have had. 

That I may have had. 

If I have had. 

If I had had. 



Tern havido muitos naufragios. Tinha havido grande 
secca. Tinhamos havido estas noticias. !N"ao ha de haver 
nada. Sei de haver livros de fulano. JNao sei se tera 
havido muita neve este anno. Erros, A^e-los-haf neste 
volume, mas nao os conhe9o. Erros, ^«ve-los-hiaf me- 
ndres, se os homens aprendessem. Tendo havido muita 
secca por falta de cMva. Se tivessem havido flores, 
teria havido friictos. JSTao sei se tera havido muito vinho 
este anno. Sabe, se tera de haver festa ? Cea have- 
la-haf boa. Pennas have-las-haf nesta gaveta, mas nao 
as vejo. 

There have been many fires in Constantinople. I know 
not if there has been much disease amongst the vines this 
year. Errors there must be in the life of every man, but 
he must reform. If there had been a good education, 
we should have had good results. There having been no 
rain, the ground was perfectly dry. There would be less 
crime, if there were less ignorance. My brother had had 
this news before the newspapers came. There had been 
showers all day. There have been many shipwrecks this 
year. If there had been industry, there would have been 
money. 

* Not much used in first person. 

f Though these forms are of frequent occurrence, the best writers 
write thus : JIavel-os-ha, havel-os-hia. 



LESSON LXXXYI. 
I. CONJUGATION.— VERBS IN AS (INDICATIVE). 

AMAB — TO LOTE. 

I lore, thou lovest, loves ; love. 
I loved, or was loving. 



Amo, amas, ama ; amamos, amais, 

araao. 
Amava,* amaVas, amava ; aina- 

vamos, amaveis, ainavao. 
Amei,f arnaste, amou ; amamos, 

amastes, amarao. 
Amara, ainaras, arnara, amar- j I had loved, etc., etc 

amos, amaveis, amarao. 
Amarei, amaras, amara, amar- I shall love. 



I loved, or did love. 



emos, amareis, amarao. 



Amamos. Jdgas. lldnddo. Lavdvas. Gastdvcio 
Contei. Amdste. Fallon. Declararei. Abracard. Com- 
prdrdo. Yoltei. Fagarei. Louvariamos. Fiquei (from 
Jicdr). Ensinarei. Gritdvao. Level. Govemas. Ele- 
vei. Feguldu. Frofessdra. Toquei. Ensinou. Fan- 
cdvamos. Limpo os quadros. Solicitdmos um emprego. 
Atei o animal. Fespejou o copo. Achdmos o homem. 
Selldstes o cavallo. Eu estuddva a licao. Fechou as 
janellas. Quebrdra a porta. Encontrei urn amigo. Ella 
nomeou o matador do rei. Kao Jevantards falso teste- 
miinho. 



I play. Thou commanclest. He washes. I icas not 
washing. The governor sjioke. I remained at home. I 
was declaring. I shall teach. They will hug a horse. 
They had returned. I should declare. I solicited an 
office. The boy was cleaning the pictures. The girls 
broke the windows. We met two friends. We bought 
two gold rings. He tied the horse. I teas preparing. 
I danced at the ball. The murderer will break the door. 
Thou shalt love thy neighbour. They played. My brother 
bought a fine horse. The port-captain visited the frigate. 

* Amava, indicates a continued past action during a time, 
t Amei shows an instantaneous action at a time. 



87 



LESSON LXXXVIL 

VERBS TN AR (SUBJUNCTIVE, INFINITIVE, IMPERATIVE, 
AND PATICTPLES). 

That I may lore, etc. 
That I might love, etc. 



Que eu ame, ames, ame; ameinos, 

ameis, amem. 
Que eu amasse, amasses, amasse ; 

amassemos, amasseis, amassem 
Se eu amar, amares, amar ; amar- 

mos, amardes, amarem. 
Eu amar, tu amares, elle amar, 

nds amarmos, vds amacdes, 

elles amarem. 
Ama, amei. 
Amando, amado. 
Tendo amado. 
Amar, ter amado. 



If I love, etc. 

My loving, thy loving, his loving, 
om* loving, your loving, their 
loving. 

Love, love ye. 

Loving, loved. 

Having loved. 

To love, to have loved. 



Que elle grite para eu parar. Quando eu cJiamdr. 
Muito folgo que me trdte com liberdade. Diga-lhe que 
entre. JPdsse miiito bem. JEntremos nesta loja. Nao 
chores, men filho. Que nao se engdne. A menos que eu 
amasse este homem. Ficdr-Vae-liei miiito obrigado. 
Coniinuemos nosso passeio. Mandou que se comecdsse o 
ataque. Se tu obrdres bem. JSfao fdlle nisso. Amei os 
parentes. Agua quente para lavdrmos a boca. Manddi-o 
chamdr para me tomdr medida. Pdde tomd-\a>. O amdr 
eu a poesia. Amdndo-me. Tel-o amado. 



They call him to stop. Wneu we call always come. 
I am very glad that you treat me with sincerity. Tell 
them to come in. He takes whatever pleases him. Let 
them go into this church. "When he iveeps comfort him. 
Don't cry, my children. Our loving history is praise- 
worthy. Some ivorh to gain a living. Water to wash 
my hands. He hoped to find them at home. Lest I 
should call the old man. Finding the men working . To 
take my measure. He ordered them not to ivorh. 
Loving him. Take this glass of wine. 



88 



LESSON LXXXVIII. 

VEBBS IN AK (COMPOUND ACTIYE TENSES). 



Hei* (or) tenho amado. 
Havia (or) t'mlia amado. 
Houve (or) five amado. 
Haverei (or) terei amado. 
Haveria (or) teria amado. 
Hdja (or) tenha amado. 
Houvesse (or) tivesse amado. 



I have loved. 

I had loved. 

I had loved. 

I shall have loved. 

I should have loved. 

That I have loved. 

That I had loved. 



Ainda que hei visitddo nrnitas vezes a sua quinta, 
niinca o encontrei. Haviamos encontrddo um amigo. 
Qaando tinlia nomeddo o hdmein, todos se espantaram. 
Oxala que eu tivesse comegddo mais cedo. Se tivesse 
contddo com a satisfacao deter V. S. ajantar, teria man- 
dddo fazer macarrao. Terei reparddo esta desgraca em 
tres ou quatro dias. Elles terao rasgddo a carta, antes 
de chegar a policia. No caso que V. S. tenha conservddo 
essa can9ao, rogo-lhe que m'a preste. Duvido que o 
rei tenha cliegddo. Depdis de haver chamddo orapaz deu- 
]he um recado. 



He has visited my quinta to day. I had met my 
sister. When he had repaired^ the loss. They had torn 
the letters. The traitor would have declared all. In case 
you have not torn the letters, I beg you will show them 
to me. We should have given him the book. Would 
that I hadjinished the work ! If I had calculated on the 
pleasure of having you to breakfast, I should have had 
something good. They would have travelled all night, if 
necessary. He doubts the queen's having arrived. After 
having spoken. He will have torn the book, before the 
police-officer arrives. 

* See note, page 82. f Translate by present subjunctive. 



89 



LESSON LXXXIX. 



VERBS IN AE (PASSIVE, PECXHtESSIVE, AND 
EUTUEE EOEMS). 



Est6u amando, estou a amar. 

Estava amando, estava a amar. 

Estou encantado. 

Eiquei admirado. 

Sou, era, tenho sido amado. 

Ainda que eu fosse amado. 



I am loving. 

I was loving. 

I am enchanted. 

I was astonished. 

I am, was, have heen loved. 

Though I were loved. 



Sempre estd cantdndo. O rio estd gelddo. Elle estd 
zombdndo. A porta estdfeclidda. Ainda que eu seja ama- 
do. Toda a cidade estd illumindda. O verde agradar- 
me-hia mais. Urn pobre homem tinha sido accusddo 
desse crime. Ellas fordo acompanhddas por Jorge. 
JE estimddo de todos. ^ A perna estd quebrdda. Ella e 
amdda de seii pae. Antes que tudo esteja arranjddo. 
Estou enganddo. Cansei-nie de viajdr. Canso-nie de 
ensindr. Estava admirado da sua simplicidade. Mquei 
encantado de siias maneiras. 



I am calling. He is finishing . The boys are 
The queen is accompanied by the duke. The Thames 
frozen. I am astonished. Though he tvas admonished. 
He has been deceived. All the houses will be illuminated. 
The governor is esteemed by all good men. The boy is 
beloved by his father. Black would please me more. The 
horse's leg was broken. To a were joking. Henry was 
tired of speaking. Your friend ivas astonished, when he 
entered the house. All the houses were brilliantly illu- 
minated. He is tired of teaching. 



90 



LESSOR XC. 

VEEBS IN AE (eEFLECTIYES AND EECIPEOCALS), 



Acho-me ; torna-ae. 
Aproveitdr-me de — 
Aquecendo-me ao sol. 
Pdsso engandr-me. 
Eu me teuho Usongeddo. 
Elles se dmdo uns aos outros. 



I find myself ; it grows. 
To avail myself of. 
Warming my self in the sun. 
I may be mistaken. 
I have flattered myself. 
They love one another. 



Eu me lisongeio. Elle aproxima-se a nos. Joao re- 
tirou-se. Elle se Iduva a si mesmo. Elle ausenta-se da 
minha casa. Levdnto-me sempre as seis horas. Se nao 
me levdnto logo, torno a adormecer. Miiito me alegro. 
E miiita amabilidade terse lembrddo de nos. Peco-lhe 
que se assente. Nao posso demordr-me. Come9ava a 
impacientdr-me. Elle se Umbra. Sao horas de levantdr- 
me. Assente-se aqui. Terei o gosto de aproveitdr-me 
de seu amavel convite. Levantdr-se cedo e a mais sau- 
davel \ cousa. Elle apea-se do cavallo. Avisei-o para 
que se caldsse. 



"We may he mistaken. Henry retires. Warming 
himself. Iflnd myself quite well. I do not remember 
this. They absent themselves from my house. We flat- 
ter ourselves. The girls drew near to (de) us. We get 
up at 7 o'clock. The boy praised himself. If I do not 
flatter myself. We cannot stay. It is time for us to 
get up. He will have the pleasure of availing himself 
of your offer. The soldiers alighted from their horses. 
They have flattered themselves. I remember it well. Ho 
you remember her ? Sit here. 



91 



LESSON XCI. 

VERBS IN AR (ACTIVES AND NEUTERS, REELECTIVES 
IN PORTUGUESE AS PASSIVES IN ENGLISH). 

Hoses are found. 

It will be continued. 

Less to be feared. 

"We must part. 

This is not to be wondered at. 

You ought to be ashamed. 

This is called — 



Achao-ae rdsas. 
Continudr-se-ha. 
Menos de receidr. 
E mister separdr-nos. 
Isto nao e de admirdr. 
V.M. devia 
Isto chdma-se — 



E se achard. Gastou-se toda a vela. O senhor en- 
gdnar-se. Admira-me isto. Duvida-se muito desta no- 
ticia. melhdr inglez fdlla-se em Londres. O tempo 
serena. Abaixou-se a ponte levadica. que se da aos 
mendigos. Esta distinccao funda-se na authoridade de 
Cicero. Gonfirma-se a noticia. sol se mostra. Acabdr- 
se-ha o culto divino, e pregdr-se-hdo heresias. Teni-se 
derrotddo os inimigos. Nao sei se me atreva a perguntar- 
lhe. Como se chdma isto ? Ghdma-se... Continudr-se- 
ha amanha. Este cavallo e menos de receiar. 



Gold is found in Brasil. This history will be conti- 
nued. These men ought to be ashamed. The best Por- 
tuguese is spoken in Coimbra. They ivill be found. This 
news was confirmed. The first is modified by the second. 
The moon appears. This distinction is founded on truth. 
The thieves have been put to flight. What do you call 
this in Portuguese ? . The sun will shoiv himself. The 
glorious traditions of the nation were sought out. The 
boys ought to be ashamed. Less to be praised. Hoses are 
found in these mountains. The moou appears. 



92 

LESSON XCII. 

YEEBS IN" AE (iMPEESONALS).* 



Fdlla-se. 

Troveja, neva, gela. 
Contuse, restu. 
Notese, todavia. 
Louvuse-Yke o valor. 



It is said, they say, people say. 
It thunders, snows, freezes. 
It is related, it remains. 
Be it observed, however. 
They praised his courage. 



Hontem anoite chovia. Comecava a trovcjdr, quando 
me deitei. A quern estd causado, a cania parece boa. 
Nao impurta. Bdsta. O fogo apdga-se. Kao nevuu du- 
rante a tua ausencia ? JNao trovejard. Eesagrdda-me. 
Ale'gra-me isto. Bastard que me lembre o seu nome. 
Estd ameacando chiiva. E-me precise Eesta-me contar. 
Eelampeja. Estd trovejdndo. A admiracao comecou a 
tomdr-se mais moderada. joven tomou a caldr-se. 
Ao cliecjdrmos ao fim de nossa viagem. Melhor e nao 
falldr mos mais neste assiimpto. Conta-se, que o rei, etc. 



They say that it thunders. It was beginning to snow 
when I went to bed. It is thundering. "When one is 
tired, a chair is agreeable. This will he enough. It was 
raining all night. I must. On their arriving at the end 
of their voyage. The heat "began to grow more moderate. 
The old man again became silent. It is better for us not 
to say more. It is said that the duke, etc. I was glad 
of it. It lightens said thunders. I was displeased. They 
praise her beauty. It is said there will be war. It did 
not snow. The girl was again silent. 

* Impersonal verbs are far more used in Portuguese than in 
English. 



93 



LESSON XCIIL 

VEEBS IN AR (IDIOMATIC FOBMS), 



Jfistdva a chamar. 
Acdbo de tomar. 
JEstdndo escrevendo fsto. 
Tenho que estuclar. 
E de desejar. 
Acabdda a cea. 



I was calling. 
I h&vejust taken. 
While writing this. 
I have to study. 
It is to be wished. 
Supper being ended. 



Esquecidos de todos os riscos, iao navegdndo. tempo 
vdi aclardndo. E preciso separdr-nos. peixe acdba de 
chegdr. JEstou a estudar. JNTada tern que receiar disso. 
Acdba-se-me a paciencia. JSTao pre'sta pdra nada. Acdbo 
de chegar de Lisboa. Tirdda a causa, cessa o effeito. 
Estdndo disputdndo sobre a morte. Eu o vejo dangdr. 
Acdbo de jantdr. Estou a trabalhar. Elle vde procurdr 
a Y. S. Tenho de me embarcar. Tenho muito que es- 
perar. Vejo urn homem cortdndo panno. Acabddo de 
publicar-se. Acabddas as disposicoes necessarias, etc. 



"We have just taken tea. Forgetful of his friends, he 
went travelling. I have to finish my letter. It is to be 
hoped that the wound will be nothing. I saw him leap- 
ing. The mail has just arrived. This fish is good for 
nothing. The duke has just dined. The colonel is at 
dinner. The man is joking. He is going to call on you 
to-morrow. I see a boy studying his lesson. We have to 
go on board. Just published. The work being finished. 
Dinner done. I must rest. The time having arrived. 
Eorgetting every danger, she went through the battle- 
field. 



94 



LESSON XCIV. 
II. CONJUGATION.— YEKBS IN ER. 

TEMER— TO TEAK. 

Fear, fearest, fears ; fear. 

Feared, or was fearing. 

Feared, or did fear. 

Had feared. 

Shall fear. 



Temo, temes, teme ; tememos, 

temeis, temem. 
Temfa, temias, temfa ; teruiamos, 

temieis, temiao. 
Temi, temeste, temeu ; tememos, 

temestes, temerao. 
Temera, temeras, temera, temera- 

mos, temereis, temerao. 
Temerei, temeras, temera, temer- 
emos, temereis, temerao. 



Aprendo. JBebes. Corrompe. Devemos. Estendeis. 
Fdzem. Descrevia. Padeciamos. Escondi. Aborreceu. 
Erocederao. Vencera. Removerei. Erometterd. Re- 
ceher tamos. Comeriao. Vendi. Ella vendeu. Elle re- 
gerd. Erendi. Ellas conhecem. Meu irmao morreu. 
Bebemos a sua saude. Ellas comerdo muito pao. Elle 
combat eu pela liberdade. Tenho lido muitos livros. Isto 
nasce da sua negligencia. Elle romjperd a negociacao. 
Elle interrompeu ndssa conversaeao. Elle encheu o espaco. 
O jardineiro escolhe os melhores. Isso nao depende de 
mini. 



I shall eat nothing. I teas fearing. They were drink- 
ing. Thou liadst feared. I shall learn. I might extend. 
We might receive. He eats and drinks. They drank 
much old wine. He will interrupt our conversation. The 
king will conquer. He suffers. The boy hides the moDey. 
I shall not describe the town. The house fills the space. 
He will die of hunger. The gardener's daughter will 
cull the flowers. The general has conquered the difficul- 
ties. The peasants fought for the cause of freedom. 
My sister died yesterday. They interrupted us. 



95 



LESSON XCY. 

VERBS IN" ER (SUBJUNCTIVE, INEINITIVE, AND 
IMPERATIVE). 



Quetema, ternas,tema; temamos, 

temais, temao. 
Que temesse, temesses, temesse ; 

temessemos, teraesseis, temes- 

sem. 
Se (quando) eu tenier, temeres, 

temer ; temermos, teruerdes, 

temerem. 
Eu temer, tu temeres. 
Teme, temei. 
Temendo, temido. 
Tendo temido. 
Temer, ter temido. 



That I may fear, etc. 

That I might, could, would, 
should, fear. 

If (when) I fear, etc. 



My fearing, thy fearing, etc. 

Fear, fear ye. 

Fearing, feared. 

Having feared. 

To fear, to have feared. 



Que eu beba. Que elle deva. Que nos escrevessemos. 
Se eu esqiiecer. Se nos temermos. Para saber. Tre- 
mendo. Comido. Hei de vender. Se quizer chegar. 
Vendo as lagrimas. O monge comecou. a descer a escada. 
Nao ha tempo a perder. JProhibem-lhe o beber "vinho. 
la a condescender com o seu rogo. Um hdmem trerner ! 
Chegou antes Ranoitecer. Fendendo as ondas. Vai-se 
fazendo tarde. Ouco hater. Se nao adormecer logo, lerei. 
A agua esta fervendo. Tome o copo, e de-me de heber. 
Permitta-me que lhe qfferega uma chavana de cha. 



I must read. He must drink. She must eat. After 
my death. That I may drink. If you wish to eat. He 
began to drink wine. I must comply with his request. 
When you know our way. Fearing the consequences. 
He will not light the candles. I hear a knock. Allow 
me to offer you a glass of wine. If he wishes to sell the 
horse. It is growing late, and I have three letters to 
write. Is not the water boiling ? That I might not lose 
time. If he fears. If they fear. If I should forget. I 
must sell that horse. A soldier to tremble ! 



96 



LESSON XCVI. 



VERBS IX ER (COMPOUND ACTIVE TENSE s), 



Hei or tenho ternido. 
Havia or tmlia temido. 
Houve* or tive* ternido. 
Haverei or terei temido. 
Haveria or teria temido. 
Haja or tenha temido. 
Houvesse or tivesse temido. 



I have feared. 

I had feared. 

I had feared. 

I shall have feared. 

I shoidd have feared. 

That I have feared. 

That, or if, I had feared. 



Tenlio rccebido muitas cartas. commereio tern sof- 
frido. TSmos lido. A lingua Franceza tern obtldo uma 
certa universalidade, que a vai convertendo, por assiin 
dizer, em lingua geral. Terei comido. Teras bebido. Sem 
diivida terao comido bastante. Se tivesse escondido. Tinha 
anoiteculo. Disse ter respondido. Tendo morrido seu 
pae na guerra. Tenlio comido miiito, mais do que devia. 
Declaro haver rccebido. Logo que V. S. o^ tiver lido. 
Meu irmao tern recebido muitas cartas. Elle declara 
haver recibido dez milreis reis. 



I have eaten enough. I may have appeared careless. 
The incidents which had occurred. If they had learned 
to calculate the consequences. My brother had received 
two letters. The health of the soldiers has suffered. 
They have read my papers. The English language has 
obtained a certain universality in America. The man has 
eaten more than he ought. I declare I have received it. 
If I had feared. If he had prohibited. I should have for- 
gotten. He has offered. That orator has obtained a cer- 
tain popularity. His brother having died in battle. 

* Seldom used. 



97 



LESSON XCVIL 



VERBS IN EE (rEQ GEES SITE, PASSIVE, AND EUTUEE 
EOEMS). 



Est6u temendo, estou a temer. 
Estava temendo, estava a temer. 
Estou vencido. 
Afnda que eu fosse vencido. 
Havemos de nos divertir. 
Escrever-lhe-hei, Ma. 



I am fearing. 

I was fearing. 

I am conquered. 

Though I were conquered. 

We shall enjoy ourselves. 

I shall write to him, should. 



~El\efoi absolvido da accusacao. Dever-se-ha abrir as 
janellas. JProceder-se-ha assim. Tlnhamos sido mal re- 
cebidos por seupae. Te-lo-ha Y. S. apprendido. JEstdva 
elle convencido disso ? Em fim anoitecera. Vdmos a des- 
cer. Sem dizer palavra, deseeu. V. S. me fez descer. 
Depois de fallecer o rei. O emirado de Badajoz havia 
sido submettido. Nao seriamos vencidos em generosidade. 
Escrever-lhe-hei quarta-feira, se uao poder ir ve-lo na 
segunda. Nao hei de soffrer tal. Que quer comer ? Elle 
estava bebendo. Depois de eu morrer. 



I shall write to them. I am writing. He is drinking. 
They are learning . He is conquered. ^Without fearing the 
consequences. After having written the letter. What do 
you wish to drink ? After his death. I was convinced of 
the truth. The enemy was conquered. I shall not suffer 
this. After the death of the emperor. I was badly re- 
ceived. After her death. I shall write to his brother. 
He will write to you on "Wednesday, if he cannot call 
on Tuesday. The Queen of Spain was badly received 
at the theatre. The Emperor oi Russia was not convinced 
of this. 



98 



LESSON XCVIII. 

VERBS IN ER (BEELECTIVES* AND EECirEOCALS). 



Elle esquece-se de siias promessas. 
O hdmem prudente corrige-se a 

si mesmo. 
Atrevo-me a pedir. 
Logo ella se arrependfu. 
EHes esquecerao-se de Ulysses. 



He forgets his promises. 
The prudent man corrects him- 
self. 
I venture to ask. 
She repented instantly. 
They have forgotten Ulysses. 



Elle esconde-se k justica. Abstenlw-me de beber vinho. 
Bile se intromette nos meus negocios. Meu tfo mette-se 
a fallar em politica. Venclo-se perseguido de perto, cessou 
de defend er-se, Y6u-w?e wetter na cama. Nao one esque- 
cerei. Aborrece-me isso. Este homem esqueceu-se de can- 
tar. Nao se esqueca de vir logo que river jantado. E 
necessario arrepender-se dos peccados. Ainda te atreves 
a replicar-me ? historiaddr ve-se miiitas vezes per- 
plexo. Para se valer do frio. Os Samoiedas estendem-se 
pela Siberia. Atrevi-me na sua bondade. 



The king never ventured to open the door. Seeing 
himself obliged to keep a flock. I nave forgotten your 
name. Save you forgotten me ? He has forgotten me. 
In order to obtain rewards, they have recourse to (valer- 
se) flattery and fraud. They were obliged to surrender. 
Law is not required to repress luxury. Its defenders had 
to retire to the castle. Not being able to maintain him- 
self. In Eebruary, the city had surrendered. Do not 
forget to pay the money, as soon as you have dined. 
The boy hid himself in the stable. I venture to ask a 
favour. I repent of my sin. 

* A reflective in Portuguese is often simple in English. 



99 



LESSON XCIX. 



VERBS IN EE, (ACTIVE AND REELECTIVE W PORTUGUESE ; 

r= PASSIVES IN ENGLISH). 



O trigo vende-se a — 
JEstSnde-se esta significacao — 
!Nao se viao senao poucos mas- 

teos. 
Verfazer justica. 
A lenha se reduz a cinzas. 
Tremeudo-Z/ie a vdz. 



Wheat £s sold at — 

This meaning is extended to- 

A few masts only were seen. 

To see justice done. 

The wood is burnt to ashes. 

_5er voice trembling. 



A meihor beMda que se pode fornecer a urn doente e 
agua piira. O museu se ha de estender. Viao-se as ilhas 
levantar seus climes. Onde se ve o tumulo. Desejo ver 
fazer justica neste negdcio. Para se conhecer a causa 
provavel. Os vapores se estendiao. A cidade e celebre 
por siias feiras, que se fdzem sobre a neve. Vendem-se 
em Moscou casas de madeira, que se armao e desarmao 
segiindo se quer. Aqui se colhe excellente vinho. All 
se faz um grande commercio de cobre. O amor so e 
mais para se temer do. . . 



Sugar is sold at sixpence a pound. Is wine sold 
here ? Eussia extends to Germany. A few men only 
are seen. The bouse is seen amongst the woods. He 
wishes to see justice done to these poor sailors. Very 
good books are sold here. The house was reduced to 
ashes in less than three hours. The fair is held in the 
forest. A great trade in iron was carried on in this dis- 
trict. The best wine that can he furnished is Bual. The 
mountains were seen afar oft'. I must see justice done to 
that poor negro. His hand trembling. 



100 
LESSON C. 

VERBS IN EE (iMPEESONALS). 



Convem, succede. 

Chdve, parece. 

Sabe-se. 

Vale. 

Faz vento ; dao relampagos. 

Escurecer-se. 



It suits, it happens. 

It rains, it seenis. 

It is known. 

Is worth. 

It is windy ; it lightens. 

To grow dark. 



Ensinando, se aprende. Quern nao apparece esquece. 
Ao amanhecer. Faz-se tarde. Hqje choverd. Chove. 
Diz-se. Fstd-me bem. Parece ser verdade o que elle 
diz. Que Ihe parece ? Nao vale a pena. Nao se sdbe 
quando jantara. Chove miiito. Dao trovoes. Faz um 
calor terrivel. Quando se faz de vela ? Antes ft ama- 
nhecer. Nao convem que neste momento vejas Beatriz. 
O que mais convem a um rei e ser justo. Convem des- 
pertar a attencao piibliea. Tenho cousa que convem. 
Nem sempre succede segundo os nossos desejos. 



At day-break the Russian troops appeared near the 
church. I must go home, for it is late. It is said that 
Admiral Napier has attacked Cronstadt. It is not known 
when the French frigate will arrive. I cannot leave the 
house : the heat is so terrible. What is most becoming 
in a parent, is to be just and kind. It is proper to rouse 
the attention of these men. "What do you think ? If it- 
is windy, shall I go ? It seems to be true what she says. 
In teaching, one learns. It is not worth while to go, for 
it will rain. It is well known that the man will not pay 
the money. 



101 



LESSON CI. 

YEEBS IN ER (IDIOMATIC FORMS). 



Tive que escrevSr. 
Tornou a ler a carta. 
Sem qua eu o percebesse* 
Sera mister que mefd^a, etc. 
Elle estd para morrer. 



I had to write. 
He read the letter again. 
* \ ithout my perceiving it. 
You must make me, etc. 
He is about to die. 



Torne a escrever a carta. Estou morrendo de sede. 
De-Hie de beber. A seuhora tornou a dizer-lhe. Sentiu 
muita alegria ao #e-lo entrar ria *>ala, O bariilho que da 
a conhecer. Sem que nos o percebessemos. Em chovendo * 
E possivel que torne a ver-te ? A^sim torndsse eu a rer 
Ulysses ! Vierao lamber-ihe os pes. Nao podendo soffrer 
em sileneio. Dizein que o Senhor JST. deve fazerf o pri- 
meiro papel. Antes de morrer, Atlbnso declarou, etc, 
Fallecidj o conde. Em no^so entender. Meu parecer e 
que — Sem que o cavalueiro o tiv esse percebido. 



He has to write to England by the Brazil steamer of 
the 8th. hist. He read the booiv again, but he is not yet 
convinced of the truth. Sue lefc the room without my 
perceiving it. The old general is about to die. As soon 
as the king was dead, the duke left Lisbon. The poor 
traveller was dying of thirst My opinion is, that we 
ought to go home by the tirst steamer. They say that 
Mario is to perform the principal part. Before dying, the 
prisoner declared his innoceuce. If it rains. You must 
write that letter again. I rejoiced to see her enter the 
house. The thief came in, without your seeing him. 



* Translate, " if it rains." See p. 132, 
f Fazer papel) play a part. 



102 

LESSON CII. 

III. CONJUGATION YEEBS IN IR. 
PUNIE, TO PUNISH. 

Punish, punishest, punishes. 
Punished, or was punishing. 
Punished, or did punish. 



Piino, punes, pdne ; punfmos, 

punis, piinem. 
Puma, pumas, punfa; puniamos, 

punieis, puniao. 
Puni, puniste, puniu; punimos, 

punistes, punirao. 
Punira, puniras, -a; -amos, -eis, -ao 
Punirei, -as, -a; -emos, -eis, -ao. 



Had punished. 
Shall punish. 



Traduzo. Applaud imos. Abriria. Abria. Admittiao. 
Admittirao. Apflaudiramos. Applaudiremos. Admttto 
isso. Eu o introduzi. Elle pede vinho. O Conde re- 
sidiu sempre em Portugal. A enfermidade que conduziu 
AiFonso a sepultura. JPedi-\he a sua proteccao. Abriu 
passo pelo muro. Eaimiindo decahiu da gnica do rei. A 
morte destnuu as esperai^as que Henrique concebera de 
obter o dominio de Toledo. O official seguiu o seu con- 
ductor. Como ja advertimos. Frigiu ella o peixe ? 
Oumprirei com o promettido. 



He repeated some words in a low voice. He called 
for beer. The king resided for some time in "Windsor. 
He destroyed all the fortifications. The child followed 
the guide. She has not fried the fish. The impartial 
public applauded. I prefer coffee. I have lost* my 
book. The Turkish government asJcs for the evacuation 
of the provinces. An earthquake has destroyed the town. 
He translated Herculano's History of Portugal into Eng- 
lish. He will not fulfil his promise, I am sure. He fell 
into disgrace. He fell from the Queen's favour. I do 
not admit that. 

* As if " I lost." 



LESSON cm. 

verbs in ie (subjunctive, imperative, and 
infinitive). 



Puna, punas, puna; punamos, 

punais, punao. 
Punisse, punfsses, punfsse ; pu- 

nissemos, punfsseis, punfssem. 
Se punfr, punires, punfr ; punfr- 

mos, punirdes, punirem. 
Punirfa, -fas, -fa, -faruus, -feis, fao. 
Pune, punf. 
Punfndo, punfdo. 
Punir, ter punido. 



That... may punish. 

That... might punish. 

If... punish.. 

Should punish. 

Punish (thou), punish (ye). 

Punishing, punished. 

To punish, to have punished. 



V. Ex. a rue diz que suba. Advirta* disso seii irmao, 
Traduza* isto em inglez. Que destrudmos a dbra. Que 
traduzissemos. Suba V. M. Permitta-me que me retire. 
Vamos dormir a Santarem. Conduza estes senhores 
para a sala graade. Ao ouvir urn tal discurso. Para 
me conduzir a cidade. Fazendo promessas que depen- 
dem do tempo para se cwmprirem. Os soldados chamao 
o pobre pateta j»ar# se diver tirem com a sua tolice. JSTao 
pode competir com elle. Henrique foi persegui-lo no seu 
leito de mdrte. Se punir mos estes ladroes. 



Translate that letter into French. Allow me to finish 
the book. On hearing these words, he fell to the ground. 
I cannot compete with him. The monk went to warn him. 
In order to conduct him to the palace. I shall go mi^. ful- 
fil my duty. Reduce everything to figures. Allow me 
to go home now. He called the boy to him, to amuse 
himself with his folly. On hearing the voice of my father, 
I left the room. Fulfil your duty. Show the count into 
the drawing-room. That I may translate the king's letter 
into German. Punish the boy. 

* The subjunctive is (politely) used for the imperative.. 



104 
LESSON CIY. 

YEEBS IN IE (COMPOUND TENSES ACTITE). 



Hei ou tenho punido. 

Havia, houve ; tinha, tive pu- 
nido. 

Haverei, or ia ; terei, or ia pu- 
nido. 

Haja, tenha punido. 

Houvesse, tivesse punido. 

Quando houver, tiver punido. 



I have punished. 
I had punished. 

I. shall or should have punished. 

That I have punished. 
That I had punished. 
When I have punished. 



Tenho dormido. Elle tinha apparecido. llllle tinha 
imprimido a sua obra. Nao tinhao elles comido a fruta ? 
]Sao ba traduzido a tabula ? Eu tenho ouvido dizer. Em 
breve teremos concluido a Jornada. Tenho ouvido tudo. 
criado que se havia decidido a seguir seu amo, etc. 
Havendo ate ahi seguido. Assim tern resohndo o conselho. 
Convertida a guerra civil em guerra estrangeira. Que 
elles tivessem sacudido o pd. You perder quanto tLha 
adquirido. Tal pregador niinca eu o tinha ouvido. Elle 
tern servido muito a meu contento. 



He bad slept. They had slept in an humble inn. The 
man had suddenly appeared. The sovereigns being con- 
verted into silver. Has he eaten all the strawberries ? 
Had your friend printed his book before, etc. "When I 
have translated that speech into Portuguese, etc. Erance 
has not competed with England. They have not perse- 
cuted the men. "When the soldiers destroy the bridge. 
They had opened the windows. He had not fulfilled 
his promise. Did you hear that the French had taken 
the Malakoff? 



105 



LESSON CV. 

VERBS IN IR (PROGRESSIVE, PASSIVE, AND FUTURE). 



Estou punindo, — 
Estava punindo, — a 
Estou caido. 
Estou resolmdo. 
Ser eu punido. 
Ao abrir da porta. 



I am punishing. 

I was punishing. 

I have fallen. 

I am resolved. 

My being punished. 

At the opening of the door. 



Por suas cuLpas nao serem punidas. Elle tinlia sido 
despedido. Tu teras sido vestido. A empreza teria sido 
differida. Elle e applaudido de toda a geute. Nao sen do 
interrompido o sorn. Estava vestido de purpura. Elle 
vai sahindo bem do negocio. iSendo miiito instruido. 
Se estas cousas nao forem reprimidas. A casa e bem 
conhecida de todos. Nao os condemnem, sem serein 
ouvidos. Nao quero que seja perseguido. A casa teria 
sido demolida. A lei esta abolida. Nao o ha de punir ? 
Elle os ha de reduzir. Estou resolmdo afalldr. 



He has fallen into my net. Their not being punished 
for their faults was owiug to their being powerful. The 
king was clothed in purple. The lad, being well in- 
structed, has translated the book accurately. Has the 
law been abolished ? This castle was built in the reign 
of George III. I shall not have to punish him. The 
old castle has been demolished. The rebellion was sup- 
pressed. He was punishing the boy. Our being perse- 
cuted was the result of the king's command. He was 
punished without being heard. Repeated times. "We wish 
to start. 



106 



LESSON CYI. 

VERBS IN IB (BEFLECTIYES AND BECIPEOCALS). 



Vou despedir-me de Y. S. 
Unem-se os labios da ferfda. 
Rindo-se, sorrindo-se. 
outras terras se sumirao. 
Sinto-me indisposto. 
TPingir-se cego. 



I must take my leave of you. 
The lips of the wound unite. 
Laughing ; smiling. 
Other lauds disappeared. 
I fjel unwell. 
To feign himself blind. 



O cavalheiro dirigiu-se para o loo:ar. !Nao sefen'rao 
elles ? museu se ha de abrir a quinze de marco. Lhe 
respondeu o soldado rindo-se. O azougue une-se com o 
ouro. Sorria-se na terra a Primavera. Queira servir-se 
disto. Vdi-se pondo o sol. FCi-se como urn passarinho. 
Fugiu-me da vista. Os Lapoes se se'rvem da renna nas 
suas viagens, e se cobrem com sua pelle. Como se dis- 
tinguirdo os Persas ? Deixa-we ao menos despedir de 
Eucharis^ Vai divertir-se. Eu me incumbo desse ne- 
gocio. Elle escapou-se da vista de seu pae. 



He went out smiling. The soul is about to say fare- 
well. Six pieces of artillery followed. I must take my 
leave of you. The lady feels herself unwell. The soldier 
feigned himself deaf. The child, laughing, went out. 
The moon is setting. The man fed from my sight. The 
Indians use rice. The Caffres cover themselves with the 
skins of lions. He will take charge of these affairs. He 
amuses* himself iu deceiving me. I take my leave. My 
brother feels unwell. He feigns himself lame. I am 
going to take leave of my frieuds. The hoy feigned him- 
self blind. 



* Divertir. 



107 



LESSON CYIL 



VERBS IN IE (ACTIVE AND REFLECTIVE ; PASSIVES AND 
NEUTERS IN ENGLISH). 



A Irlanda divide-se em — 
Ndtre-se a alma. 
Rtndo-se ; de ss abrir. 
A que horas parte o vapor ? 



Ireland is divided into — 
The soul is nourished. 
Laughing ; of being opened. 
When does the steamer start ? 



jue-se que — It follows that — - 

Sentiu-se um grande rufdo. I A great noise was heard. 



"Calmar" onde se concluiu o celebre tratado. Divi- 
dem-se as opinioes. Quviao-se os passarinhos chilrando. 
Porque se preftre esta estrada a outra ? Pdrte-se o co- 
racao. Vde-se concluindo. Zunem-Vue os onvidos. Em 
apparecendo o sol, as estrellas somem-se. Sentiu-se um 
grande tremor. JPartido-se em varias opinioes. Estes 
navios se partem tao arrebatadamente. Sentiu-se grande 
abalo no navio. Nao me sinto com forcas para isso. 
Queira servir-se disto. Divide-se a casa em quartos. O 
mestre despediu-se. A que floras parte o diique ? 



England is divided into forty counties. At what 
o'clock does the steamer leave the port ? It follows that 
you must go immediately. The poor child is drawing 
near its end. Why is this house preferred to the other ? 
Opinions ivere divided. A great motion was felt. Pray, 
help yourself. The work is divided. The necessity of 
roads being opened. The city is divided into seven quar- 
ters, or districts. The King of Portugal took his leave 
at 4 o'clock. She is not strong enough for this. The 
patient is dying. I do not feel equal to this. The garden 
is divided into three parts. 



108 



LESSON CYIII. 

VERBS IN IE (iMPEESONAL). 



Cde neve ; chove pedra. 
Cae-lhe a espada da mao. 
Doe-vae a perna. 
Cumpre-nos narrar. 
Chovem-me kigrhnas dos dlhos. 
Cumprmdo-se com os preceitos 
da lei. 



It snows ; it hails. 
His sword fell from his hand. 
My leg pains me. 
It is our duty to narrate. 
Tears flowed copiously. 
Fulfilling the requirements of 
the law. 



Cw^retomarumaresolucao. Cde muita pedra. Esta 
caindo neve ? Cdem grand ess iiocos. Hqje cumpre osten- 
tarmos-o. Gde-me a penna da mao. O ceu gea, neva, 
abraza, e chove. Ckoveu enxofre do ceu. Chove a can- 
taros. Cam uina grand e pancada d'agua. Esta caindo 
pedra. Esta chore ndo neve. Cam bastante neve. Cam 
geada. Cdem algiimas gotas d'agua. Cumpre escrever 
aquella carta antes de sair o vapor. Dde-me o hombro 
miiito. Esta caindo muita neve. Cam hontem muita 
pedra. Cu??ipre-me dizer-lhe coin franqueza. 



It was snowing all night. I cannot go, as it rains and 
hails. It is my duty to tell you. My left hand pains 
me. It will snow to-morrow. It was raining all night. 
It is pouring. It is our duty to go, if it does not rain. 
It is hailing. It will snow to-morrow on the hills, but 
we shall have fine weaiher in town. Fulfilling the com- 
mandments of my superior officer, it is my duty to inform 
you. Tears fell from her e\ es in showers. I am bound 
to write that letter. 1 have a sore throat. You must 
take a resolution. Much snow is falling. 



109 
LESSON CIX. 

YERBS IN IR (IDIOMATIC FORMS). 



Tenho de partir. 

Acdbo de ouvir. 

Se estdva prompto para partir. 

Ouvfu lima vdz pedtr. 

!Nao pddem deixdr de sentir. 

Estdva para pedir. 



I have to go. 

I have just heard. 

If he was ready to start. 

He heard a voice call. 

They cannot help feeling. 

He was about to ask. 



Se bem tenho entendido o que acdbo de ouvir. !Eis- 
nos partidos. Vae-se partir. V. S. nao esta em estado de 
repetir a sua licao. PedirAhe-hei lima fatia, se me faz 
favor. Santarem nao tardou a cair-lhe nas maos. Posso 
servir-te com algiima hortalica ? De que quer que o 
sirva ? Ir diminuindo. O pobre ho mem esta a concluir. 
A primavera es&i rindo nos jardins. Dividir doze por 
tres. Estdmos para partir. Acdbo de partir. Faz mau 
tempo para se sajr. O cair* da t'olha. Nao posso deixar 
de foliar neste assiimpto. rapaz nao estd prompto para 
partir. 



I am mzJy to start. I have to go to England by the 
steamer. The boy has just heard that his father is dead. 
I cannot help asking you. We are off. We have to go to 
Lisbon by the Gral^o. They had to repeat all the lesson. 
The town was not long in falling into the hands of the 
Erench. May I offer you some beef ? The poor invalid 
is dying. I have just heard that the steamer goes about 
four o'clock. I cannot help falling. What shall I offer 
them ? He was about to ash for water. We have just 
heard of the victory. He cannot help speaking. 

* The Portuguese often use the infinitive instead of a noun. 



110 



LESSON CX. 

A 

POE — TO PUT (and its compounds). 

I put, thou puttest, he puts, etc. 



Ponho, poes, poe ; ponios, pon- 

des, poem. 
Punha, as, a ; amos, eis, So. 
Piiz, este, 6z ; emos, estes, erao. 
Puzera, eras, era ; eramos, ereis, 

erao. 
Porei, as, a ; emos, eis, ao. 



I put, or was putting, etc. 
I put, or did put, etc. 
I had put, etc. 

I shall put, etc. 




Punhamos. Puzeramos. Porei. Pomos. O homem 
poe, e Dens dispoe. A gallinha poe ovos. Eu punha o 
pe no estribo. ^ Elle poz a mao na testa. Eu puz a es- 
pada a cinta. Elles puzerao os vestidos. ^wpuztra toda 
a diligencia. JPorei fim a dbra. JPord o homem na rua. 
Compomos livros. Ella cofnpoe acasa. O padre compora 
as dissensoes. Compoz-se com a sua sorte. Este Jivro 
compoe-se de tres partes. general dispoe as peens em 
bateria. Swpponho que nao. Eu o supponho. ~E\ie poz- 
se em pe. Elle impoz lirna condicao. 



He put his hands on the boy's head. They imposed 
severe terms. She put a sealed letter into my hand. 
"Where have you. put my hat ? I shall put the books on 
the table. The year is composed of days. Iu you he 
places all his confidence. She ys'\\\ put some coal on the 
fire. He has not put the bridle ou the mare. I shall 
dispose of my house. "We suppose not. They will put 
the papers into my hands. He disposed of his goods. He 
put it here. They laid down their arms. The rebels de- 
posed the king. The gardener transplanted the trees. 
He will suppose. I composed a book. 



Ill 



LESSON CXI. 
POE — to put (subjunctive). 

That I may put, etc. 
That I might put, etc. 
If I put, etc. 
If I had put, etc. 
I should put, etc. 



Que eu p6nha, as, a ; amos, 

ais, ao. 
Que eu puzesse, es, e ; essemos, 

eis, em. 
Se eu puzer, es, er; mos, des, 

em. 
Se eu puzera, as, a ; amos, eis, 

ao. 
Porfa, fas, fa ; famos, feis, fao. 



Se puzer miiito carvao, hade apagar o fogo. Diga-lhe 
que ponha o livro na mesa. Se puzerinos o navio em 
perigo. Se o general puzesse os soldados a ferro. Man- 
dou aos afficiaes que repozessem o dinheiro de cada urn 
nos sens saccos. Ponha a roupa a enxugar. Ponhamos 
a panella ao ltime. Se expozermos estas duvidas. Se eu 
pozesse o homem na rua. Se elle se poze'r a cavallo. Se 
as meninas se pozerem a chorar. Se os astros se pozessem. 
Se em. duas horas me pozesse em Lisboa. Se Y. M. 
pozer tanto tempo em fazer isto. Elle nao o comporia. 



If the ho j puts too much water. Tell him to put the 
wine on the table. I told him to put out the dog. Let 
us suppose it so. If the sun sets at seven o'clock. Tell 
him to mount his horse. I know not to what to attribute it. 
If the captain puts the ship in danger. If he can be in 
Ennchai in three hours. Tell the maid to lay the cloth. 
Tell him to put the hammock on the ground. Let us 
put the pan on the fire. Put the shirts to dry. If she 
should put on mourning. Lay the cloth at six o'clock. 
The hen would lay eggs. He would impose terms. 



112 



LESSON CXII. 



POR— TO PUT (IMPERATIVE, INFINITIVE, AND 
PARTICIPLES). 



P6r, ter posto. 

Por eu, pores tu, por elle. 

Pormos nds, pordes vds, porem 

elles. 
Poe, ponde. 
Pondo, posto. 
Por, ter, posto. 



To put, to have put. 

My putting, thy putting, his 

putting. 
Our putting, your putting, their 

putting. 
Put (thou), put (ye). 
Putting, put. 



Por o homem por p-overnador. Ter posto o navio em 
perigo. Poe de parte a vai'iade. Sera eu por crvestido. 
Porem-se os astros. O pormos toda a diligencia nem 
sempre da bons suceessos. Depois de elle ter posto a 
mesa. Posto o medo. Uma cousa supposta. Para o 
Bi^po impor as maos. Impondo tribute-. Sem ellas 
terem disposto da sua fazenda. Dispondo os paineis na 
sala. Sem eu dispor estas arvores. Depois de o capitao 
ter tudo disposto para a empreza. Sem compormos as 
disputas. Marquez era todo composto de bondade. 



Having placed tbe lad as inspector. Lay aside the 
book. "Without his putting off his coat. Our composing 
books will not pay the labour. After the king's im- 
posing tribute. "Without my disposing of my house. After 
your settling your disputes. Your father was made of 
honour. He is reconciled with the doctor. After his 
having placed the pictures in the gallery. "Without her 
having composed a poem. My having laid the cloth gave 
him pleasure. After our having transplanted these 
bushes. Without putting his life in peril. 



113 



LESSON CXIIL 

POE — COMPOUND TENSES. 



Hei ou tenho posto. 
Havia, tinha posto. 
Haverei, haveria, terei, teria, 

posto. 
Haja, tenha posto. 
Houvesse, tivesse posto. 
Quando houver, tiver posto. 
Ter posto, haver de por. 



I have put, etc. 

I had put, etc. 

I shall, or should, have put. 

That I may have put. 
That I might have put. 
When I have put. 
To have put ; to have to put. 



Eii tenho posto o chapeu na cabeca. Heide por o ho- 
mem fora. Temos posto a casa em perigo. Ellas haode 
por-se a cavallo. Que eu tenha posto o piano em execucao. 
Se elle tivesse posto o criado na riia. Se elles tivessem 
posto os pes ao caininho. Se as aves tivessem posto os 
dvos no ninho. Quando eu tiver posto a mesa. Ter posto 
todo a cuidado. Estd posto a trabalhar. Tendo composto 
um livro. Estdr composto com elle. Tinha composto o 
semblante. Eu teria disposto as estatuas na galeria. Se 
elle tivesse disposto do dinheiro. 



He has put the bat on his head. I shall put the boy- 
out of the house. They have placed the kingdom in dan- 
ger. I have arranged the pictures in the hall. When 
the birds have laid their eggs. The servant had laid the 
cloth. I shall have composed some verses. These young 
ladies have mounted their horses. "When he has put the 
plan in execution. Saving composed a good book. If I 
had put my hat on the table. I shall have to compose 
verses. I should have prepared all for the enterprise. 
He had put every confidence in his friend. If he had 
put on the boots. 



f 



114 



LESSON CXIY. 
IEBEaULAR yekbs in AE. 



"Bmcdr, biisque ; tocdr, toquei. 
Folgcir, folgue ; eniregdr, en- 

tregue. 
Arrancar, buscar, atacar, edificar, 

embarcar, ficar, peccar, repli- 

car, suffocar, tocar. 
Alugar, carregar, cegar, castigar, 

chegar, empregdr, etc. 



Car changes c into qu before e. 
Gar takes u after g before e. 

Pull up, fetch, attack, build, em- 
bark, stay, sin, reply, suffocate, 
touch. 

Hire, charge, blind, chastise, 
reach, employ, etc. 



Ataquei o inimigo de flanco. Busque o chapeu. Di- 
ga-lhe que arrdnque as arvores. Edifiquernos uma ponte 
aqui. Embarquei-me no negocio sem reflectir. Pequei 
miiitas vezes. Nao replique ! Sziffoquei-o nos meus bra- 
90s. Toque a campainha. JNao alugei a casa. Carreguei 
os batalhoes inimigos. Que elles ceguem* a artilheria. 
Castiguemos esses rapazes. Chegue-se ao pe do kime. 
Empreguei todo o tempo no estudo. Estraguemos todas 
estas mas hervas. ~M.mko folguei de a ver. Ldrgue isso. 
Pdgue o dinheiro. Ja paguei. Eegue na pa. Pegue 
n'isso. 



Ring tbe bell. Don't stay in the house. Let go the 
bridle. I rang the bell three times. Do not touch me. 
Fetch the hammock-men. Tell him to stay in the gar- 
den. Don't reply. Spike the guns. Let us load the 
car. Let the man build the bridge. Do not tear your 
new dress. I spoiled that boy. My duty requires me 
to confiscate the lace. I approached the fire. I suffo- 
cated the lion in my arms. Take the reins, and stay 
here. I embarked in a ship of war. I did not load the 
gun. Let us pay the money. I reached the chamber, 
attacked the thief, and chastised him severely. Tear the 
paper, a,nd put out the light. 



* Blind, i.e., spike the guns. 



115 



LESSON CXV. 
DAE* — to give. 



Don, -as, -a, -amos, -ais, -ao. 
Dav#, -as, -a, -amos, -eis, -ao. 
Dei, -este, -eo, -emos, -estes, 

-erao. 
Dera, -as, -a, -amos, -eis, -ao. 
Darei, etc. Daria, etc. 
De, -es, -e, -emos, eis, em. 
Desse, desses, etc. 
Se der, etc. 
Da, dai. 
Dar, ter dado, dando, dado. 



I give, thou givest, he gives. 
I was giving, etc. 
I gave, or did give. 

I had given, etc. 
I shall give. Should give. 
I may give. 
I might give. 
If I give. 

Give (thou), give (ye). 
To give, to have given, giving, 
given. 



Ddmos. Deste. Deu. Demos. Ddva. Darei. Daria. 
Tinha dado. Se eu der. Se eu desse. Dera. Ter dado. 
Se tivesse dado. Dou-\he os parabens. Eu nao dou 
tanto. Dou-\he a minha palavra. Ella me ddva pequena 
soldada. Ainda nao deu lima hora. As vinhas nao derdo 
este anno. Elle nao me deu noticias. Ja derdo oito ho- 
ras. Da licenca que — De-me esse chapeu. Dai pao 
ao senhor. Preciso que me de as siias chaves. Ddr-me- 
hia miiito prazer o conversarmos. Ddr-lhe-hei em trdca 
este relogio. Quanto me da pelo meu ? 



He gives. We give. Thou givest. 1 gave. We were 
giving. I had given. I shall give. He might give. I 
shall not give a dollar. The man gave good wages. It 
has not yet struck two. Pears have not yielded well this 
year. Give me leave to — Give wine to the men. I 
shall give you a book in exchange. It has already struck. 
I can give it you for two dollars. You must give them 
to be mended. You must give him your papers. They 
gave me good news. It would give me much pleasure to 
meet. If I give. I shall not give so much. Give it me. 



* Only the most important parts of the irregular verbs ar< 
given. They should be carefully committed to memory. 



116 

LESSON CXYI. 
DAE — TO GIVE (idiomatic foems).* 



Ddr dfa e hdra. 
Ddr licao ; clar costas. 
Deu-me que entender. 
Ddr comsfgo no chao. 
No qual me dd conta de. 

Ddr-se por culpado. 



To appoint a meeting. 

To say a lesson ; to turn the back. 

He gave me to understand. 

To fall to the ground. 

In which you give me an account 

of. 
To admit his guilt. 



Ddr o sim. Deu fogo. Elle deu a vida por seu amigo. 
Dd licenca. Ddndo ouvidos. Nao derao quartel. Ella 
dd uma olhada. Nao poder ddr urn passo. Mais vale 
urn " torn a la" que dois "te dareiT De aonde der. A 
riia vai ddr a praca. Dddas as maos. O relogio dd hdras. 
Ouve-o ddr horas ? Nao ainda : de-\h.e corda. Quando 
dd a vela ? Ddr de esporas. Ddr em bebado. navio 
dd n'um banco. O barco nao dd pelo leme. Don por 
eoncluido este negdcio. Ddr as maos. Nao se me dd 
nada. Ddr-se-hi caso ? Dd-se como certo. Dou-me 
bem neste clima. Demos que assim seja. 



To shake hands. I gave him credit. The king gives 
audience. He gave me his hand. They gave him some- 
thing to drink. I put an end to the affair. They gave 
thanks. The soldiers turned their backs. Minos gave 
laws. Shall I say my lesson ? They gave no quarter. 
He tore witness. He gave a glance. He could not walk 
a step. He gave me to understand that. They gave 
proofs of— To give and take. Whatever may happen. 
To knock the head against the wall. Give him my re- 
gards. He could not advance a step. Having shaken 
hands. 

* These are hut a few specimens. Consult Constancio's Dic- 
tionary, " Bar." 



117 

LESSON CXVIL 
IREEGULAE verbs in EE. 

Ger changes y into^' in the first pers. sing. pres. ind. and subj. 

Cer changes c into g. 

Oer changes o into 6, when followed by o or a. 

Perder, changes d into c, in first pers. sing. pres. ind. and subj. 

Jazer, makes jazo- 



Abrdnjo todo o genero humano. D6o-me de urn pe. 
Pancadas que dodo. Urn eleitor pdde dizer "eu elejo." 
Nunca jdzo na cama depois das 6 horas. Moo o milho 
todos os dias. Moao a carina de assucar la em cima. 
Certifico-lhe que perco n'isso. Nao perca tempo. JSTao 
percdmos niinca de vista esta lei. Que eu nao perca esta 
occasiao. Banjo os dentes com frio. Bdnja o cao, nao 
me impdrta. Tdnjo a trombeta. Tanjdmos os instru- 
mentos. Niinca tor go o rosto ao inimigo. Torcdmos as 
redeas aos cavallos. Perca os seus bens. 



I elect my governors. I lie in bed eight hours every 
night. I lose time in hearing this story. That the boy 
may not lose this opportunity. I play the usual instru- 
ments. Let him not twist my meaning. Tell him not 
to lose time. My hand pains me. Let him grind the 
wheat every morning. Let us not lose the advantage. 
I gnash my teeth with fever. Let the door creak on its 
hinges. As soon as the church bell rings I shall go 
home. The Queen may say " I reign?" Tell the girl 
not to twist the strings of the harp. Tell him to elect 
the most faithful deputy. Let us lie in peace till the 
enemy disappears. Let him not lose the dollar. 



118 



LESSON CXVIII. 

CABER — TO BE CONTAINED, EIT, SUIT, BE EQUAL TO, 
BE THE BUTT OF, HAPPEN. 

I fit, suit, etc. 



Caibo, cabes, cabe ; cabemos, 

cabeis, cabem. 
Cabia, -fas, -fa; -famos, -feis, -fao 
Coufe, -este, -be; -emos, -estes, 

-erao. 
Coubera, -as, -a, etc. Caberei, 

Caiba, etc. Caberia, etc. Cou- 
besse. 



I fitted, was fitting. 
I fitted, did fit. 

Had fitted, will fit. 

May, should, might suit. 



vinho nao cabe na garrafa. A gente cabe na casa. 
Nao cabe n'um hornem de bem o mentir. Este officio 
nao me cabe. Nao ine cabe aconselhar os mais velhos. 
Isto me coube por sorte. Isso so cabe ao sabio. Nao cabe 
na minba penna escrever o que vos couber na boca. Creio 
que nem no mundo todo poderiao caber os livros. Deve- 
mos obstar quanto em nds couber. Couberao as aucto- 
ridades na casa da camara. Coubera trigo nos saccos. 
Caberiao ambos os batalboes no mesmo quartel ? Coube 
me atalbar o mal. Seria bom, se coubesse. 



The wine was not contained in the bottle. Many per- 
sons met in the college. It fell to my lot to be first. 
It does not become a man of honour. So many people 
cannot be contained in this room. This office does not 
suit him. The pupil3 assembled in the school. The sacks 
contained barley. If the people cannot be contained in 
the cathedral, they must stay outside. I inherited a 
house (lit. a house fell to me in heirship). The greater 
part/e/£ to me. He stands well with the minister. If 
it suits. The theatre will not hold the people. It does 
not become me. The house will not accommodate the 
family. 



119 
LESSON CXIX. 

CBEB. — TO BELIE YE. 



Creio, ores, ere ; -emos, -eis, -em. 
Cria, -fas, -ia; -famos, -feis, -fao. 
Cri, creste, creu. ; cremos, crestes, 

crerao. 
Crera, -as, -a, etc. Crerei, -as, -a. 
Creia, -as, -a, etc. Creria, -as, etc. 

Cresse, etc. 



Believe, believest, believes. 
Believed, was believing. 
Believed, did believe. 

Had believed, shall believe. 
May, should, might believe. 



Creio que sim. Creio que nao. Eu o creio. Eu se 
que ores. Creio bem. JNao o creio. Ciista-me a cre-lo. 
Quern o creria? Creio que nos podeoios levantar. Os 
Judeus nem criao em Christo nem a Christo. Crtio que 
e esta a causa. Crer em sonhos. Ninguem Ih'o cria. 
Eu lh'o creio. Para que creiao. Crede no Evangelho. 
Como me crereis. Se tu creres, veras a gloria. Nao o 
crestes. Podem cre-lo a Y. S. Crer em Christo e crer 
nelle ; crer a Christo e cre-lo a elle. Creu Abrahao a 
Deus. Eu cri, por isso fallei. Elles crerao na Escrip- 
tiira. 



I believe. He believes. I believe so. I don't believe 
it. I can't believe it. Who would believe that man ? I 
believe in the Supreme. In order that you may believe. 
He had not believed. He believed and spoke. To make 
themselves believed. He does not believe me. I do not 
believe him. Believing him. Having believed. If I 
should believe. That ye may believe. Many believed in 
his name. That many may believe. If thou believest, 
thou shalt see heaven. If he believes. I cannot believe 
what he says. Some believe too much, others too little. 
Believe me, it is not so. 



120 



LESSON CXX. 

DIZEK — TO SAY, TELL, AXD COMPOUNDS. 



Digo, -dizes, -diz ; -emos, -eis. 

-em. 
Dizia, -fas, -fa ; famos, -feis, -lao. 
Disse, disseste, disse; -emos, 

-estes, -erao. 
Dissera, -as, -a. Direi, -as, -a, etc. 
Diga, etc. Diria, etc. Dissesse. 
Dize, ei; se disser; dizendo, dito. 



I say, sayest, says. 

Said, was saying. 
Said, did say. 

Had said. Shall say. 
May, should, might say. 
Say ; if I say ; saying, said. 



Digo que sim. Digo que nao. A lei diz. Nao digo 
rnenos d'isso. Diz-se. Nao sei o que dizes. Diziao isto 
os Judeus. ■ Os homens lhe disserdo. Disse lhe Martha. 
Dissemos. Elle diria. Pode crer o que lhe eu digo. Dis~ 
serao-m'o. Todos o dizem. Quern lh'o disse. Os gestos 
condiziam com a pessoa. Nao e necessario dize-\o agora. 
Niuguem diga. Tornou pois elle a dizer-lhes. Nao lhe 
diga isso. Eu lhe direi. Diga-lhe que entre. Dir-\he- 
hei. Quer dizer. Que querem dizer estas palavras ? 
Muito ha que dizer. Para melhor dizer. 



I say so. I don't sag so. It is said. Everybody 
sags so. What do you sag ? Did he tell it you ? I 
heard sag. Who told you ? What did he sag to you ? 
I don't know what he sags. The women told him. Let 
no one sag. Did you sag that ? No, I did not sag it. 
To tell you the truth. Tell me frankly. I have just told 
you. This said, he went out. If he sags. Let no one 
sag. If they sag. Tell them to come in. I must tell 
you a story. If I might tell the truth. That is to sag. 
I don't understand what you sag. I shall sag. If I 
should sag. He began saging. 



121 
LESSON CXXI. 

EAZ^EB — DO, MAKE. 



Faco, fazes, faz; fazemos, -eia, -em. 
Fazia, -fas, -fa j faziamos, -eis, 

-ao. 
Fiz, fizeste, fez 5 fizemos, -estes, 

-erao. 
Fizera, -as, -a. Farei, -as, -a,- etc. 
Faca, -as, -a. Farm. Fizesse, etc. 
Se fizer, fazendo, feito. 



I make ; makest, make, 
Made, was making. 

Made, did make. 

Had made, shall make. 
May, should, might, make, 
If I make, making, made, 



'Na.ofdgo nada. Fdco esmolas. 'Nao/ape^caso dissa- 
Elle fdz^ guerra. Isso nao me fdz nada. Elle fazia a 
barba. Elle fez a cama. Fizera urn livro. Se eHeJlzer 
diividas, Jbao fdz-se velho. M Fdz hia, vento, calor, frio. 
O mendigo se fdz siirdo. Eu fazia~o por brincadeira, 
que esta feito esta feito. Fdga-me este favor, preco 
fdz-me medo. Fdr-me-hia, o favor. QraQfaremos? Fa- 
rm melhor se. . . Nao/iptf tal. Tdrna afazer sol. Fdz 
poeira. Desejo que fdca a sua fortiina. Ydga-lhe os 
meus comprhnentos. .Fa-lo-hei com prazer. Nao posso 
fazer isto. Teria feito isto. 



He yiv&« alms. "We £%m£ nothing of that. They 
make war. He shaves. She will m#&e the bed. Louisa 
grows old. John grows proud. Do me the favour to give 
me. ^STh.0 plays the part of Cato S The moon shines. I 
did it for fun. They would do better, if — He will do 
it with pleasure. The horse frightens me. Do nothing 
of the kind. They had a good voyage. Tour friend 
wrote a book. It is cold here. He does nothing. This 
story does not concern me. Let him do so. The beg- 
gar feigns himself blind, Doing, done, 



122 



LESSON CXXII. 

LEE, — TO READ. 



Leio, -les, -le ; lemos, ledes, leem. 
Lia, -fas, -fa ; iamos, -feis, -fao. 
Li, leste, leu; lemos, lestes, 

lerao. 
Lera, -as, -a. Lerei, -as, -a, etc. 
Leia, etc. Leria, etc. Lesse. 
Le. lede. Se eu ler. Se elles 

lessem. 
Lendo, lido. 



Read, readest, reads. 
Read, or was reading. 
Eead, or did read. 

Had — . Shall — . 

May, should, might. 

May ; if I read ; if they should 

read. 
Reading, read. 



Leio philosophia. Leriamos. Se eu ler. Se elles 
lessem. Como les tu ? Lemos. Leu o cartel ? V. S. 
nao le bem. A passagem que lia era esta. Le esse livro. 
Nao sei ler. Tomando o livro, leu. Elle tomou as cartas, 
e Zez^-as. Os propbetas que cada sabbado se leem. Lerds 
as palavras desta lei. Ler com seria attencao. Enten- 
des o que estas Undo ? Entenda o que le. Elles lerao 
no livro da lei, e o povo entendia quando se estava lendo. 
Leia devagar. Sei ler, escrever e contar. Depois de a 
ler. £u vos conjiiro que ledis esta carta. 



I read the classics. He reads philosophy. They are 
reading Byron. I was listening, when he was reading. 
I read the book yesterday. He has read it frequently. 
The papers are read every day. When you have done 
reading. Having read the letter. He received the let- 
ters and read them. What is he reading ? I advise you 
to read. The king ordered him to read the proclamation. 
Mead this beautiful letter. He must read slowly. If he 
reads well. Beading the letter. After reading it. These 
memoirs will be read and appreciated. 



Pdsso, pddes, pdde; podemos, 

podeis, pddem. 
Podia, -fas, -fa ; famos, -feis, -fao. 
Piide, deste, pode ; emos, estes, 

erao. 
Podera, -eras, -era, etc. Poderei, 

-eras, -era, etc. 
Pdssa. Poderia. Podesse. 
Se poder. 
Podendo, podido. 



123 
LESSON CXXIII. 

PODEE TO BE ABLE. 

Can, canst, can. 



Could, couldst, could. 
Could, couldst, could. 

Had been able, shall be able. 

May, could, might be able. 

If I can. 

Being able, been able. 



~Naopdsso soffreristo. Nao pdsso erer. ~Nslo pdsso mais. 
O pouco que pdsso. Nao lhe pdsso dizer. Agora nao 
pdsso. Pdde ser. ~N&o pdde ser. Elle nao pdde sair do 
quarto. Se tu queres, bem me pddes alimpar. Podeis vds 
beber o calix ? Como se pdde isto fazer ? Ja nao podia 
ver. Nao se pdde. Pdde ser que parta amanha. Nao ^?o- 
^m'« nega-lo, ainda quando quizesse. Ainda que tenha- 
mos podido ve-los. £lu nao lhe pude chamar. Nao pode- 
rds ver. Quero panno que se pdssa lavar. O mais de- 
pressa que poder. Sinto muito nao poder. Podera ! 



He cannot believe. "We cannot suffer this noise. All 
I can. I can't at present. It can't be. Can you eat fish ? 
The thief could not deny it. The old man could not see. 
He will not be able to write. I am sorry I can't. It 
can't be done. Can you let me see those letters ? CWyou 
give us supper here ? May I ask you if — My brother 
cannot leave his room. The lady could not hear. I shall 
be able to take it. If I could not. If I were able. Being 
able. Can one pass this way ? That cannot be the case. 
The thief could not deny the accusation. 



124 

LESSON CXXIV. 
QUEEEE*— to want, wish. 



Quero, queres, quer ; queremos, 

quereis, querem. 
Queria, -ias, -ia ; iamos, -fes,-iao. 
Quiz, estes, -is ; emos, estes, erao. 
Quizera, -as, -a. Quererei, -as, -a. 
Queira, quereria, quizesse. 

Se quizer, querendo, querido.* 



Want, wantest, wants. 

Was wanting. 

Wanted, did want. 

Had wanted, shall want. 

May want, should want, might 

want. 
If I want, wanting, wanted. 



Quero um cavallo. Que'ro-me ir deitar. Elle quer fal- 
lar a V. S. Que-Vas justas ? Que'ro-as bem justas. Quer 
fazer-me um favor ? Nao quer sentar-se ? Que'r-me es- 
covar a casaca? Que papel quer V. S.? Quizera uns 
sapatos. Murmurem quanto quizerem. Quizera ter um 
exemplar de Camoes. Seja como quizer. Quizera que 
Y.M. me trocasse os oculos. Quanto quer por elle ? 
Queria comprar panno. Quereria antes que fosse verde. 
Dar-lhe-hei outro, se quizer. Pode vir quando quizer. 
Se ellas quizerem vir com-ndsco. Como quizer. 



I want a glass. He ivants to go to bed. The boy at 
the door wishes to speak to you. Will you do me a ser- 
vice ? Do you wish me to bring the horse ? What book 
do you want ? I should like to have a cup of tea. How 
much do you want for the book ? As you please. I will 
give you this, if you like. I should prefer it green. If 
the boys wish to go to Lisbon. He ivill not stay. Do 
you want beer ? I should like to go, if you would take 
me. I should like you to bring my books. He prefers 
the blue cloth. They may come, when they like. 

* " Querer" sometimes means " to love," and so " querido" sig- 
nifies " dear," or " beloved." 



125 



LESSON CXXV. 
REQUEUES — to require, demand. 

Require, requirest, requires. 
Required, was requiring. 
Required, did require. 
Had required, shall require. 
May, should, might require. 



Requeiro, requeres, requer ; 

emos, -eis, -em. 
Requeria, -fas, -fa; famos, -feis, 

-fao. 
Requeri, -este, -eu ; emos, estes, 

erao. 
Requerera, -as, -a. Requererei, 



Requeira, -as, -a. Requererfa, etc. 



Requeiro o meu direito. INao requeiro o pagamento. 
homem requer de seu amigo iim favor. Esta doenca 
requer grande cuidado. Esta empresa requer mtiita pru- 
dencia. Eu requererei a vida do homem da mao do ho- 
mem. Tiido o que se furtasse, de mim o requererias. 
Requererei as vossas primicias. Eis-ahi se requer de nds 
o seu sangue. Quern requereu estas cousas de vossas 
maos ? JNao requer a lei para mestres de escola hdmens 
de engenho superior. Segundo requer em as circunstancias. 
Os advogados requerem em favor dos clientes. 



I demand justice. He does not require payment to-, 
day. The boy accuses the men of theft. These diseases 
require great care and attention. Who has required this 
money r To demand tribute. Looking for materials. 
Such an undertaking would require the greatest skill. 
As the necessity of the case may require. If I demand 
the money. Exacted by superior authority. Demanding 
from the magistrate what is dne to him. She demanded 
from the king what was due to her. This undertaking 
demands great perseverance. I demand payment imme- 
diately. 



126 



LESSON CXXYI. 
SABEEr— to kxow. 



Sei, sabes, sabe ; -emos, -eis, -em. 
Sabia, -fas, -fa ; -famos, -feis, -iao. 
Soube, -este, -e ; emos, estes, eriio. 
Soubera, -as, -a. Saberei, -as, -a. 
Saiba, etc. Saberia, etc. Sou- 

besse, etc. 
Se souber. Sabendo. Sabido. 



Know, knowest, knows. 
Knew, knewest. 
Knew, did know. 
Had known, sball know. 
May, should, might know. 

If I know ; knowing, known. 



Nao sei quasi nada. Sei ler. Sei fazer vestidos, 
Ja se sabe. Com o tempo tudo se sabe. Sdbe montar a 
cavallo ? Nao sei. Sabe que horas sao ? Sdbe Deus. 
Elle soube-o. P6de-se saber? Elle bem sabe o que faz. 
]S T ao sdbe o seu papel. Nao que eu saiba. Elle uao sabia 
d'oude lhe viera. Dizemos o que sabemas. jSTao ha nin- 
guem que o nao sa'i&«. Para sabermoso tempo. You tocar 
para saber. Para que saiba. Para que soabesses que — 
Sem eu o saber. Sem elles o saberern. Se eu souber de 
certo. Se o pai de familia soubesse. 



I know it. I don't know. I know nothing new. I 
knew nothing of this. Not that I know of. I don't 
know the truth. He can swim. Can he ride ? Can you 
speak English ? I did not know that she was ill. It is 
not known. Do you know were Mr. S. lives ? Do you 
know what o'clock it is ? We knew. I shall ring to 
know if breakfast is ready. Without his knowing it. 
He says what he knows. If he knew it exactly. He does 
not know what you mean. Without our knowing it. 
If Henry had known. Every one knows. Not knowing 
the law. Let it be known. I should have told you, if I 
had known. 



127 



LESSON CXXVIL 

TEAZER — TO BEING, EEAB, FETCH. 
Bring, bringest, brings, 



Trago, trazes, traz ; trazemos, 

trazeis, trazem. 
Trazia, -fas, -fa ; -famos, -feis, -iao. 
Trouxe, -este, -e; -emos, -estes, 

-erao. 
Trouxera, -as, -a. Trarei, -as, -a, 

etc. 
Traga, -as, -a. Traria, -as, -a, -etc. 

Se trouser, trazendo, trazido. 



Was bringing. 
Brought, did bring. 

Had brought, shall bring. 

May bring, should bring, might 
bring. 
j If I bring ; bringing ; brought. 



Trdgo isto na memoria. Eaca-a como agora se trazem. 
Que accusacao trazeis ? Traz fazendas prohibidas ? 
Trdga-me. Este vento traz ch&va. Trouxerdo os ramos, 
Trazei "dma pouca d'agua. O auctor trouxe muitos ex- 
empios. Henrique trazia sua descendeneia dos G-ddos, 
Importa que eu as traga. Edi elle e trouxe-o. Vendo o 
cestinho, mandou lima das criadas trazer-W^o. Tragdmos 
a Area, Quando os tiver trazido dois dias. Trdga-110- 
lo. Trouxe tiido ? Trazendo no bico urn ramo, Trdze- 
m'o para comer. Trazei-me ca vosso irmao, 



He hears that in mind, Make my trousers as they 
are now worn. The man was carrying contraband goods. 
That wind will bring rain. The orator or ought forward 
examples. He brought them to Adam, Bring me hot 
water. Bring us some wine. He went and brought them. 
If I do not bring him, I will pay you 50 dollars. He 
will not bring an accusation. Has he brought the wine ? 
I ordered him to bring the basket. He must bring the 
books. Let us fetch the water. Bring it to me to drink, 
Bearing laurel. Tell him to bring the horse. 



128 



LESSON CXXVIII. 

YALEK TO BE WOKTH, AVAIL. 



Valho, vales, vale ou val ; vale- 

mos, -eis, -em. 
Valia, -fas, -fa ; -famos, -feis, -fao. 
Vali, -este, -eu ; -emos, -estes, 

-erao. 
Valera, -as, -a. Valerei, -as, -a, 

etc. 
Valha, -as. Valeria. Valesse, etc. 

Se valer, valendo, valido. 



Am worth, art — , is — , are — , 

etc. 
Was — , wast — , was — . 
Was — , wast — , was — . 

Had been — . Shall be — . 

May be — . Should be — . Might 

be—. 
If I be — . Being — . Been — . 



O saber nao vale na praca. Vale mais. Valia o vi- 
nho muito. Nao vdlem cem prazeres um dos seus des- 
gostos. A terra vale 400 siclos de prata. Pelo preco 
que ella vale. Vdlha-me Deus ! Nao vale a pena. Elles 
se valido dos meios. Tanto vales quanto has. Valer-se 
do frio. Devemos valer aos desgra9ados. Yaleu-me neste 
aperto. Se o negocio valia a pena. Valei-me aos des- 
maios. Mais valeis vos que miiitos passaros. A minha 
penna nao vale nada. Valer-se de todos os meios. Vale 
mais um passaro na mao do que dois yoando. 



Wit won't sell in the streets. Wine is valuable now. 
What is that bit of land worth ? Better late than never. 
Wine is worth a great deal now. It is not worth while 
to go to bed. These excuses are worth nothing. It is 
really good for nothing. I avail myself of my friend. It 
would be worth a large sum of money. The house was 
worth more than the garden. Blankets to protect us 
from cold. These peaches are valueless. It ivill be valu- 
able. I avail myself of all the means. It is better. If 
the profit is worth the labour. That old house is not 
worth a sovereign. 



129 



LESSON CXXIX. 

VER — TO SEE. 



Vejo, ves, ve ; vemos, vedes, veem. 
Via, vias, via ; viamos, vfeis, viao. 
Vi, viste, viu ; vimos, vistes, virao. 
Vira, as, a, etc. Verei, as, a, etc. 
Veja, as, a, etc. Yeria, as, a, etc. 

Visse, etc. 
Se vir ; vendo, visto. Ye, vede. 



See, seest, sees. 

Was seeing. 

Saw, etc. 

Had seen. Shall see. 

May see. Should see. Might 

see. 
If I see ; seeing, seen. See. 



Vejo homens. Tu o viste. En o vi. Elles virao as 
obras. Nunca vi. Pelo que vejo. Como ve agora ? Nao 
ha quern o veja. Sem ver ninguem. Vi "dma luz. Ja se 
ve. Tu creste porque me viste. Logo que eu tiver visto. 
Vamos vendo. Viu-se niinca cousa similhante ? Veja- 
mos. Creio que foi ver a irma. Visto* a escassez de 
cereaes. Ella ha de eytimar muito ve-\o. A meu ver. 
Pode verse hoje o museu ? Desejo «;e-los antes de par- 
tir. Veja se esta em casa. Se eu o tivesse visto. Tenho- 
o visto passeiar. Ter o gosto de ver. Yai ver mundo. 



I see the houses. He sees me. In order to see the 
city. I have not seen the city. So far as I see, he is 
honest. How did you see? Without my seeing it. 
"Without their seeing me. As soon as I have seen him, 
I shall go home. They saw him writing. They went to 
see the world. I shall see him. We must see them, be- 
fore we leave. Look at my hand. If I see him not, I 
shall not go. I saw the queen. Can the church he seen 
to-day ? Gro and see. I believe the countess has gone 
to see her son. I shall see them to-morrow. To have 
seen. 



Visto" in the sense of "seeing" or " in consequence of." 



130 
LESSON" CXXX. 

IREEGTJLAE TERBS IN IE. 

1. Oir changes g mioj in first pers. sing. pres. ind.; fug£r, ftijo. 

2. Chrir drops the u, as distinguir, distingo. 

3. 1? in the penultimate often becomes i ; sentrr, sinto. 

4. Dormir makes durmo; pedir, pego; ouvir, ouqo ; medir, meqo. 



Distingo facilmente a differenca. Consigo o meu in- 
tento. Persigo o inimigo. Nao prosigo o argumento. 
fiu o sigo, Siga-me. Dirijo a educacao d'este menino. 
Exijo pagamento todas as semanas. Fiijo da tentacao. 
Sinto muito. Assinto as condicoes. Consinto em fazer o 
que me propoe. Dissinto da opiniao da maioria. Pre- 
sinto os perigos. Nao confiro o titulo. Desfiro a es- 
pada. Nao/m? ninguem. Sempre prefiro o cafe, ite- 
/iro este phenomeno a mesma causa. Transfiro a leitura 
para aruanha. rei que eu sirvo. 



I do not distinguish colours. Dress me, if you please. 
I follow them easily. I attain (conseguir) the same re- 
sult. I follow (perseguir) the chase. I prosecute the 
enterprise. I do not assent to the terms. I consent 
with reluctance. I dissent from the opinions of the 
chamber. I foresee violent revolutions. I confer the 
bishopric on his sod. I unfurl the sails. I strike him 
on the head. I prefer tea to coffee. I refer this effect 
to its true cause. I postpone (transferir) the meeting 
till Monday. The Queen whom I serve is Victoria. I 
warn the boys of the danger. I turn this water into 
steam. I divert the youth from bis studies. He says 
that I pervert the sense. I do not subvert anything. 



131 
LESSON CXXXI. 

IEEEGTTLAE TEEES IK IE. 

Those having u before b, d, g, 1, m, p, s, in the infinitive, change u 
into o in the second and third, pers. sing, and in the third plur. 
prescind.; also in the second pers. sing, of imper. : as acudir, anstver, 
help ; bulfr, move ; cuspir, spit ; consumir, consume ; construfr, 
' build; destrufr, destroy ; engulir, swallow ; fugir, flee ; saeudir 
shake ; sumir, lose ; tossir, cough ; subir, mount, rise. 



O navio acode ao leme. Acodes a Joao. Os cavallos 
acodem a espora. Acode tu com a respdsta. O vento 
bole nos arvoredos. Nao buldmos n'isso. As folhas bd- 
lem com vento. A capa cospe a chiiva. O homem cospe 
miiito. As niivens cospem raios. Uns consomem as noites 
em estudos. O fogo consome a lenha. O imperador 
construe palacios e templos. tJma onda engole a nau. 
Estes pobres engolem todas as affrontas. s F6ge o tempo. 
Tu. foges a biz. O pe mefoge. Ella foge de mim. Os 
cavallos fogem. As tempestades sacodem as grandes 
arvores. 



The horse answers the spur. Thou helpest Antonio. 
Answer the bell quickly. The breeze shakes the leaves. 
Tell him not to move in that affair. The cloud gives 
forth rain. He spits all day, and coughs all night. The 
philosopher consumes his nights in labour. The fire con- 
sumes all things. The engineer constructs new fortresses. 
The spendthrift consumes (engulir) all his capital. He 
flees from the field of battle. They flee from dangers. 
Time flies rapidly. He shakes the branches of the tree. 
The horses shake off the riders. The moon sets. The 
soldier mounts the ladder. The sailors mount the mast, 
An idea comes into (subir) my mind. 



132 



LESSON CXXXII. 
CONDTJZlR— conduct, conduce— INDUZlR, etc. 

Conduce, conducest, conduces. 



Condiizo, condtizes, conduz ; con- 

duzimos, conduzis, conduzem. 
Conduzia, -fas, -ia; -laraos, -feis, 

-lao. 
Conduzi, -iste, -iu ; -imos, -istes, 

-frao- 
Concluzi'ra, -iras, -ira, etc. Con- 

duzirei -as, -a, etc. 



Conduced, was conducing. 
Conduced, did conduce. 
Had conduced, shall conduce. 



O piloto conduz o navfo ao porto. A dieta conduz 
nniito para a boa saude. Elle me induziu a deixar a 
casa. A Africa produz elephantes. ^ A fome reduziu os 
cercados a se darem ao inimigo. Elle induzira o rapaz 
em erro. Segredos perpetuos indiizem suspeita. Se elle 
introdnzir est» moda. A velhice nos reduz a meninos. 
Traduzido. Um traidor guia poz-nos um atalho para 
conduztr-nos a sitio onde estava o inimigo emboscado. 
Esta reduzido a mendicidade. A molestia ameaca reduzir- 
vos a miseria. 



I shall lead the ship into port. Repose conduces to 
recovery. The boy induced his friend to steal. The island 
produces rich fruits. I shall translate this work into 
Portuguese. His singular conduct excited the suspicion 
of his friends. The man will be reduced to misery in his 
old age. A terrible earthquake had reduced the castle to 
ruins. The volume is translated The guide led the 
soldiers into an ambuscade. Hunger will make the enemy 
surrender. The countess should introduce the fashion. 
Old age reduced him to childhood. Reduced to obedience. 



133 



LESSON CXXXIII. 

IE — TO GO. 



Vou, vais, vai; vamos, ides, vao. 
la, fas, ia ; iamos, feis, fao. 
Fiii, foste, foi ; fomos, fostes, 

-ram. 
Fora, as, a. Irei, iras, ira, etc. 
Va, as, a. Iria, as, a. Fosse. 
Se for, indo, ido. 



G-o, goest, goes. 
Was going. 
Went, did go. 

Had gone. Shall go. 

May go, should go. might go. 

If I go, going : e-or 



gone. 



Eu vou, senhor. Para onde vds ? Vou pesa-la. Vou 
mostrar-lhe. Elle vdi ao campo. Ella vdi para casa. 
Vdmos para nossa casa. Vdmos a casa de Deus. Yd ver 
que in e. Ja sefoi elle ? Vdmos. Elle ia adiante delles. 
Nao iremos pelos campos. Vdi com elles. Vase. Ao 
tempo que eilas ido. Vdi-te. Vase embora. ~Va. Queres 
ir com este homem ? Irei. O rei vos nao ha de deixar 
ir. Nos havemos de ir. Se vieres comigo, irei. Ide, 
dai as novas a meus irmaos para que vao a Galilea. E/oi 
com elle Simeao. Aonde fostes ? Nao vds la. 



I am going. Go and see who it is. Go and open the 
door. When are you go ing ? I have to go. They will not go. 
The fire does not burn well. They went home. Go away. 
I shall go to-morrow. They are going to build a bridge. 
"Will you go ? I will go. He is going to the theatre. 
He must go. Where does the steamer go ? Do not go so 
fast. We went immediately. Let us go down directly. Shall 
we go before dinner ? They ivould go, if they could. They 
have gone. It is time to go to bed. I am going to show 
you my watch. He ordered him to go. The governor 
will let you go. Let us go and bathe in the sea. 



134 



LESSON CXXXIV. 



PEDlE- 

Peco, pedes, pede ; pedimos, 

pedis, pedem. 
Pedia, -ias, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, -iao. 
Pedi, -iste, -fu; -imos, -istes, 

-irao. 
Pedira, -as, -a. Pedirei, -as, -a, etc. 
Pe^a. Pediria. Pedisse. 
Se pedir, pedindo, pedido. 



-TO ASK. 
Ask, askest, asks. 

Asked, was asking. 
Asked, did ask. 

Had asked ; shall ask. 
May, should, might ask. 
If I ask ; asking ; asked. 



Pego-lhe que se assente. Peco perdao. Peco-\\iQ por 
favor. Pe'co-lhe que demore alguns dias. Peco-Yhe mil 
perdoes. Este negocio pe de prudencia. Pedimos o que 
se nos deve. Pedi, e dar-se-ha. Todo o que pede, re- 
cebe. Se seu filho lhe pedir pao. Elle lhe proinetteu 
que lhe daria tiido o que lhe pedisse. INao sabeis o que 
pedis. Pe'ca-a. com fe. Ate agora nao pedistes nada. 
Pediu-me o desculpasse pela sua conducta. Nao ha mais 
que pedir. O pai dara bens aos que lh'os pedir em. 
Pedindo-lhe alguma cousa. 



I heg you will not stay. He legs pardon. He asks 
him for what is due. This business demands caution. 
If the girl asks him for a book, he will give it her. He 
promises that he will give all she asks. Peter will ask 
them for it. He does not know what he asks. There is 
nothing more to be desired. Ask it of the king, and 
he will give it to you. He asks a favour of us now. He 
said, I heg pardon. Will you ask him for it ? He gives 
to those that will ask. Asking. Haviug asked. If I 
should ask. They may beg pardon, He will not ask. 



135 

LESSON" CXXXY. 

RIB, — TO LAUGH. 



Rao, ris, ri ; rimos, rides, rieni. 
Ria, as, a ; iamos, feis, fao. 
Ri, risfce, riu ; imos, istes, irao. 
Rira, as, a. Rirei, as, a. 
Ria. Riria. Risse* 
Se rir, rindo, rido. 



Laugh, laughest, lauglis. 
Laughed, was laughing. 
Laughed, did laugh. 
Had laughed- Shall laugh. 
May laugh; should; might. 
If I laugh ; laughing ; laughed. 



ILlle se pode rir da vinganca. Joao afogou-se de rir. 
Rimos ate alta noite. Como os padres de S. Roque hao 
de Wr-se ! A clara jioite se lhe ri. Democrito de tudo 
ria. Se elle rir. Elles rirao. Por que se riu elle ? O 
que tendo ouvido Sara, se poz a rir. $u nao me ri. 
Porque, tu riste-te ? Abrahao riu-se. Yds vos rireis. 
A primavera esta rindo nos jardins. As rosas se vem 
rindo delicidsas. Ha tempo de chorar e tempo^ de rir. 
Ou se agaste, ou se ria, nao achara descanco. IJma voz 
que bradava e ria. 



He laughs continually. Laughing and talking. How 
he will laugh at the story ! If he laughs to-day, he will 
cry to-morrow. The flowers were smiling in the gardens. 
Two years ago, I should have laughed with the rest. 
Why do you laugh so immoderately? The little boy, 
smiling, said to his mother, " I cannot help laughing." 
When I heard that, I began to laugh. Your old friend 
laughs at everything. If I had seen him, I should not 
have laughed. We were laughing^ when he came in. I 
shall laugh at you. I do not laugh. They were smiling. 



136 



LESSON CXXXYI. 
SAHIK, or SAIB — to go out, be like. 

Go out, goest out, goes out. 



Saio, sais or saes, sai or sae ; 

safinos, sais, saem. 
Saia, -fas, -fa ; -famos, -ieis, -fao. 
Sai, -iste, -m ; -fmos, -istes, -irao. 
Saira. Sairei. 
Saia, Sairia. Saisse. 



Was going out. 
Went out, did go out. 
Had gone out. Shall go out. 
May — . Should — , Might- 



Se sair. Saindo. Saido. I If I — . Going — . Gone. 



Saio da escola. Muitas rezes o vi sair. Sde a seu 
pai. Os signaes que no ceo saem. Saia o sol sobre a 
terra. Nao saireis das portas. Ao sair do sol. Lazaro 
sde para fora. Acaba de sair. Sae da area. Saiu pois 
]S"oe. Sairao todos os animaes. Eu sairei com meu pai. 
Saidmos fora ao campo. Logo que o rapaz se foi, saiu 
David do logar onde estava. Sairao da barca. Elle or- 
deuou que todos saissem. Dize-lhe que deixe sair os 
filhos. Depois disto sairemos. Ao sair. Elle saiu, e foi 
a um logar deserto. 



He comes out of school at 4. They go out every day. 
At the rising of the moon. Come forth. Mr. S. has just 
gone out. Then John ivent out. He will go out with his 
father. The queen ordered all to go out. We shall not 
go out. Both having gone out. He is like his mother. 
As soon as he had gone out from the presence of the king. 
Without their leaving the house. As soon as the young 
man had left the presence of the emperor. My friend 
having gone out, I must stay in the house. As soon as 
the boy had gone, I went out of the room. 



137 



LESSON CXXXVIL 

SERYIR— TO SERVE. 



Sirvo, serves, serve ; servimos, 

servis, servem. 
Servia, -ias, -ia; -iamos, -ieis, -iao. 
Servi, -iste, -iu; -imos, -istes, -irao. 
Servira, -as, -a. Servirei, -as, -a. 
Sirva. Serviria. Servisse, 
Se servir, servindo, servido. 



Serve, servest, serves. 

Was serving. 

Served, did serve. 

Had served. Shall serve, [serve. 

May serve. Should serve. Might 

If I serve ; serving, served. 



Dens de queni sou, e a quern sirvo. Deus a quern tu 
serves. Jacob serviu sete annos. Eu sirvo a lei. Se al- 
guem me serve, siga-me. O mais velho servira ao mais 
mo90. Os servos o servirao. Sirva-se de mini sera ce- 
remonia. Quer que lhe sirva um pouco ? ^De que serve 
isso ? Desejo servir os meus amigos. Elle serviu na 
guerra. Sei servir a mesa. Atrevo-me a pedir a Y. S. 
que se sirva conceder-me um momento. Poderei servir 
de secretario. IJma mesa bem servida. Espera que o 
Sr. K. se servira perdoar-lhe esta importunidade. 



The king whom I serve. Henry served four years in 
the army. If any one will serve me, let him follow me. 
Thou knowest how I served thee. I am very glad to have 
an opportunity of serving you. I hope that you may 
serve me well. The lad can wait at table. I shall serve 
as guide. I hope you will deign to grant me five 
minutes' audience. I have served him four years. The 
table of your friend is well served. Make use of me, 
when you please. If he serves. Your brother is serving 
in the Crimea. I am always happy to serve my friends. 



Subo, sdbes,sobe; subimos, subis. 

sdbem. 

Subia, fas, ia ; lamos, ieis, fao. 
Subi, iste, m ; fmos, istes, irao. 
Subira, as, a. Subirei, as, a, etc, 
Suba, as, a, etc. Subiria, etc 

Subisse, etc. 
Se subir, subindo, subido. 



138 
LESSON CXXXVIII. 

SUBIR— TO GO UP, EAISE. 

Go up ; goest up, goes up. 



Was going up. 

Went up, did go up. 

Had gone up. Shall go up. 

May — . Should — . Might. 

If I — . Going — . Gone — . 



Subia-lhe a cor a face. A liia sobe, e o sol desce. O 
vinho sobe a cabeca. Subia o fumo. Subindo pelo Tejo 
acima. JNao subiu ao piilpito. Jorge Quarto subiu ao 
throno em 1820. Subiu a urn monte. O niarinheiro su- 
biu ao topo do mastro. Q.uer subira esta arvore ? O 
globo subiu ao ar. Subiu-\he ao coracao o desejo de rei- 
nar. Subirei, ao ceo. Subiste ao alto. TTma fera que 
sobe do abysmo. Os anjos subindo e descendo. Gruardae- 
vos de subir ao monte. Subirei. Nao siiba todo o povo. 
Se disserem : u Subi para ca," subamos. 



I go up tbe ladder. They go up the steps. He teas 
mounting the hill. The colour mounts into my face. The 
sun was rising. That brandy gets into my head. The 
smoke will ascend. Going up the river. The preacher 
had not mounted the pulpit. The Emperor Alexander II. 
came to the throne this year. I shall climb the tree. 
Corn rises in price every day. The wine does not amount 
to more than a dollar a bottle. The king raised the 
general to the highest dignities. The soldier will mount 
the wall. Fortune raises some, and lowers others. An 
idea arose in my mind. He rises daily in public esteem. 



139 



Venho, vens, vem ; vimos, vin- 

des, vem. 
Yinha, -as, -a ; -amos, -eis, -ao. 
Vim, vieste, veio ; viemos, viestes, 

vierao. 
Viera, -as, -a. Virei, -as, -a, etc. 
Venha, -as, -a. Viria. Viesse, 

ect. 
Se vier, vmdo, vido. 



LESSON CXXXIX. 

YIB, — TO COME. 

Come, comest, comes. 



Was coming. 
Came, did come. 

Had come. Shall come. 

May come. Should come. 

Might come. 
If I come ; coming ; come. 



Venho da^igreja. E certo que vem. Vem bem a tempo. 
D'onde vem V. S.f vento vem deste lado. ~N6s vimos 
can9ados. Yds vindes. Jiilgo que vird. Dizem que veio. 
Elle disse que viria. Na semana que vem. Venha ca. 
Nao duvida que venha. Temo que nao venha. Gdsto que 
viesse. Em vmdo a primavera. Temo que nao viesse. 
Vem a saber-se. Eu soube que elle viera. Duvidei se 
elle viria. Quando vier o inverno. Vindo a noite. Du- 
vido se tera vindo. Logo que vier. Se alguem vier, di- 
ga-lhe. ]STds a veremos, se elle vier. Vierao todos. 



He comes from town. It is not certain that he comes. 
The man came in time. The rain comes from the south. 
I think she will come. They came to words. They say 
the Duke came yesterday. They said that they would 
come. I don't doubt his coming. I fear the post will 
not come in time. Tell him to come. They would like 
him to come. He vjill come to-morrow. Next month. 
They came yesterday. Will you come witb me ? I came 
by the steamer. When they come, I will pay them. 
Letters came by the steamer. I shall see them, if they 
come in time. 



140 
LESSON CXL. 

PEESEFT PARTICIPLES.* 



Nao podendo viver. 

Ecitdndo expressoes baixas. 

A sua cabega naddndo em sau- 

As ovelhas andao saltdndo. 



Not being able to lire. 
Avoiding low expression!?. 
His head swimming in blood. 

The sheep went leaping. 



Tratdndo-me pelo meu n6me. ] Addressing me by name. 
Promettendo-lkes rfcas offertas. | Promising them rich gifts. 



Escrevendo a algum amigo. Communicdndo-lla' os. Os 
zephiros respirdndo brandamente. As mulheres estao 
sthnpre ou jtdndo, ou fazendo debiixos para as borda- 
diiras, ou dobrdndo ricas sedas. Cupido, batendo as azas, 
andava vodndo a roda da mai. Encontrdndo-os nas rnar- 
gens do Douro. Alfonso, sabendo da vinda de Iiisuf mar- 
chou a encontra-lo. As vantagens que obteria invadindo 
aquella provincia. Pedindo perdao ao ceo. Tomdndo a 
mao. Ficou imniovel olhdndo para o anciao. Levdndo 
a taca. 



Regulating the administration, and distributing justice. 
Carrying the terror of its arms. Leaving this province 
subdued. Saying these words. Doing this. Eolloicing 
the windings of the stream. Making due allowance for, 
etc. liaising the glass to the lips. The porter went run- 
ning to the cell. Finding him assassinated. He passed 
hours and hours praying. In writing this book. Gaining 
time. Hindering him from returning (subj.). Hearing 
this name. Entering the house. Opening the door. The 
man, knowing the arrival of the steamer. 

* Undergo no inflection. 



141 
LESSON CXLI. 

PAST PARTICIPLES. # 



Meu amddo Telemaco. 

A eriabarca9ao ja concluida. 

Antes cle subjugddos. 

Depois de subniettida a cidade. 

A victoria obtida pelo rei. 

Veneido, pediu e obteve a paz. 



My beloved Telemacus. 
The vessel already finished. 
Before being subdued. 
After the city's submission. 
The victory obtained by the king. 
Conquered, he asked and ob- 
tained peace. 



A boca meio aberta como que queria acabar a palavra 
comecdda. TJma ilha cercdda de mar. Tendo elle assim 
fallddo. TJma guerra felizmente termindda. Lopes se 
viu constrangido a ir buscar urn asylo. Cartas assignddas 
pelo imperador. exercito capitaneddo por Pellissier. 
O 111690 Scipiao, chamddo depois o Africano. Os Beberes, 
antes de subjugddos pelos Arabes, seguiao diversas reli- 
gioes. Ordonho, carregddo de despojos, voltou a Leao. 
Os filhos do Teifallecido. Urn acontecimento inesperddo. 
Tochas accesas. 



Sebastopol surrounded by the sea. My dear friends. 
In spite of being well garrisoned. The hill known by the 
name of " Mamelon vert." The fleets laden with the 
spoils of the world. Aivake, with my eyes open, I saw 
Lopes blood-stained. Actuated by opposite feelings. Be- 
fore the suppression of the monastery. With his mouth 
half opened, he stood before the king. The conqueror, 
laden with spoils, returned to Lisbon. Conquered, he 
evacuated the town. The oration being concluded. He 
read the proclamation signed by the emperor. 

* When used actively as part of a compound tense, they undergo 
no inflection. (See p. 143.) Used passively, or after the verb " to be," 
or as adjectives, they agree hi gender and number with the noun to 
which they refer. 

t Observe this singular idiom. 



142 
LESSON CXLII. 

FOEM LIKE ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 



Chegddo o tempo. 
Consultddos os capitaes. 
Tomddas as redeas. 
Passddos tres annos. 
FaJtdndo-lhe as fdrcas. 
Ditas estas cousas. 



The time being come. 
The captains being asked. 
The reins being taken. 
Three years afterwards. 
His strength failing. 
These tilings being said. 



Concluida esta expedite Sabida esta resposta. 
Morta uma parte da guarnicao, e captiva outra, a for- 
taleza foi reduzida a um montao de ruinas. Obtidas 
novas vantagens, voltou a Cordova. Acdbddas as provas 
piiblicas, etc. Acabdda a caedda, voltarao ambos. Paci- 
Jicddo e ordenddo tudo, preparou-se para a guerra. Pas- 
sddos quatro annos, elle voltou a Hispanha. Feita esta 
oracao mental, o bom do chanceller apagou as duas tochas. 
Tomdda a resolucao de que fallei. Passddos alguns dias. 
Basgddos os vestidos. Tomdda a fortaleza. 



Toledo being taken, all the chief towns fell into the 
hands of the Saracens. Having taken the reins of go- 
vernment. This answer being known, the town surren- 
dered. Some months having passed. The revolution 
ended, society breathes again. That done, I shall return. 
Which being heard, Joseph wept. Dinner ordered 
one day. At last, after four days, we left Semis. His 
clothes being torn in the battle, he fled naked from the 
field. New victories being gained, he mounted the 
throne. The war being finished, the army came home. 



143 
LESSOK CXLIII. 

PARTICIPLES USED ACTIVELY. 



Acreditddo,* agradecido. 
Cangddo, confiddo 
Hdmem cangddo. 
Esquecido, experimentado. 
Divertido, suffocado. 
Feito isto, acabada a ceia. 



Having believed, thanked. 
Having tired, trusted. 
A man who tires others. 
Forgetful, experienced. 
Amusing, suffocating. 
Having done this, supper ended. 



Ammo agradecido, Palavras agradecidas. Hdmem 
atrevido no inar. O soldado arriscddo, Urn homem ca- 
lado. As cangddas esckd&s. F}lle, conhecido da sua culpa, 
Homem consider ado no que faz, Muito forte e deter mi- 
nddo a soffrer. Urn genio dissimulddo. O seu amigo e 
homem bem entendido. As jingidas gentes. Elleserao 
lidos e versados nas Eseritiiras. Um animo ousddo. E 
tb&oparecido com seu pae. E presumido da sua sciencia. 
A idade vai-me fazendo esquecido. Durante boras esque- 



A grateful souL A soldier daring in battle. The 
man that tires. The sailor rushing into danger. The 
fatiguing march. They, aware of their faults. This is a 
man who considers things. Determined to die, he left the 
house. A spirit prone to deceive. He has a daring mind. 
She is like her mother. An amusing piece. These suffo- 
cating nights of summer. The word of an experienced 
man. A well-read man. The new comedy is very 
amusing. Tried fidelity. Words thanking. He was a 
silent man, but a daring soldier. She is very like her 
father. 

* Many of these adjectives are used both actively and passively, 
e.g., " Homem cangddo" might mean a tired man, or a tiresome man. 

f " Saving done this," is often rendered passively, as if " This 
being done." 



144 
LESSON CXLIY. 

PARTICIPLES USED PASSIVELY. 



Urn homem ferido. 

Uma muXhcrfertda. 

llomens fertdo.s,mu\]ieresferidas. 

Os soldados que tenho aqui fert- 

dos.* 
Os soldados que tenho ferido.* 
Acredifddo, agradecido. 
Cangddo, conjiddo. 



A wounded man. 

A wounded woman. 

Wounded men, wounded women. 

The icounded soldiers I have here. 

The soldiers I have wounded. 
Being believed, thanked. 
Being tired, bold. 



Logar povoddo. Campos semeddos. O beneficio 
agradecido. Uma empresa arriscdda. Uma noite caldda. 
Eecebi uma resposta determindda. Uma mdrte dissimu- 
lada. Uma obra bem entendlda. Lagrimas fngidas. 
Uma esposa rica e bem parecida. territorio cercddo 
pelo oceano. A porcao liabitdda pelos Celticos. As for- 
cas capitaneddas por Scipiao, chamddo depois o Africano. 
Deixando suhjugdda esta provincia. A adiantdda con- 
quista. Um illimitddo poder. resultddo d'isto. Os 
proscriptos. So os eruditos sabiao. 



Populous places. Kindnesses appreciated. A hold 
undertaking. A silent wood. He sent me a decisive reply. 
A feigned illness. A building well planned. Situated on 
the verge of Europe and defended by the Pyrenees. Beasts 
accustomed to carnage. The facts contained in this letter. 
He returned, accompanied by a friend, a person already 
Icnoivn to the reader. The rector half asleep. The inha- 
bitants tired of suffering. A battle gained. Persons re- 
puted happy. The emperor has unlimited power. Be 
kind enough to send a definite answer. 

* The great difference is produced by ferido,? agreeing with sol- 
dados. The Portuguese does not follow the French syntax in such 
forms as "La lettre quej'ai ecrife." 



145 



LESSON CXLY. 



PARTICIPLES WITH TER E HAVEE. 



Tenho ouvzdo fallar de — 
Depois cle o termos comprddo. 
Tenho escripto lima carta. 
Os soldados que tenho ferido.* 
Tern cahido muita chuva. 
Tern havido nraitos naufragios. 



I have heard speak of — 

After our having bought it. 

I have tvritten a letter. 

The soldiers I have wounded. 

Much rain has fallen. 

There have been many wrecks. 



Tenho acabddo a licao. Ella havia acabddo a tarefa. 
Depois de haver dado varias instruccoes. Elle tinha es- 
tudddo na sua infancia. Tendo completes ceni annos. 
Os E/Omanos tinhao sujeitddo tiido. Scipiao se gabava 
de nao ter deixddo urn so Carthaginez na Hispanha. 
Elle tem-se envolvido naquelle negocio. Os dois tinhao. 
obedecido. Elle havia-se assentddo n'uma grande pedra. 
Elle tinha adquirido a experiencia. que tinha visto e 
ouvido tinha-lhe ensinddo a moderar os seus desejos. 
Tenho-lhe escripto muitas cartas. 



He has finished the lesson. The boy has completed 
his task. After having studied the Latin language. I 
had written four letters. What they had seen and heard 
had taught them to moderate their desires. They have 
not acquired fame. The youth had subdued his will to 
reason. He had involved himself in difficulties. To have 
given many years to business. He has not left a single 
enemy. The general had not acquired experience. The 
troops had not obeyed. The boy had studied geography 
four years. I have written three letters in Portuguese. 

* The participle in a relative clause does not agree with the 
noun to which it relates, unless it actually qualifies that noun. 
The Portuguese differs from the French rule as to the past participle. 
(See p. 147). 



146 



LESSON CXLYI. 



PARTICIPLES WITH SER, ESTAK, E EICAR. 



Sou amado, atndda. 
Somos amados, amdclas. 
E9tou ferido,ferida. 
Estamos feridos, fend as. 
Fico-lhe muito obrigddo, — a. 
Ficuinos-lhe agradecidos, — as. 



I am loved. 
We are loved. 
I am icou tided. 
We are iron tided. 
I am much obliged. 
We are much obliged. 



Sou avisddo. Sou avisdda. Estou convencida. S'eras 
cliamddo. Seriao cliamddos. Elle teria sido cliamddo. 
Era, emfim, cliegddo o tempo. As accusacoes sao exa- 
gerddas. A lingua Latina era ensindda por bons mestres. 
A Peninsula estivera dividida em duas grandes provin- 
cias. Elles erao considerddos como auxiliares. Esta 
indigndda. Estou convidddo. Estou constipddos. Eicou 
muito sentido com as novas. Os montanhezes resistirao, 
mas o resultado foi o serem exterminddos. Ella ficava 
convencida. u estiixn. junto com elle. A lingua Portu- 
gueza e derivdda da Latina. 



They are informed. The soldier is wounded. I was 
called. The men were called. The women were called. 
She had been called. The time was come. The Portu- 
guese language was taught in England. England had 
been divided. Occupations in which I am involved. The 
business is concluded. Hugo was hilled in battle. His 
scruples had been completely removed. His last words 
were uttered in a firm tone. The sad distinction of being 
feared and liated. Being ashed by the king. I was con- 
vinced. He was considered as a friend. I was invited. 

* After these verbs, and all passive forms, the participle agrees 
as an adjective with the subject of the verb. But the participle, when 
auxiliary, is not inflected, e.g., "Ella tern sido amdda" 



147 
LESSON CXLVII. 

IRBEGULAB PABTICTPLES USED ACTIVELY, 



Tenho escripto lima carta. 
(Tenho lima carta escripta.) 
Elles teem gdsto dinheiro. 
Tenho pdgo o trabalho. 
Havia ganhddo * experiencia. 
Tenho aberto as cartas. 
Tenho as cartas abertas. 



I have written a letter. 
(I have a letter written.) 
They have spent money. 
I have paid the work. 
He had gained experience. 
I have opened the letters. 
I have the letters open. 



Depois de ter entregue a fortaleza. Os deputados que 
tinhao eleito. Tendo escripto miiitos livros. Tendo-se 
entregue com fervor ao esttido. Shnao nao tinha ga- 
nhddo* muito no commercio que fazia. Entregue a 
severidade da sua justica. A peste tern morto miiita gente. 
Ella tinha coberto a mesa com panno. O meu amigo 
tinha descripto a viagem. £lle tem^desfeito as pazes. 
O portador tinha entregue a carta. Allies tinhao envolto 
as^ maos no panno. Tenho gdsto miiito cabedal. Tendo 
aceito este officio. 



He has written two letters. I have paid the shoemaker. 
After having given up the fortress, he was put to death. 
The yellow fever has destroyed many people at Bio. The 
governor had expended the capital and interest. The 
poor old man had not gained much in the trade to In- 
dia. The taking of Sebastopol has opened the eyes of the 
emperor. I have a letter written, hut not sealed. Your 
friend has described the voyage. After having gained 
a large fortune in India, he returned to England. He 
had spent immense sums. The cholera destroyed many 
thousands in Madeira in 1856. 

* Also "ganho." 



148 



LESSON CXLYIII. 

IEEEGULARS IN AH. 



Quando a carta foi entregue. 
Anirno, coracuo, piilso quieto. 
O doente esta sdhy. 
Urn rfo secco. Uma pessoa se- 

gura. 
Solto de lingua. Sujeito a lei. 



When the letter was delivered. 
Quiet mind, heart, pulse. 
The patient is safe (saved). 
A dry river. A safe person. 

Loose-tongued. Subject to law. 



Oracao, obra de Deus nmi aceita. Coraeoes bem 
affectos. TJroa dignidade annexa a sua familia. TJma alma 
captiva. Luz dispersa. Estou entregue da carta, olhos 
enxutos. Saiu por lima porta escusa. Uin mandado ex- 
presso. Fdrto de comer. Urn homem fdrto de honras. 
Terras igndtas. Hypocrisia sempre infesta a virtude. 
mar inquieto. Elle e isento de ir a guerra. Pastos 
juntos deste rio. TJm espirito inquieto. Agua limpa. Ver- 
dades manifestos. Morto de inedo. TJma cor mixta* Uma 
planta murcha. Designios occultos. As dividas pdgas. 



An accepted gift. A bishop expelled from his see. That 
land is exempt. A dry purse is empty. In an unused 
room. An unknown person. A climate hurtful to the 
health. By express words. Exempt from his jurisdiction. 
The garden joined to our house. Pure wheat. Dead with 
fatigue. Mixed colours. These faded flowers. Hidden 
thoughts. Troops paid. A loose life. Suspected of mur- 
der. The wandering pilgrim. The poor man safe, I went 
out by a forgotten door. An unquiet mind. Alms-giving 
is a work acceptable to Grod. A few pages annexed to 
the book. 



Meesta. 



149 



LESSON CXLIX. 



IRREGULARS IN ER. 



Ahsolvido de crimes. 
Dommio absoluto. 
Corrompido, corrwpto. 
Envolvido, envolto. 
Incorrido, incurso. 
Bern ou mal quisto. 



Absolved of crimes. 
Absolute dominion. 
Corrupted, corrupt. 
Involved ; involved, mixed. 
Incurred ; subject to. 
Well or ill thought of. 



Evora foi feita capital da Lusitania. ^lle devia ser 
ahsolvido. Em absolute/, desordem. Miii attento criado. 
Homem convicto de caliimnia. miindo esta corrupto. 
Arvore defendida. Armas defezas. Elle tern escolhido 
urn logar. Envolvido naquella accusacao. Historias en- 
voltas em fabulas. Envolto em trevas. Os artigos con- 
tidos nas folhas. Urn sermao extenso. Tenho incorrido 
em culpa. Incurso na pena. Tern morrido miiita gente 
de fome. Uma planta morta. Urn homem perverso. 
TJma gente pervertida. Estou preso nesta cama. H6- 
mens resolutos. 



Absolved of sin. Absolute lord. Very obedient ser- 
vant. He was convicted of theft. The minister is cor- 
rupt. The forbidden garden. They have chosen a house. 
A serpent involved in nets. He has incurred punish- 
ment. Many people have died of fever. Dead water. 
He has killed the enemy. A depraved man. An aban- 
doned population. A sheep caught by the wolf. A man 
resolute in business. Suspended in the air. Her loose 
hair. A soul absorbed in sorrow. They had defensive 
arms. He was made chief of the robbers. A pool of 
stagn ant water. 



150 
LESSON CL. 

IBBEGULABS IK IE. 



Abri'do, aberto. 
Extinguido, extincto. 
Incluido, inchiso. 
Dirigido, directo. 
Resolvido, resohlto. 



Open. 

Extinguished, extinct. 
Included, inclosed. 
Directed, direct. 
Resolved, resolute. 



ar aberto. Gruerra aberta. Eeridas abertas. Estou 
abstrdcto. Ideas abstrdctas. Estou afflicto. corpo 
coberto de pennas. Nocoes confusas. TJm estylo diffuso. 
Um exercito diffuso. Uma contradic9ao direct a. Em 
casas distinctas. Uma voz distincta. Diz Cesar que a 
Grallia e dividida em tres partes. Uma igreja erecta aqui. 
Uma fonte exhdusta de agua. ]S"iinca extincto sera seu 
nome. Chamma extinguida. Incluido no niimero. tJma 
carta inclusa em outra. Elle tinha aberto a porta. Esta 
vai inclusa na sua. 



The open sea. Open ears. He is absent in mind. 
They are afflicted. The sky covered with clouds. A dif- 
fuse discourse. Ideas distinct. A body exhausted of 
blood. I have interrupted the relations. Our relations 
are interrupted. He has oppressed me with calumnies. 
He was oppressed with grief. He is much afflicted. They 
have confused notions of the subject. That orator has a 
very distinct voice. He was included in the number of 
the victims. Several churches were erected here last 
year. Ireland is ^m^^into four provinces. 



151 



LESSON CLL 

PEESONAL INFINITIVE. 



Derxe-os divertir. 

Para se preservdrem. 

Elles, depois de terem assohido. 

No caso de voltdrmos. 

Antes de eu sair da prisao. 

Para sabermos quern era. 



Let them amuse themselves. 
In order to preserve themselves. 
They, after having destroyed. 
In ease of our returning* 
Before my going out of. 
In order that we may know who. 



INos so o conhecemos para chordrmos a sua falta, e 
miiitos desejavao serem sepultados juntainente com elle. 
Sem irmos buscar outra cousa. Todas as nymphas em si- 
lencio se inclinavao a prestar ouvidos a Telemaco, e 
faziao uma especie de meio circulo para melhor o escu- 
tdrem, e para melhor o verem. Depois de termos admi- 
rado este espeetaculo. A vinganca levou-os a buscdrem 
a allianca dos Christaos. Os Mosarabes esqueciao a sua 
lingua para so falldrem o arabe. Para os alumnos ad- 
quirirem um conhecimento. 



Vanities which, are far from having the value which 
is attributed to them. Hence arises the necessity of our 
describing. Toledo on the approach of the enemy, opened 
its gates. The inhabitants lost all hope of their being 
able to resist. On the approach of the Saracens. It 
was the residence of the sultans, before their taking 
Constantinople. The Saxons forced the Britons to re- 
tire. A few hours before my going out of prison. He 
obliged them to work gratuitously. After paying the 
bill, we set out. In case of her retur 



152 



LESSON CLII. 

PECL'LIAHITIES OF INFINITIVE. 



Muito valoroso 

nidrte. 
Bdsta urn so vicio para — 
Nao tanto para temer. 
A ponto de passdr por, 
O S'h-des invejados. 
O mesmo que dizcr que. 



para temer a 



Too brave to fear death. 

One rice is enough to — 
Not so much to be feared. 
So much so as to be taken for. 
Your being envied. 
The same as to say that. 



Muito pio para encontrdr a morte com horror. Bdsta 
urn so \io,\o para fazer iniiteis rmiitas virtudes. A morte 
nao e tanto para temer como os prazeres. Depende uni- 
eamente da vdssa vontade o serdes invejados em vez de 
invejosos. Assdz poderoso para produzir. O Creador, 
aoformd-lo — Qualquer nao precisa senao de se recolher 
em si mesmo para se convencer de, etc. Urn mero ou- 
vir-dizer. A verdade e perigosa de dizer-se e desagra- 
ddvel de ouvir-se. O pensamento e mui limitado para 
os comprehender. 



Words are too weak to tell my woe. It is too deep 
for you to find. This expedient is powerful enough 
to produce the best results. To conquer such an enemy 
the militia is sufficient. He was on the point of losing 
his sight. It is enough to enable us to make. Death is 
not so much to he feared as dishonour. His being en- 
vied was the cause of his death. The old general was 
too brave to fear death. The steam was not sufficient 
to work the ship. One leak is enough to sink the steamer. 
The language is easy enough to he learned by the stu- 
dious. 



153 



LESSON CLIII. 

PECULIAEITIES OE ENTENTTrVE, 



Passei hdras a chamdr. 
Um foliar de ventriloquo. 
Elle ria a horn rir. 
Dar de comer. 
Acho que censurar. 
JBastante jpdra saber que, etc. 



I passed hours in calling. 
A speech of the ventriloquist. 
He laughed with all his might. 
To give something to eat. 
I find something to blame. 
Enough to know that, etc. 



Diias d'essas horas passei-as a chamdr* ao Senhor 
que — Estava all um rapaz a chordr. E para louvdr a 
Deus ! Estava a chover. Esta um calor de matdr. Os 
banhos sao inui pequenos para se poder nadar. Nao e 
seu filho que vejo aleni ajogdr ? Cornea por perder o 
seu dinheiro. La esta a siia filha a ouvir um aventureiro. 
Ouco hater. Para viver socegddo. No meu entender. 
Yx&para ver este ajuntamento de rapazes ! A agua esta 
a ferver? A saber isso. A ser assim. Auda a mdis 
anddr. Ao meu ver. Ate nao poder mais. 



It is a heat enough to kill you. He began by eating 
oranges. In order to live quietly, we must go to the 
country. In my opinion, the weather is too hot for walk- 
ing. It was a sight to see such a gathering of troops. 
The poor girl stood weeping in the street. The old sol- 
dier laughed with all Ms might. I see a boy playing in 
the garden. It is not in my power. Is the water boiling ? 
He spent four hours calling on Grod. I hear some one 
knocking at the window. He rode at full speed. There 
is an old sailor begging in the lane. The room is too 
small for dancing in. 



* Or " clamar.' 



154 



LESSON CLIY. 



PAI1A WITH INFINITIVE. 



Para viver socegado. 
Quartos para alugar. 
Juizo bastante para saber. 
Para lhe dizer a verdade. 
Cavallos para vender, 
lira para ver ! 



In order to live retired. 

Rooms to let. 

Sense enougb to know. 

To tell you tbe trutb. 

Horses to sell. 

It was a sigbt to see ! 



Estamos nos aqui para beber ou para comer ? Para 
la irmos era mister passarmos por Dijon. Para prevenir 
a indigestao. Elle acha o\mke\Yopdrajogdr. Basta urn 
so vicio para fazer inuteis muitas virtiides. Eicaremos 
para ver a danca ? Quer near para jantdr comigo ? Vou 
contar para ver se esta todo. Y ... aliiga livros para 
ler ? You tocar para saber. Os abysmos abriao-se para 
as receberem. Elle nos da azas para vodrmos. Os 
auxilios necessarios para um Inglez poder escrever em 
Erancez. Elle grita para eu pardr. Para eu ir. 



In order to be seen. He has less reason to murmur. 
To offend no one. Is it not astonishing ? That we may 
go safely, it is necessary to start soon. It were much to 
be desired that — How much will it cost me to go by 
the steamer ? A single instance will serve to show. I 
shall stay to see the siege. The boat was ready to receive 
them. The articles needed for a Dutchman ,'to write 
Greek. Will you remain to dinner with us ? He gave 
us legs to walk. We were about to sail. I have horses 
to sell. She has rooms to let. 



155 
LESSON CLY. 

POR WITH INFINITIVE. 



For ser bom. 

Por lhe nao ter sido possfvel. 

Esta por pagdr. 

Quartos por mobilar. 

Quanto se paga por franquear ? 

Sentenciado a mdrte por haver — 



On account of its being good. 
As it was out of his power. 
It remains to be paid. 
Unfurnished rooms. 
How much is paid for, etc. 
Sentenced to death for having- 



Yimos um rapaz com a razao totalmente perturbada 
por haver bebido em demasia. ]STao tarddu miiito em ser 
castigado por se haver esquecido tanto do que devia a 
seus pais. Esta por escrever. Tiido isto por nao ter re- 
flectido nas consequencias. Dou gracas aos deusea^or 
m'o haverem dado. Elles saiao gozosos por terem sido* 
achados dignos de sourer. For ser Erancez. Elle gasta 
o tempo por nao saber como o occupar melhdr. Por lhe 
nao ser tao facil. For assim dizer. A gente ficou en- 
cantada^or elle haver chegado. 



On account of its being old. Punished/or having de- 
serted the army. He was blamed for having forgotten 
the letter. From its leing more difficult for me. So to 
say. The work remained unfinished. In consequence of 
having left the army without leave. Because of his being 
bad. This little account is unpaid. How much must I 
payjfor sending a letter to Setubal? He has unfurnished 
rooms in his house. On account of being a Spaniard. He 
wastes his money from not knowing how to spend it. It 
remains to be written. Erom his having been much oc- 
cupied. 

* See note, p. 146. 



156 
LESSON CLVI. 

TEEBS IN THE NEGATIVE FOEM. # 



Nao faltarei. 
Nao ha diivida. 
Nao me toque. 
Nunca ouvf dizer. 
Eu nao disse ndda. 
Nao dfga nem palavra. 



I will not fail. 
There is no doubt- 
Do not touch me. 
I never heard it. 
I said nothing. 
Say not a word. 



Nao quero. Nao e verdade. Nao posso beber mais. 
Nao se mova d'ahi. A Senhora nao m'o disse. Nao o 
creio. Elle nao me disse nada. Nclo lhes direi. JVSo 
fdga biilha. Nao o entendo. Nao sei nada d'isso. JVao 
que eu sa$«. iYao os conheco. V. ft«o aprende wa^d. 
Elle wao pronuncia bem. Se V. tern tencao de me dar 
algumas cartas, tenha a bondade de as wao fecJidr. Nao 
importa. Nao gosto d'isto. JSldo fdlle n'isso. Nao Jia 
pao. Nao come nada. Nao me lembro bem d'isso. iYao 
se esquega. Eu w«o o penso. Parece-me que nao. 



This knife does not cut well. This dollar is not good. 
I have no change. Don't lose time. I cannot stay. 
There is no water. I do not know them. He does not 
know me. I suppose not. I think not. I do not believe 
it. It cannot be true. That cannot be. There is nothing 
more probable. I cannot write more. I am not sur- 
prised. There is no news. I cannot stay. I do not 
complain. Do you want nothing more ? I never let the 
rooms for less than two guineas a-week. The monk said 
nothing. The man said nothing. Have the kindness not 
to give it to him. 

* Observe : — 1. That the negative almost always begins the sen- 
tence. 2. That in compound negatives (nao -nada) "nao" precedes 
and " nada "follows the verb. 3. That a negative makes the pronoun 
(in the accusative) precede the verb. 



157 
LESSON CLVIL 

VEEBS IN THE INTERROGATIVE.* 



Que deseja V. S. ? 

Ja acabou ? 

V. S. entendSu-o. 

Que lhe parece ? 

Ja sefoi o seu mestre ? 

Elle dtsse-lh'o ? 



What do you toish for ? 
Save you (force ? 
-Did you understand him ? 
What do you £A^& ? 
Z? your master gone ? 
Did he tell it you ? 



Quern e que duvida ? que se ^0 defazer ? Com 
quern /aZ/a Y. S. ? Sabe fallar Francez ? Que lhe fdlta ? 
Que bulha sefaz all? PoWe-se-lhe perguntar? Zk al- 
niocou ? Gosta do molho ? Quer um osso ? Jantou bem ? 
Qual e a sua licao ? Quer vir comigo ? ifofct cancado ? 
Faz calor ? Ouve-o dar horas ? Jdnta-se a bdrdo do pa- 
quete ? Em que riia e ? Quanto devo pagar por isto ? 
Entende-m.e bem ? Quer ter a bondade de lhe fallar ? 
Quanto temos andado ? JEstdo feitas as camas ? Quanto 
se deve ? Toma cha, ou cafe ? 



Is it cold ? "What o'clock is it ? How much do you 
ask a-week ? "Where does Mr. Jones live ? "Who knocks 
at the door ? Will you speak with me ? Are the boys 
gone ? Save you dined ? Do you take beer or wine ? 
"What time do we dine to-day ? Save you ham ? Shall 
we have fish ? Will you have soup ? Do you drink wine ? 
Can I offer you some chicken ? Save you dined well ? 
Do you like beef ? O^m you speak Portuguese ? -Do 
you understand her ? IZiwe you beer ? Are the beds 
made ? Which is my book ? Will you have cheese ? 

* There is no peculiar form in Portuguese as in English. " Ja 
acahou" means "Have you done? " or "You have done," according 
to the tone and manner of the speaker. 



158 



LESSON CLVIII. 

YEEBS IN THE NEGATIVE INTEEEOGATIVE, 



V. S. nao o disse ? 

Por que nao responde ? 

V. S. nao me entende ? 

Nao falla Francez ?■ 

Nao chamarei eu ? 

EscreVe-lhe Y. S. nao e assim f* 



Did you not say it ? 
Why do you not reply ? 
Do you not understand me ? 
Don't you speak French ? 
Shall I not call ? 
You write to him, dorit you ? 



Nao ha niuguem que pense em dar lima nova edicao ? 
Nao receias que Mentor peleje por teres vindo a ca9a ? 
Os sehis amigos nao o teem abandonddo ? Nao quer as- 
sentar-se ? Nao teriao side bona soldados ? Y. . . woo 
o entende ? Ainda nao acabou ? V. M. nao o entende ? 
Nao o eonhece ? Os Senhores nao querent cear ? Por 
que nao f Si V. M.? Por que nao esperou pela resposta ? 
Por que me nao trouxe o cavallo ? iYao sm# melhor 
que. . . Nao Suve o que estou dizendo ? JYao Ihe hei de 
dar o dinheiro ? Nao viu o rei ? 



"Why <fo you not go ? Will you not dine with me ? 
Do you ft<?£ spea& Spanish ? Does he wctf understand Por- 
tuguese ? jDo you not wish to have breakfast ? Did not 
the soldiers abandon him? iZtfs the pupil not yet finished 
the lesson ? Is no one at home to-day ? Will not the 
gentlemen sup here to-night ? Do jounotfear ? Why <fo 
you not speak English with these gentlemen ? Have you 
not breakfasted yet ? Z)o you not understand me ? Shall 
I wo£ eaZZ the boy ? Szue wo£ his friends understood 
him ? Won't you si£ down ? #A#ZZ I not pay the money ? 
Shall I fwtf yo to Paris ? 



«?a£r ?" 



Used like the French, " riest-ce pas ? " or the Grerman, " nicht 



159 



LESSON CLIX. 

VEEBS IN THE AEEIEMATIVE AND NEGATIVE 
IMPEEATIVE. 



Ah ra a porta. 
Fdlle seffipre Portuguez. 
Veja quaiitas hdras sao. 
Nao vd tao depressa. 
Nao dig a new palavra. 
Nao mefdlte. 



Open the door. 

Always speak Portuguese. 

See what o'clock it is. 

Don't go so fast. 

Say not a word. 

Do not disappoint me. 



Nao me toque. Leia de vagar. Venha d'aqui a pouco. 
Vd tocar guitarra. Nao tenha receio. Besponda-me. 
Naoyap^bulha. Nao se aquega. Dlga-me de que gdsta. 
Nao me de mais do que metade d'isso. Trdga 6utra co- 
llier. Nao o poupe. Vd-me buscar um. Leve esta carta 
ao correio. Nao perca tempo. Fdga fav6r de me mos- 
trar. NtLofdlte a siia palavra. Nao apdgue a luz. Sopre 
o hime. Espere um pouco. Nao tfera^a siisto. Nao <ft- 
y<ws a pessoa algiima o que vistes. Nao s#/tf$ ligeiro. 
Nao te associes com quern nao conheces. 



ite &W£? enough to tell me. Ask if Mr. J. is better. 
Don't go so slowly. Bring hot plates. Go and get me 
some fresh pears. Don't make so much noise in the 
kitchen. Deliver this letter as soon as possible. Do not 
lose time. Do me the favour to lend me a penknife. See 
what o'clock it is, if you please. Go and fetch my gloves. 
Bring lights and more wood. Let me know to-morrow. 
Put the saddle further back. Tell him that I am ill. 
Tell the servant not to come. Take the horse to the 
stable. Don't let him drink. Don't lose a moment. 
Don't speak to him. Do not stay. 



160 



LESSON CLX. 

SUBOBDINATION OF TENSES — PBESENT INDICATIVE. 



Creio que ha um so Deus. 
Conheco quanto devo. 
Creio que a chamou Deus. 
Creio que ficarei eoui este. 
Estou certo que nao tardara. 
Que qtcer que Ike offereca ? 



I believe there is one Grod. 
I know how much I owe. 
I believe that Grod called her. 
I think I shall take this. 
I am certain he will not stay. 
What shall I offer you ? 



Sao jogos que pedem um exercicio continuo. Pare- 
ce-me que estas condicoes sao moderadas. Creio que a 
cama e boa. Faz arnanha um auno que nao te vi, que 
nao ouvi a tiia voz. Espero que ouvira. ^ogo a V. S. 
que me faca saber. Nao sei que diga. Ouves o que te 
digo ? Bern ve que nao falta nada. Nao se sdbe quando 
aira. V. S. sdbe que o moco esta em casa. R6go-\he 
queira dar-me. Cre que ve tudo, e nada conhece. Elle 
sdbe que sou lima boa fregueza. Digo que elle faz bem. 
Digo que elle tern feito bem. Tenlio dito que Deus e 
justo. 



The general opinion is, that they were Italians. You 
know where I live. I think we shall have rain. I sag 
that he was doing well. I sag that he will do well. I 
sag that he would have done well. He sags I play. I 
hope there will be much fruit. I know well how much I 
owe you. I said that Grod is just. I shall say that he is 
innocent. I was saying that my son is unwell. They 
sag that John has arrived. I know that he is coming. 
Dost thou believe Divine justice sleeps? The wicked 
man lies when he sags that he hopes. 



161 

LESSON CLXL 

IMPEBEECT* AND ITS SUBOEDINATES. 



Dizta eu que elle e bom. 
Estimdva que viesses. 
Nao sahia que hdras erao. 

Estimdva que Y. S. tivesse vmdo. 
Ella julgdva que elle tinha par- 
tido. 



I was saying he is good. 

I was glad you came. 

I did not &»ow what o'clock it 

was. 
I was glad you had come. 
She thought he had gone. 



Tocdva admiravelmente quando tinha doze annos. 
Em quanto Mentor fazia este disciirso, tomamos nos a 
ilha. Dormia en tao bem quando V. M. me accordou. 
Eu nao me persuadia que as cousas saissem tao mal. 
Era necessario que eu pagasse. Sabia Narbal que Ba- 
leazar nao morrera afogado. Tudo dizia que ahi havia o 
espirito de um godo. Julia cuiddva que eu nao queria 
voltar. Melhdr The estdva* se se calasse. Se o negocio 
valia a pena. N'uma regata de vapores o nosso barco nao 
ganhdva* de certo o premio. 



I was saying that your brother is lazy. I was sorry 
you came. He did not know that I was sleeping. I was 
aware that he had gone. The figure was more slight 
than powerful. His fine mouth gave him great anima- 
tion : his delicate hands had an air of distinction. The 
gestures of the priest Tiad a theatrical exaggeration. 
Expecting a bow, but if he expected, he deceived himself. 
I did not know that your brother had been ill. While 
I was speaking, the machine exploded. It was necessary 
that he should speak. 

* Is often used for future conditional. 



162 



LESSON CLXIL 

PEETEEITE AND SUBOEDHSTATES. 



JDisse eu que o meu amigo esta 

a qui. 
Estimei que viesses. 
Eu escrevia quando elle part in. 
Eu dtsse-Uhe que fdsse, 
O monarcha acorddu. 
Fedz que me pagasse. 



I said my friend is here, 

T mas glad you came, 

I was writing, when he went, 

I told him to go. 

The king awoke. 

I asked him to pay me, 



Disse'rao-me que havia dois caminhos. Bern conlieceu 
a Deusa que este era Telemaco. Fingirtio os poetas que 
os gigantes tinhao feito guerra, etc. JPerguntei-\\\Q em 
que consistia a auctoridade de rei. Disse-me que elle 
viesse. Pedi que me deixassem estar so. Os pastores 
quizerao que me cobrisse com a pelle. Perguntdrao qual 
e mais glorioso ? Aconselhou-Yhe que fosse por terra. 
Provou-se que ella fora quern envenenara e affogara o 
rei. Perceberao os guardas que ella soffria. la chamar 
soccorro, quando me deteve lima renexao. 



I told him not to go. I asked him to come. The 
peasant said there were two roads. The soldier Tcnew 
perfectly well that it was his superior officer. The pil- 
grims have feigned that the east is full of riches. I ad- 
vised him to go to Lisbon by the Gralgo. They asked 
which was the best road to Batalha. The shepherds 
wished me to remain in the country. I told them to go 
to their own houses. I legged the soldiers to let me go, 
I was glad when my brother came. I said that my friend 
would go by the steamer. 



163 



LESSON CLXIII. 

PLTTPEEEECT* AND SUBORDINATES. 



O govem&dbvformdra o designio. 

Praticou quanto dissera. 
Quizera que fizesse este favor. 
JEstimdra miiito de saber. 
Eu o amdra, se elle fosse dfgno. 
Se o cammho/<5m bom. 



The governor had formed the 

plan. 
He practised what he had said. 
I could wish you to do me — 
I should be glad to know. 
I had loved, had he been worthy. 
Had the road been good. 



Eu te amdra, se tu me corresponderas. Queixando-se 
que a rainha tomdra tal auctoridade. Elle viu um fidalgo 
que nao apparecera durante a accao, e perguntou-lhe 
onde estivera em quanto se combatera. Estimdra que 
estivesses com saude. Eu quizera ir, se tivesse logar. 
Prouvera a Deus que me visse livre d'ella. Eu o pre- 
midra, se elle o merecesse. O rei desejdra ir a caea, se 
nao fora a chuva. O rapaz quizera pagar, se tivesse 
dinheiro. 



I should be glad to know that it is so. I could wish 
that you would do me this favour. I should feel much 
pleasure if you were well. I had loved him, had he been 
worthy of love. This would be good, could it be realized. 
If he had been good, he would not have done evil. If 
the road were good, I should take a walk. If he had 
known it, he would have done nothing. He said to one 
who had offended him. He said that he had completed his 
20 years. As soon as he had finished the work. 

* Also used as a form of conditional, as is sometimes the case 
in English: "Sad I known" for "If I had known;" "Had the 
doctor come sooner, my brother had not died" for "If the 
doctor had come sooner, my brother would not have died." 



164 
LESSON CLXIY. 

FUTTJEE INDICATIVE. 



Farei o que V. S. deseja. 

Que sera de mim, se elle partir ? 

Estimarei que venhas. 
JEstimarei se tiveres vihdo. 

No fim ee vera quern perde. 



I will do what you ask. 

What will become of me, if he 

goes. 
I shall be glad if you come. 
I shall be glad when you have 

come. 
In the end, it will be seen who 

loses. 



Irei para onde me mandarem. Amanha irei a casa 
de V. S., se fizer bom tempo. Se tu obrares bem, serds 
premiado. Se o fizerem, provardo o meu resentimento. 
Perderei o friicto da minha viagem, se nao chegar a 
tempo. Todo o favor que lhe fizer o receberei como feito 
a mim mesmo. Y. S. perdoara. Creio que sera o desejo 
de Y.S. Estiinard miiito que seu tio venha pelo vapor. 
Nao irei amanha. Pagarei o dinheiro esta tarde. 
Perderei o jogo. Perderd o cao na riia. Nao irei a casa 
de Y. E. esta tarde. 



He will do what they ask. "What will become of the 
poor boy, if his father goes to the Crimea ? I shall go 
wherever my general orders me. You will see to-morrow 
who is right. If you study well, you will gain the prize. 
I shall lose the steamer, if I do not reach Lisbon in time. 
I shall start for London when you like. I shall be glad 
if you go with me to my quinta. He will go to Camacha, 
if it does not rain. I shall pay the men to-morrow. I 
shall not go to Batalha till next month. They will go. 
If it is a fine day, I shall visit the gardens. You will 
see the museum next week. 



165 
LESSON CLXY. 

EUTUEE. 
Hei de sir. I have to be, or shall be. 



Elle hd de ter. 

Nds havemos de amdr. 

Pagdr-\he-Mi. 

Achdr-me-ha em casa. 

iMr-Jhe-nei.* 



He must have, or shall have. 
We have to love, or must love. 
I shall -pay him. 
You will find me at home. 
I shall tell him. 



Demordr-me-hei aqui algiins mezes. Hei de ter fome. 
Aonde havemos de pardr ? Di-lo-hemos* amanha cedo. 
ifa-lo-hei.t ifar-me-hei.f Como os padres haode rir-se 
a esta hora! Dar-Wo-hemos, se o pagar. JELeide ficdr 
com o panno. Como heide provdr no meu livro. Veremos 
aonde tiido isto hade ir par dr. " O que heide fazer?" 
exclamou o monge. Hd de se dar tima grande batalha. 
Ella hade estdr anciosa de o ver. Para que heide mentir ? 
E excellente mai : Deus hd de Wo pagar. Engana-se ; 
hade vel-o. Heide dar-lhe lima noticia para a consolar. 



I will follow thee everywhere. I must taste this new 
dish. I shall tell him, when he comes. If you call at 
my quinta (villa) at 4 o'clock, you will find me at home. 
I shall stay at this village for some weeks. I shall pay 
him the money, when he has finished the work. "Where 
have we to pass the night ? "We shall see where all this 
is to end? I must buy this cloth. There will be a great 
battle. We shall stay there a few weeks. She must be 
hungry. I shall do it with much pleasure. 

* Contracted for dizer. f T? or fazSr. 



166 
LESSON CLXYI. 

COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT.* 



Tenho amado. 
Tenho tfdo. 
Elle tern estado. 
Temos comido. 
Elles teem cumprido. 
!fillasi teem ido. 



I have loved. 
I have had. 
He has been. 
We have eaten. 
They have finished. 
They have gone. 



A rapida narracao que temos feito, basta para se co- 
nhecer que, etc. Tem-se feito miiita bulba. Gracas a 
Deus, tenho tido amigos. JNas visitas que tenlw feito a 
diversas escolas, tenlw tido occasiao de apreciar o mere- 
cimento dos professores, etc. Tenho visto com verda- 
deira satisfacao que, etc. Pelos servos que tern jpres- 
tddo a Portugal. Tenho dito que Deus e jiisto. Digo 
que elle tern feito bem. Tu tens tido. TJstd havido por 
bomem de probidade. O bomem tern comido. Temos 
cunvprido coin a nossa palavra. 



I have been. He has had. They have loved. We have 
seen. Tell bim be has done well. I have seen witb great 
pleasure. The rapid voyage we have made, etc. He has 
had many very good friends. He is considered a man 
of great talent. He has not kept bis word. They have 
said that Grod is just. That poor boy has been the sport 
of bad fortune. There has been much noise. I have been 
loved. We have been loved. I have seen the Queen 
several times. Have you been often in Prance ? I have 
had occasion. Have you dined ? 

* In most cases the Portuguese use the 'preterite instead of the 
compound of the present: "Euw," not '■'■tenho vistoJ' 



167 



LESSON OLXVIL 

COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT AND PRETERITE. 



Elles havido acceitddo o jiigo. 

Eu nao tinha amddo. 

Elles havido confessddo. 

Nao tinha sido possireL 

Apenas tinha saido. 

O hdmeni que se tinha rido de. 



They had accepted the yoke. 

I had not loved. 

They had confessed. 

It had not been possible. 

Hardly had he gone out. 

The nian who had laughed at. 



Raymond fo'72^0 vindo a Hespanha tempos antes . O 
Cid que os Arabes tinhdo tornado por capitao. Elles 
tinhdo-me ensinddo a escrever. Tinha deixddo o meu ca- 
vallo ao pagem. Julguei que o tinha per dido. Tinhao- 
me dito que e. Havia muita gente que tinha chegddo pri- 
meiro do que nos. Elle nao tinha ganhddo* muito no 
commercio que fazia, mas tinha adquirido a experiencia. 
O que tinha visto e ouvido tinha-lhe ensinddo a moderar 
os seus desejos. Machado tinha tencionado escrever em 
latim. Ellas havido sido olvidadas. 



Centuries before, the greatest philosophers had con- 
fessed their ignorance. Hardly had she gone out, when 
the house fell. The man who had laughed at the justice 
of the king. The man whom he had taken for his friend. 
What I had seen and heard was enough. They had been 
severely punished. That old man had taught the boy to 
write. He had confessed the crime. Hardly had the 
steamer left the port, when the man of war entered. 
The merchant had accepted the offer. If our friend had 
left his horse. 



"Simao de Nantua," Part II., page 3. 



168 
LESSON CLXVIIL 

SUBJUNCTIVE PKESEFT. 



Diz-lhe qne entre. 
Peco-lhe que se assente. 
13 precfso que me vd. 
Receio que tenhdmos. 
Diga-me o que lhe deyo. 
Estimo que teriha vindo. 



Tell him to come in. 

Pray be seated. 

I must^o. 

I fear we shall have. 

Tell me what I owe you, 

I am glad you have come. 



De licenca que veja. Peco-lhe que demore algiins 
dias. Logo que receba aviso, pagar-lh'a-hei de contado, 
se o senhor quizer. Queira Deus que seja restituido a 
seus pais. Permtita-me que lhe mostre est a caixinha. 
Grosto que nao seja cozida demais, Que quer Y. S. que 
lhe sirva? E-eceio que a cor nao seja fixa. Pdde ser 
que hdja alguma pancada d'agua. Tenho medo que Tidja 
grande poeira. Fdga como eu. O fogo nao tarda que se 
accenda. Duvido que ew.p6ssaia.ZQT. Duvido que venha. 
Temo que nao venha. Ainda que venha nao nos vera. 



I am glad that you enjoy good health. I wish he may 
come. I am very glad you are well. There is no man 
so perfect, that has not his failings. I do not doubt but 
he ivill do it. I doubt his doing it. I will not go thither 
before he comes. Pray be seated. In case they should 
not be up so early. Tell him to bring me the shoes. 
Whatever may be their traditions. Who am I, to go to 
Pharaoh ? Tell him to pay the money. Perhaps he may 
go. Go home. Do as I do. I fear we shall have war 
in 1860. Allow me to show you that picture. 



169 



LESSON CLXIX. 

SUBJUNCTIVE IMPEEFECT. 



Pedfu-me o desc 
Como se dependesse de, etc. 
Procure! que fosse reeebido. 
Ninguem, que eu soubesse, tmha. 
Sem que elle me sentisse. 
Oxala que eu houvesse sido ! 



He apologized, to me. 

As if depended on. 

I aimed at his being received. 

ISTo one I knew had. 

Without his knowing me. 

O that I had been I 



Mandou que se comecdsse o ataque. Nao pude alcan- 
car quern fosse aquelle. Receioso de que a sua vinda au~ 
mentdsse as perturbagoes, elle tentou de impedi-la. No- 
nieando um eabega* a que todos obedecessem, e que tivesse 
bastante energia para Ihes dar a paz. Oxala que eu hou- 
vesse sido estudioso. E-eceiando que torndsse a si, e a 
obrigdsse a matar-se com elle. Havia-lhe Baleazar re- 
commendado que se elle visse occasiao opportuna para 
que torndsse, lhe manddsse um annel de ouro que lhe ser- 
viria de aviso, do qual entendesse que era tempo de 
voltar. 



He waited till the priest ordered him to speak. Hin- 
dering him from hilling her. As if the notion of a su- 
preme being depended on a sound. If it were essential to 
our nature. "Without a roof to shelter them. Even if it 
were so. If we were perfect, we should be saints. If he 
heard you ! Did he ask you not to say ? It was not ne- 
cessary for you to tell. If for a moment I could suppose 
him capable of meanness. The general ordered the 
troops to begin the battle. He was afraid his speaking 
might hinder the negociations. 



* Cabeca is masculine, when it means chief, as " cabega da 
familia." 



170 



LESSON CLXX. 

FUTURE CONDITIONAL. 



Diria, se podera. 

Sentiria, se fossein. 

Seria, se fosse. 

Era melhdr, se — 

Trmta annos seriao a idade. 

Se fosse menos devdto, diria. 



I would say, if I could. 
I sliould be sorry, if they were. 
It would be, if it were. 
It would be better, if — 
Thirty might be the age. 
If he were less devout, I should 
say. 



A carta de V. S. ine consolaria, se en estivera em es- 
tado de receber consolacao. Temiao que as portas esti- 
vessem fechadas. JNTao poderia ella nega-lo, ainda quando 
quizesse. Proniettera-lhes ella que so esposaria outro 
quando posesse termo a um veu que estava tecendo. Eu 
me contaria por mui feliz se podesse acompanhar-te. 
Ealsario seria eu, se negasse a verdade. Eu a amaria, se 
ella me amasse. Sentiria se fossein recusados. Se elles 
viessem implorar piedade, negar-lh'a-7j£as tu ? Era me- 
Ihor se elle pagdsse. 



I knew they would employ force, if I resisted. I 
should be inconsolable, if any thing happened to him. 
It would he less severe, if I were supported with greater 
fortitude. If he were less obstinate, I should say — I 
should be sorry, if you were to leave the house. He 
would be very happy, if he could go to India. Tour 
kindness would comfort me, if I could receive comfort. I 
should be glad, if you could call to-morrow. They would 
not refuse, if you would ask immediately. I should 
consider myself very happy, if I had health and a mode- 
rate income. 



* The imperfect indicative is often used for the future condi- 
tional, see page 161. 



171 



LESSON CLXXI. 

SUBJUNCTIVE EUTUBE. 



Se o fixer, pagar-lhe-hei. 

Se nao adormecer, lerei. 

Se nao poder ir so, ajudae-o. 

Perderei, se nao chegdr a tempo. 

Eu farei quanto poder. 
Para quando voltdrmos. 



If lie does it, I shall pay him. 
If I don't sleep, I shall read. 
If he can't go alone, help him. 
I shall lose, if I don't arrive in 

time. 
I'll do what I can. 
By the time we return. 



Se V. S. sair, diga ao rapaz. Se o tomdr ao mez, dar- 
lh'o-hei por menos. Quando tiver sede o que heide beber ? 
Se examindrmos urn mappa do norte da Italia, acharemos 
uma ramificacao dos Alpes, etc. Se me constipdr. Se all 
lhe poder prestar algum servico, falo-hei com prazer. 
Earemos como podermos. Se esta lhe nao bastdr, tenho 
ainda mais ao seu dispor. Se o tempo correr bem, have- 
mos de ter bastante friicta. Earei o que me pedes, se 
poder. que V. qidzer. Em quanto o mundo durdr. 
Se ofizer, agradecer-lhe-hei. 



I shall do all I can to help you. He will sail at noon, 
if the wind is favourable. If we always go at this rate, 
we shall soon arrive. Certainly, if I return by Calais. 
If you wish it, I will accompany you thither. If you 
take it by the month, I will give it you for less. You 
may come, when you please. If we give credit to what 
he says. "When you least think so, you will find, etc. 
While I breathe, I exist only for thee. If I do not see 
you again. If we limit ourselves to the state. If the 
lady catches cold. 



172 
LESSON CLXXIL 

SUBJUNCTIVE COMPOUND TENSES. 



fllle se teria easado. 
fille lh'a houvera dado. 
Se estivesse dado. 
1311a teria morrido, se— . 
Se eu tivesse tido. 
Se eu tiver tido. 



He would have married. 

He would, have given her to him. 

If it had been given. 

She would have died, if — . 

If I had had. 

If I shall have had. 



Eu te teria obsequiddo, se tu me tivesses obsequiddo 
primeiro. Eu o teria avisddo, se elle m'o tivesse pedido. 
IClle teria praticddo algum acto de extrema violencia, se 
Mogueis nao Tiouvera tornado a defensa do accusado. 
Teria tido muito gosto em faze-lo. Se a minha palavra 
estivesse ddda, nao a quebrara eu. A estatura seria 
desempenada, se o trabalho a nao tivesse curvddo um 
pouco. Eu teria almogddo na sua quinta, porem o 
tempo nao me permittiu. Se elle tiver tido. Oxala 
que tivesse tido tempo. 



He would have married her, if she had been younger. 
If I had eaten the fruit, I should have been ill. I should 
have advised him, if he had ashed me. If it had not 
rained, I should have gone to the country. If they had 
paid the money, the slave would have been set at liberty. 
He would have had a fine figure, if work had not bent his 
back. I wish I had had more time. She would have 
gone to France, if she had had money. If his word had 
been given, he would not have broken it. I should have 
had much pleasure in dining with you. 



173 



LESSON CLXXIII. 

STJBJTTNCTIVE AFTEB, CEETAISr WOEDS.* 



Tremo que o amor se apdgue. 
Nao quero que ella core. 
Tenho medo que elle conheca. 
Qualquer que sSja. 
Nao soffro que inddguem. 
Talvez que seja assim. 



I tremble lest love should cease. 

I won't have her blush. 

I fear his knowing. 

Whatever may be. 

I do not allow them to inquire. 

Perhaps this may be so. 



Nao quero que sejas victima da tiia delicadeza. Nao 
quero que o padre espere por minha culpa. Qualquer 
que seja o seutido em que se escreva. E natural que 
chegue. Receio que do coracao venha a sua morte. 
Sinto que talvez estas sejao as ultimas horas de felicidade. 
Roguemos a Deus que auxilie o pobre homem. Se V. S. 
sabe a quern falla, aconselho-o a que nao continue. Pdde 
ser que elle venha. Pode acontecer que nos alcdnee. 
Prohibo-lhe que sefdga vermelha. Nao feW que se abra 
o chao e o sepulte ? 



I fear that your sword is shorter than your tongue. 
I dread her knowing that I love her so much. I do not 
wish you to be the victim of your devotion. I do not 
want you to wait on my account. Let us entreat the 
king to pardon the poor soldier. It is natural that he 
should weep. I advise you not to go on. Do you not 
fear that the ground may open ? He may come. Perhaps 
these are the last. Do you not fear that the earth will 
open ? I feel that these are, perhaps, the last days of joy. 

* Chiefly verbs of emotion, sentiment, hope, fear, asking, for- 
bidding, doubt ; contingent words, as possivel, qualquer, natural, 
talvSz, pode ser, bdsta. 



174 



LESSON CLXXIY. 

SUBJUNCTIVE AFTEE CONJUNCTION, OE EELATTVE. 



Quero que V. ~M.fdca isto. 
Quem quizer, dirija-SQ. 
So conheco um que possa. 
Nao ha quemfdca bem. 
Nao sao cousas que se digcto. 
Diga-lhe que me trdga. 



I want you to do it. 
Whoever wishes, may apply. 
I only know one who can. 
There is none that doeth good. 
These are not things to be said. 
Tell him to bring me. 



So conlieco um caminho que nos possa conduzir a 
gloria. Quer que eu o sirva de legumes ? Eazem mal a 
si os que abusao da saiide. Nao tenho nada que nao esteja 
as drdens de V. S. Nao e um diccionario obra que do 
primeiro jacto fossa sair perfeita. Nao ha quem entenda, 
nao ha quem busque a Deus. Nao ha ninguem que nao o 
s«i5#. Nao conlieco ninguem que me proteja e 0/2? <fe a 
estabelecer-me. Eis-aqui o que me convinha bem ! Nao 
devemos excluir idea algiima que tenda a elucidar a 
questao. 






He only knows one road that can lead him to Paris. 
I know no one who can protect me. There is no one 
that does not know the poet. He who abuses his health 
injures himself. A picture is not a work which can be 
perfect all at once. They want him to do it. Whoever 
wishes to take this house, may apply to J. C, No. 2, King 
Street. There is no one that seeks after God. There is 
nothing done, that is not discovered. God grant that you 
do not repent of it. These are not things to be said 
before everybody. 



175 



LESSON CLXXV. 

IMBEBATIVE, AND SUBJUNCTIVE BOB IMPEBAT1TE. 



Mdnda que elle va. 
Ollia eomo e formoso ! 
Socegue ! Hettre'Sel 
Nao se esquSga. 
N"ao aeredite. 
Tome sentfdo. 



Order him to go. 
/See how beautiful it is, 
Be easy ! Retire ! 
Do not forget. 
Don't believe it. 
Take care. 



#<%&<? que so seras grande em quanto souberes aer 
reportado. Diqa-lhe que me traga os me us sapatos. 
JNao se assuste. Seja forte, anime-se ! Nao se faille mais 
n'isso. Tome a reflectir : i>a de vagar. Fe/'a se me ajuda. 
Ponha-YRQ o que quizer. Betire-se, quando nao sera 
preso. Lemore-se de seu pai : veja o desgosto de sua 
mai. Olhe para a sua consciencia, e lucte em quanto 
tiver forcas. Ouga a voz do ceu. ^$|/& superior a des- 
graca. Nao espere nada d'elles. JEncha o edpo e (?e^e 
vinho a Joao. Bega licenca a sua mai. 



Go immediately from my presence. Take care, the 
river is very deep. Be my friend, and I shall always 
protect you. Do jiot disturb the few days I have left. 
Fill the glass, and pour water into the basin. Do not 
speak any more on that point. See how absent he is ! 
Do not make me weep. Tell me your name. Tell the 
boy to clean the stable. Be superior to despair. Mil 
that bottle with old wine. Don't forget to pay the bill. 
See how handsome she is. 



176 



LESSON CLXXVI. 

ENGLISH INDICATIVE = ?ORTTJGUE8V SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Alegro-me que V. S. esteja bom. 
Espere que elle venha. 
Espero quo nao seja nada. 
Temo que nao esteja assas cozida. 
No caso que seja enganado. 
Ate que Ihe pdguem. 



I am glad you are well. 
Stay till he comes. 
I hope it will be nothing. 
I fear it is not done enough. 
In case you are deceived. 
Till they 'pay him. 



Preciso d'lima casa que seja grande e bella. Procure- 
me urn criado que seja diligente. Elle se alegra de que 
ella nao se tenha per dido. Acabemos antes que venhz 
alguem. Peco-lhe que venha mais cedo. Nao quer sair 
ate que lhe pdguem. Temo que nao estejdmos de volta 
esta noite. JPor mais qaefdga nao pode destruir tudo. 
E possivel que o jiisto pdgue pelo peccador ? Temo que 
os dvos nao estejao assas cozidos. Espero que elle me 
pdgue. Preciso d'um eavallo que seja manso. 



I am sorry you are not well. Stay till your brother 
comes. The doctor hopes it will he nothing. He is afraid 
the beef is not done enough. In case he is deceived. 
G-et me a pupil that is attentive to his studies. Let us 
finish before the teacher comes. He begs me to come 
sooner. He fears he will not return to town to-night. 
It is possible the innocent may pay for the guilty. The 
Count wants a palace that is large and well situated. I 
will not leave the house till I am paid. I am waiting till 
the people come. I am glad you are well. 



177 



LESSON CLXXVIL 

ENGLISH INFINITIVE = PORTUGUESE SUBJUNCTIVE.* 



Diga-lhe que suba. 
Nao lhe diga que venha. 
Desejo que elle venha. 
Peco-lhe que me dispense. 
Edgo a V. S. que o nao fdca. 
Nao sou tao tolo que o acredite. 



Tell him to come up. 

Don't tell him to come. 

I wish you to come. 

I beg you to excuse me. 

I beg you not to do it. 

I am not so foolish as to believe it. 



Peco a Y. . . que o fdca. Diga-lhe que nao tdrde. 
Diz-lhe que venha amanha. Perinitta-me V. S. que ca lhe 
diga. Esta certo de que os lencoes estejao bem seccos. 
Estimo que esteja a seu gosto. Peco-lhe que nao nos 
fdca esperar. Tome sentido nao se qiieime. Tome cui- 
dado nao me corte. Eu desafio a alguem que me tire o 
ineu. Da licen9a que os prove. Permitta-me que lhe 
mostre este livro. Que quereis que el-rei fdca ? Per- 
mitta-me que eu dhra a janella. Peco-lhe me fdga a 
barba. JSTao tenho expressoes com que descreva. 



I beg you not to make me wait. Do you wish, me to 
do it ? Tell him to come to-morrow. He begs me not to 
do it. I beg you will come. Allow me to show you this 
watch. I beg you not to keep us waiting. Pray, try 
them. If he does not understand what I am, it is not 
worth while to tell him. I have not words to tell the 
force, etc. I beg you to tell him. I am sorry it is not 
to your taste. I wish you to shave me now. Give me 
leave to try these cherries. Take care not to cut my face. 

* To one familiar with classical or foreign languages, this prin- 
ciple presents no difficulties ; but the merely English scholar must 
carefully study examples of the rule, that in the subordinate clause 
of a sentence the infinitiveva. English is generally represented by the 
subjunctive in Portuguese. 



178 



LESSON CLXXVIII. 

ENGLISH INFINITIVE = PORTUGUESE SUBJUNCTIVE.* 



Eu disse-lhe quefosse.f 
Pedi-lhe que nao fosse la. 
Pediu-lhe que lhe desse. 
Quizera que me trocdsse. 
Ella lhe obtestou quizesse ter 

d'ella compaixao. 
Pedindo a Deus salvdsse a alma. 



I told him to go. 

I begged him net to go there. 

He asked him to give. 

I should like to change. 

She implored him to have pity. 

Praying G-od to save the soul. 



Dava motivo a que todos falldssem mal d'elle. Dis- 
serao-lhe que nao tivesse receio. Eecommendei-lhe que 
nao tarddsse. Impedi-lne que fossem. Mandei-lhe que 
fosse para casa. Pediu a sua mulher que lhe desse um 
copo d'agua. Eogarao-lhe que o nao jizesse. Eecom- 
mendou ao criado que o acorddsse as seis boras. Orde- 
nou-lhe que saisse. Disse ao comprador que vie'sse ver 
a quinta. Ordenou que pedissetn o que quizessem. Pe- 
dindo-lhe que procurdsse o liyro. Quizera que os dedaes 
tivessem um estojo. 



He requested them to bring him two new books. 
He made every one speak ill of him. He told me not to 
he afraid. I exhorted him to behave well. The boy pre- 
vented me from going. She ordered him to bring the 
wine. The king ordered him to make restitution. I 
begged them not to go there. The general had prohibited 
the soldiers from playing. I recommended him to hide 
himself. Minos wished his sons to succeed him in the 
kingdom. Tell him to bring my hat. 

* Many words take the infinitive, as impedir, prohibir. 
f When the ivhole transaction is past ; but when he has not gone, 
va, instead. 



179 



LESSON CLXXIX. 

ENGLISH PARTICIPLE = PORTUGUESE INFINITIVE OR 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Eu o vi passedr. 

Vejo um hdmem a cortdr lenha. 

Em logar de* dizer. 

Em comer* e beber. 

Util para* escrevSr. 

Sem que ninguem Ihefalldsse. 



I saw him walking. 

I see a man cutting wood. 

In place of saying. 

In eating and drinking. 

Useful for writing. 

Without any one speaking. 



Perdem-se muitas cousas por falta de perguntdr. Es- 
tou cancado de lev. Nao pdsso fallar sem rir. Sem que 
ninguem o suspeitdsse. Sem que elles o percebessem, 
Depois de tomdr Sevilha. Nao^contente com se fazer 
temido. Depois de fazer isto. Antes de expirdr. Terei 
o gosto de o tomdr a ver. Depois de ter estado tao 
alegre. JNTao os condemnem sem serem ouvidos. Em vez 
de se instruir, esta jogando. Abstenho-me de beber vi- 
nho. Calais, notavel por ser a passagem mais curta, 
Longe de ser. 



Happiness consists in never being ill. I saw a man 
writing a letter. In place of speaking, he writes. He 
spent the night in playing and singing. He went away, 
without any one's telling him. After taking Toledo, he 
marched against Madrid. Instead of studying his lesson, 
went to the ball. After having been remarkable for being 
the most splendid theatre in Europe. Without losing 
time. She accused Marbal of having been an accomplice. 
Having money is a crime in Tyre, and having virtue is a 
greater. 

* Notice that prepositions govern the infinitive, not the present 
participle. 



180 



LESSON CLXXX. 

ENGLISH PAST AND COMPOUND PERFECT = POBTTJGrESE 
SIMPLE PERFECT. 



Cortou-me. 

J a almogou ? 

A senhora c7iamoi<-me ! 

Quando cliegou V... 

Seu irraao morreu. 

Ja veto o sapateiro ? 



You have cut me. 
Hare you hreol fasted ? 
Did you call me, ma'am ? 
"When ffr'rf you come ? 
His brother as rfe«tZ. 
Has the shoemaker co?#e ? 



Ja vezo por esta estrada ? seu amigo ainda nao 
entrou. Ahnocei mui beni. Ja chegou o correio ? A 
senhora mandott-me dizer que viesse. tempo quefugiu 
nao volta. morto, eujo pulso cessou de bater. Deus 
mostrou a Farao o que hade fazer. Ja acabou ? Aoude 
ficou hontem ? Ja bebes vinho ? Mudou o tempo. Ja 
sefoi. Creio que foi ver a irma. Como passou V. S. a 
noite ? Ella ainda nao dancou. A nacao desappareceu 
da face da terra. seu amigo ainda nao entrou. JSfasceu 
em Munich no dia 2 de Outubro. 



He has fulfilled all his duties. The boy has cut me. 
Have you dined? "When did your brother return from 
Lisbon ? Has my father returned ? The poor wounded 
soldier, whose pulse has ceased to beat. Time past, never 
returns. The boy has drunk wine. Tour nephew has 
sworn my death. The steamer lias arrived. They are 
out. Has your master arrived? What has passed does 
not return. His friend has not returned. Have you 
taken tea ? I believe my uncle has gone to Campanario. 
The king has sent me a beautiful ring. The allies have 
taken the south of Sebastopol. 



181 



LESSON CLXXXL 



ENGLISH PRESENT = PORTUGUESE FUTURE, AND 
VICE-VERSA. 



La o espero. 

Sam, mas logo volta. 

Se eufor algiim dia a R6ma. 

Quando vier, dfga-lhe. 

Se me nao der mais, etc. 

Nao dcho.* 



I shall ivait for you there. 
He's out, but will return soon. 
If I go some day to Rome. 
When he comes, tell him. 
If you do not give me more. 
I cannot find. 



Havemos de ca tornar quando elle representdr. Eu. 
Ih'o trarei a primeira vez que ca vier. Se podernios ser 
uteis, ncauios as ordeus de V. M. Tira a vida a dois fi- 
lhos meus, se eu o nao trouxer outra vez. Levem-me de 
dlhos tapados aonde quizer&m. Nao dcho* as toalhas. 
Yim para ver se aclio a chave. Eilippe esta vivo e sao, e 
volta qualquer dia. Esta gente nao descdnga em quanto 
nao subverter tudo. Lucte em quanto tiver for9as. Em 
quanto respirdr nao existo senao para ti. Se nao tornar a 
ver-te, este annel e para te lembrares de mim. 



He will he hack immediately. The messenger will 
soon return. I shall wait for the boy there. My master 
will soon return. Know that they will not rest till they 
humble us all. If I return some day to Paris, I shall see 
the Emperor. If the man does not give me more, I will 
not sell him the horse. When Mario sings, I shall go 
again. The first time I come, I shall bring my guitar. I 
cannot find* the plate. He has come to see if he can find 
the keys. That boy will never rest till he has ruined his 
health. While I hreathe, I shall never love another. 



potential 



The Portuguese present indicative is often equal to a present 
tial : " nao dcho^ I cannot find. 



182 



LESSON CLXXXIL 

ENGLISH PRESENT PARTICIPLE = PORTTTGTTESE RELATIVE 
AND INDICATIVE. 



A voz de quern cldma. 

Yendo um memno chordndo. 

Acudir a quern chdma. 

No anno que vem. 

Como o pulso de um que treme. 

Tanta gente que ahf vem ! 



The voice of one crying. 

Seeing a child crying* 

To answer one calling. 

In the coming year. 

Like the pulse of one trembling. 

Such a number coming here ! 



Ouvia uma v6z que Ike dizia. Eis lima voz dos ceos, 
que dizia. De repente acordou-me do lethargo lima voz 
que hradou: " Foi aqui." Ella acalenta os meninos que 
chorao. A eloqueneia e o talento que doinina pela pa- 
lavra as vontades dos outros. Para o anno que vem es- 
tarei em E-oma. Ouco alguem que pede soccorro. Eu vi 
lima crean9a que cJwrdva pela inai. Meu pai ouviu la- 
droes que forgavao a porta. Yia-se de terra lima inao que 
agitdva um len90 branco. Ouvimos os passaros que doce- 
mente cantdvdo no jar dim. 



"We saw a hand leaving a white handkerchief. I 
heard the voice of a young child citing. I think I shall 
spend a few days next month at St. Anna. It was the 
voice of one crying in the wilderness. I shall be in Lon- 
don the greater part of next year. I hear the cries of 
some one ashing assistance. "We hear the lions roaring 
in the forests. I have not time to answer every one call- 
ing on me. As I lay awake in my bed last night, I heard 
some thieves forcing the window of my room. I saw a 
poor child crying for its lost mother. Did you see the 
crowd of people coming here ? In the coming winter. 



Sometimes the participle is used. 



183 



LESSON CLXXXIIL 



POETUGFESE REFLECTIVE = ENGLISH PASSIVES AND 
NEUTERS. 



O senhor engana-se. 
Canfirma-se a noticia. 
Divide-se a casa em quartos. 
lUles se tornao religidsos. 
TJsao-se estas palavras. 
Phendmenos que se tern obser- 
vddo. 



You are mistaken. 
The news is confirmed. 
The hou3e is divided into rooms. 
They become religious. 
The words are used. 
Phenomena which have been, ob- 
served. 



Aquelles dois se despedlrao um do outro. Isto chd 
ma-se trigo. Sentiu-se um grande ruido. Diz-se. Pdd- 
ver-se hqje o museu ? Vd-se embora ! Deve indagdr-se 
o estado das estradas. Todas as noticias que se poderem 
colligir. As medidas de que sefaz liso n'este districto. 
Para que este servico se possa fazer. A imitacao do que 
se pratica nos paizes mais cultos. N'esta ilha somente se 
fabrica louca de barro. No dia 10 do corrente se perde* 
rao dois navios mercantes. A verdade e perigosa de 
dizer-se, e desagradavel de ouvir-se. 



These expressions are not used. You are mistaken, 
Ma'am. The intelligence is not confirmed. The kingdom 
is divided into six provinces. The conversation became 
general. This is called barley. It is said that the king 
is dead. Can the church he seen to day ? Yesterday, ten 
ships of war were lost. It is dangerous to speak truth ; 
disagreeable to hear it. The dear friends said good-bye. 
This town is called rather handsome. In the dreadful 
storm of 26th October, 1859, the Eoyal Charter and 
many other ships were lost. 



184, 



LESSON CLXXXIV. 

ENGLISH INDICATIVE^ POBTTTGTJESE INFINITIVE. 



Sinto nao poder. 
Espero ve-lo. 
Va ver quern e. 
Smto deixd-lo. 
Espero torndr a vS-lo. 
Lisonjeio-me de merecer. 



I am sorry that 1 cannot. 

I hope I shall see you. 

Go and see who it is. 

I regret I must go. 

I hope I shall see you again. 

I natter myself I shall merit. 



Estao no quarto as nossas malas ? Sim, senhores, la 
as mandei por. Espero ve-lo em breve restabelecido. 
Va abrir a porta. Temia nao ter o gosto de ver a V. S. 
Quer o senhor ficdr para jantar comigo ? Sinto niiiito 
nao poder aproveitar-me mais tempo de sua companhia. 
Pretende nao ter sido enganado. Dizem ser no senhor 10 
de uma Deusa tao cruel, que nao consente que ninguem 
ahi aporte. Sentindo muito nao ter podido ir a casa do 
senhor. Sinto causdr-Vae esta private Estimo muito 
ser o drgao dos sentimentos da Academia. 



I thank you sincerely for your attentioD. I am sorry 
that I am obliged to tell you. I hope I shall see you 
again to-morrow. Go and see who is at the door. Go 
and open the front gate. I am sorry I cannot avail my- 
self of your polite invitation. I regret I was not able to 
go to your house yesterday. I am glad that I am the 
organ of the opinion of the Camara. I hope that I shall 
find my brother in perfect health. It seems to me that 
the time has arrived. I am sorry I must leave the Society 
of my friends. He pretends he has not been cheated. He 
is sorry to cause the gentleman all this trouble. 



185 



LESSON CLXXXV. 

ENGLISH TNELNTTIVE PASSIVE = POTU GUESE INFINITIVE 
ACTIVE. 



Ella se faz amdr. 

E de desejdr. 

Deixou-se apmihdr. 

O mesmo se pode dizer de. 

Como era de esperdr. 

Eu as maudarei concertdr. 



She makes herself beloved. 
It is to be hoped for. 
He let himself be cauglvt. 
The same may be said of, 
As was to be expected* 
I'll get tiiem mended. 



V. S. nimca se deixa -yer. Estas pennas nao prestao 
para nada ; mande-as apardr. Nao sei se o mesmo se 
podera dizer da sua intelligencia. Quizera mandar con- 
certdr umas rendas, e faze-las depois lavdr. E preciso 
da-lo a comjpor. Ali estao os marmores de Paros, que 
os condes d'Arundel fizerao transportdr da Grrecia. De 
maneira que pdde dividir-se em tres partes. A rainha 
Christina fez assassindr Monaldeschi. Eazem-me doer. 
Eazia-se temer dos Mouros. JE de ever que eile nao fosse 
alheio. Isso nao deve admirdr. 



He makes him self fear ed. I'll send them to be mended. 
It cannot be denied. Truth is sometimes dangerous to 
tell, and disagreeable to hear. This cannot be translated 
into Latin. It is to be hoped that the Russians will 
evacuate the north fort. The poor horse allowed himself 
to be caught. I think the same may be said of many 
men. As was to be expected, the first man was shot. He 
will send the boots to be mended. Mrs. E. never 
allows herself to be seen. Send these pens to be mended. 
So that the whole kingdom can be divided into four parts. 
He was incapable of deceiving, or allowing himself to 
be deceived. 



186 
LESSON CLXXXVI. 

AM GOING TO = VOU, ESTOTJ PARA- 



Vou despedrr-me de V. S. 

Estou para ir a sua casa. 

la a dizer. 

Vao plantar. 

Estou a ponto de me ir embdra. 

O leitor vdi vendo. 



I am going to take leave. 
I am going to your house, 
I teas going to say. 
They are going to plant. 
I am about to go away. 
The reader is witnessing. 



V6u-\h.e mandar um bocado de gallinha. Vou deitar 
liito. Tolosa estdva a ponto de render-se, quando o du- 
que appareceu a soccorre-la. Vou tocar para saber se 
o almoco esta prompto. Vdi V. S. ver as luminarias ? 
Estou para concluir um negocio mui importante. amor 
fraterno estivera a ponto de dar a victoria a commise- 
ra9ao. la para retirar-me, quando o monge me disse. 
N'essa occasiao estdva elle a partir para S. Claudio. 
Eu estou a dizer cousas que, etc. Estou para sair. 
rapazinlio estd para morrer. Vou tomar um banho. 



They are going into mourning. She was going to call 
for help. I am, going to take leave of you, as the steamer 
starts to-day at four o'clock. I shall ring to know if dinner 
is ready. I was going to say that I could not pay the 
money, when he offered me his purse. I am going to 
plant sugar-canes in these fields. I am going to send 
you a slice of this cold beef. The fort was on the point 
of surrendering, when the Count appeared with 1000 
men. The ship was about to sail for Teneriffe. I beg to 
say, in reply to your letter of 21st ult. I shall put on 
my boots. 



187 



LESSON CLXXXVIL 

AM TO, HAYE TO = DEYO, TENHO QUE (or) DE. 

I am to dine with him. 
We are to leave to-morrow. 
You were to dine. 
I was to have dined. 
He has much to do. 
I have to go. 



Devo jantar com elle. 
Temos de partir amanha. 
Y. S. devia jantar. 
£u devia ter jantado. 
Tern nuiito que fazer. 
Tenho que ir-me. 



Nos devemos acompanha-los. O emir regulou os tri- 
biitos que os vencidos devido pagar. Com o pretexto de 
ter de occupar-se de graves negdcios. casamento devia 
ser no come9o do inverno. Pequena cidade, onde devia 
estdr a 6 de j unho, dia de feira. Tenho que pedir-lhe um 
favor. Tenho muito que fazer. Elle tern cartas que es- 
crever. Tenho que ir a miiitas partes. Tenho hora dada 
para tratar de negocios. Nada tern que receidr d'isso. 
Teve de ceder aos desejos dos ambicidsos. Elles guiarao- 
me para o aposento, onde devia passar a noite. 



He is to dine with the Duke of Palmella to-morrow, 
I must set out on Thursday for Paris. You were to 
breakfast with me ; why did you not come ? I was to 
have dined* with the Count on "Wednesday, but I was too 
ill to go. I have to ash a special favour. He has really 
a great deal to do. I have two words to say to you. The 
general settled the tributes, which the conquered tribes 
were to pay. I have an appointment. Under the pretext 
of having to occupy himself in matters of importance. 
The funeral was to take place at three o'clock. 



* This, though common, is not correct English. Such phrases 
as "I was to have gone," " I intended to have stayed," should be," I 
was to go" " I intended to stay." 



188 
LESSON CLXXXVIII. 



IDIOMATIC FORMS WITH "ESTOU. 



r " 



JEstou a estudar. 
JEstd a cliover. 
JEstou a partir. 
Estou estudando. 
JEstd acabando-se. 
JEstou a ser julgado. 



I am at study. 

It is raining. 

I am about to start. 

I am studying. 

He is digging. 

I am to be judged. 



Eu estdva a escrever quando elle partiu. JEstou a 
trabalhar. JEstou a sudr em bica. JEstou a partir para 
Portugal. JEstd jantdndo. Elle estd a estudar Direito 
em Coimbra. Eu* a dizer-lhe isto, e o horaem a dormir ! 
Eu estdva a rir, elle a cliordr. Eu estive a dizer missa, e 
elles a oitvi-la,. Meu irmao estdva a desenhdr, e miuba 
irrna a tocdr, quando pegou o fogo em casa. Elle estdva 
Undo quando eu o encontrei. O Senhor P. estd a 
mower e o filbo a brincdr. Estou aguarddndo o que 
elle respondera. 



Sbe was reading when he entered the room. He is 
studying medicine in the University of Edinburgh. My 
friend is about to start for Lisbon in the Galgo. I icas 
running for the doctor, when I met my father. The poor 
old monk tvas dying. Why am I talking to you about 
things superior to your understanding ? Your brother 
was playing the machete, when the house fell. It is rain- 
ing in the mountains, though the sun is shining in town. 
Your uncle is icorhing in the palace of the Count. I was 
teaching the boys, when the earthquake took place. I am 
perspiring very much. 

* An elliptical phrase. 



189 
LESSON" CLXXXIX. 

IR WITH PRESENT PA11TICIPLE.* 



Vdi-se chegdndo o inverno. 
O tempo vdi limpdndo. 
Vdi-se fazendo velho. 
Vdi perdendo a belleza. 
Vdi-se concluindo. 
Em* amanhecSndo. 



Winter 

It clears up. 

He is groiving old. 

She is losing her beauty. 

He is digging. 

When day dawns. 



Vdi-se approximdndo a vindima. Vdi-se fazendo tarde. 
As n&vens vao-se separdndo. O tempo vdi estdndo mais 
ameno. Durou a guerra dez annos, e ao passo que ia 
durdndo e crescendo a guerra, se ia juntamente com os 
annos diminuindo a causa d'ella. Como visse que se 
vinlia chegdndo o dia da sua morte. Mentor ia seguindo 
a Telemaco. Vdi-se chegdndo a colheita. Vdi perdendo 
o medo. Eu os leio, mas vou sempre dizendo que nao. 
O doente vdi-se concluindo. Isto vdi sendo dia. Deve 
ser um prazer regio ir Undo aquella deliciosa satyra. 



Winter is drawing near. In order to be able to live. 
That sad emigration is depopulating this beautiful island. 
Returning to what I was saying to you. The leaves of 
the trees are falling. The months are rolling on. The 
sick man is hastening to his end. The soldiers were fol- 
lowing the enemy. Winter is coming, and the days will 
soon be short. The rain has ceased, and the weather is 
clearing up. When dag dawns, I shall setoff for Lisbon. 
The weather is becoming milder, and the fields are getting 
clothed with verdure. That young lady is losing her 
beauty. The harvest is approaching rapidly. 

* The participle with " em" prefixed is equal to a future in- 
dicative. 



190 



LESSON CXC. 

CAN = POSSO, SEI ; COULD = PODIA, PODEBIA, SOTJEE. 



Pode faze-lo, se gdsta. 
Se Y. M. poder vir. 
Sei ler e escrever. 
D'onde se podia ver. 
Perguntar se sabia ler. 
Como se nao podessem haver 
hdmens. 



He can do it, if lie likes. 
If you can come. 
I can read and write. 
Whence could be seen. 
To ask if he could read. 
As if there could not be men. 



Diga-me em que lhe posso servir. V. S. pode fazer-me 
urn grande servico. E/emediar-nos-hemos coino podermos. 
Pode ver-se hqje o museu ? Nao posso ficar. E a 
melhor cousa que pode fazer. P6de-me mandar isto ? 
Que posso offerecer a V. S. ? Y. S. poderia fazer-me um 
favor. Teremos peixe ? Nao pude achar. Todos^ os 
sitios d'onde se podia ver o desembarque do chefe. Elle 
soube reprimir os abusos. Poderia alguem espera-lo ? 
Nao posso mais. Nao o posso sourer. Evito-o quanto 
posso. mais depressa qaepode'r. 



Can you send it for me to the Torrinha Eoad ? If I 
can render you any service, I will do it with pleasure. 
He could not be a minute without his friend. The best 
advice that can be given. He found him the most patient 
listener that garrulity could demand. Do you know 
what can be done ? He said that you alone could give 
exact intelligence. He could see and hear all, perfectly. 
You can go home, if you like. I cannot remain to-night. 
I began to ask, if he could read. Could any hope to see 
the boy again ? I avoid the youth as much as I can. 
As fast as you can. You can do me a favour. 



191 



LESSON CXCI. 

CAN HATE, COULD HATE = PODE TEE, PODEEIA TEE, 



Elle nao pode ter feito isto. 
13 impossivel que elle 

ohrddo assim. 
Nao pode ser que elle teriha 

morto o hdmem ? 
Bu poderia ter acabddo a obra, 

Elle nao tinha podido descobrir. 



He can not have done it. 
He can not have done so. 

He can not have killed the man ! 

I could have finished the work. 

He could not have found out. 



£lle poderia ter seguido o officio de seu pai. Yerdades 
que a sua razao nao tinha podido descobrir. £llle poderia 
ter gdnho na especulaclo, se pensasse melhdr. Eu po- 
deria ter feito isto, se tivesse tido tempo bastante. O 
secretario poderia ter escripto este officio, se quizesse 
trabalhar mais. Os hdmens poderido ter sido mais^fe- 
lizes, se de ha mais tempo se tivessem conbecido. Elle 
inflammou-se a ponto que poderia ter feito asneira. OjSe- 
nhor E. tinha podido fazer isto, se lb'o pedissem. Elle 
apresentou mais dinheiro do que tinha podido ganhar. 



They beard truths, which tbe most cultivated reason 
could not have discovered. Tbey can not have finished 
that immense work in three montbs. You might have 
built tbat bouse in a year. He could have done the work 
very easily in three weeks, if they had allowed him. 
Tbe book is better printed than I could have supposed. 
Tbe secretary could have finished all these letters, if 
he had not gone to the ball. It is quite impossible 
tbat he can have acted so. The officer might have gained 
100 dollars, if he had been attentive. I could have 
saved tbe boy, if I bad bad a rope. 



192 



LESSON CXCII. 

MAT, MIGHT = POSSO, PODEEIA, PODESSE. 



Posso pedir-llie lima graca ? 

Posso enganar-me. 

Qualquer que seja. 

M.uitos poderiao ser felizes, se — 

tJma questao que poderia ser 

curidsa. 
Seja feita a vonta.de cle Deus ! 



May I ask a favour of you ? 
I may be mistaken. 
Whoever lie may be. 
Many might be happy, if — 
A question, which might 

curious. 
May God's will be done! 



he 



Isto pode ser. Quando o rapaz vier, poderd Y. M. ir. 
Elles poderao magoar-se. Seja o que elle quizer, eu 
estirno sua probidade. Pode ser assirn. Pode acon- 
tecer. Qualquer pode fazer o que nao for contrario as 
leis. JS r do nos e Ucito violar a lei. Ser-me-hd permittido 
ofterecer-lhe. Pode ser que elle venha. Oxala que seja 
feliz ! Oxala que volte cede. Pode-se retirar. Creio que 
nos podemos levantiir. Eu podia fazer isso se quizesse. 
Eu tinha podido faze-lo, mas, etc. Elle poderia ir, se 
quizesse. Ser-lhe-7^« licito ir, se podesse. 



He may do what he pleases. May I be allowed to 
send you a whig ? May be, she will come to-morrow. 
May he soon revisit his native land ! Such a thing may 
happen. You may go, as you have finished the work. 
These may do what is not contrary to law. You may 
come as soon as you please. You may be sure that 
you will find me at home. The boy might do it, if he 
liked. The child miglit read, if he would. He might go 
to Demerara, if he could get money to pay his passage. 
He might write the letter, if he pleased. He might sing- 
it he would. 



193 



LESSON CXCIII. 



SHALL,* SHOULD. 



Terei a honra ? 
Quer que elle venha ? 
Serei aflbgado. 
Iria, se tivesse cavallo. 
Deve obedecer. 
Se elle fizesse fsso. 



Shall I have the honour ? 

Will he come ? shall he come ? 

I shall be drowned. 

I should go, if I had a horse. 

He should obey. 

If he should do that. 



Nao irei a, Lisboa amanha. A menina diz que nao 
quer ir, mas hdde ir. Nao, nao hddefazer tal. Dir -Die- 
Mi o que penso ? Se V. S. nao quer ir, w*$ so. Jrei por 
elle ? Eu voltarei se poder. Ficarei, se me for licito. 
Do que lhe ^eirfe eu offerecer ? QweV g'we eu o sm?« de 
legumes ? Diga-me que edificios havemos de ver. Se 
elle viesse, comeria com-ndsco. Se eu tivesse cavallo, 
iria. Se tivesse noticias d'elles, dar-lh'as-Mz. Se cho- 
vesse, Y. S. nao devia ir. Se eu tivesse poder, as cousas 
haviao de ir d'outro mddo. 



If he should do that, I would punish him. I shall 
not go to Camacha on Monday. Shall I help you to a 
little roast-beef? How much should I give him per day ? 
I shall want you to-morrow at 6 o'clock. Shall you 
have time to come with me ? Shall we go on Monday ? 
I should like to have a catalogue. I shall be much obliged 
to you. I should like a glass of beer. Shall I light the 
fire ? We shall not be ready in time. It shall be done. 
If we were perfect, we should be saints. Shall I have 
the honour of calling on you to-morrow? If I had a 
good pony, I should go. He shall have it next week. 

* Implied in the form of the Portuguese verb, e. g., I shall go, 
irei ; I should go, iria. 



194 



LESSON CXCIY. 

"WILL, "WOULD. QUEBO, YOU, QUIZ. 



Quer V. S. faze-lo, ou nao? 

Nao, eu nao quero. 

Vou-Yhe mostrdr os quartos. 

Nao o quiz fazer. 

Isto e o que en f aria. 

Se ella lh'o pedisse, dar-lh'o-7n« ? 



Will you do it, or not ? 

No, I will not. 

I tvill shoto you the rooms. 

He would not do it. 

This is what Td do. 

If she asked, would you give it ? 



QmcV almocar com-nosco ? Quer cha ? Elle nao 
quer trabalhar. Teria de pedir-lhe lima cousa. Quer 
fazer-me um obsequio ? Vou ver. Creio que Y. S. gos- 
tard oVeste. Elle Jiacle ca estar quarta-feira. Fa-lo-Jiei 
com gosto. Farei por V. S. o que nao J- aria por ninguem. 
Espero que nao seja nada. JSTao Tidde dizer que nao. 
Quer tomar um cdpo de neve ? Quer Y. S. que eu va 
hqje ? Choverd, mas nao hade trovejdr. JNos nao lhe 
pagaremos. Segundo se quer. Deixe-me passar, eu Mide 
ir. Eu quero que Y.M. f&qa. isto. 



Will you go or not ? I m>z7Z tell him to come. Let 
me pass. I will see my child. The man says he will 
send the money to-morrow. He was very lazy, and would 
not write the letter. The doctor says it will be nothing. 
Til go and see who is at the door. What would you. 
have us do ? If I were in your place, this is what I 
would do. Would you go, if he invited you? In the 
evening, he would relate to us his numerous adventures. 
Sometimes he would go at 10 o'clock. No, I will not. 
At night, the old man would read tc us. I told him all, 
vet he would not believe me. 



195 



LESSON CXCY. 

WILL HATE, WOULD HAVE — TEREI, TERIA, QUERIED. 



Teria escripto. 
Iria,* teria ido. 
Eu quero que elle obedeca. 
Elle teria querido casar-se. 
Nao ganhava.f 

Eu nao quizera que V. S. escre- 
vesse. 



He will have written. 
I would have gone. 
I ivill have him obey. 
He would have married. 
I would not have gained 
I would not have you write. 



Eii teria jantddo com Y. S., porem a cMva nao me 
deixdu. Pelusio, d'onde havia fazer-se o nosso embarque, 
se Sesdstris nao acabara. Se tivesse pedido D. Beatriz 
a vdsso pai, elle lh'a Tiouvera dado por mulher. Ella teria 
morrfdo, se nao fosse, etc. N'lima regata de vapores o 
nosso barco nao ganliava\ de certo o premio. Bern dese- 
jdvaf eu ser o portaddr, mas negdcios domesticos me em- 
bara^ao. Se nao estivesse impedido com molestia, iria 
pessoalmente a casa de Y. S. A nao ser Y. S., estdva 
perdido. 



I would have paid him with pleasure, but he would 
not take the money. Be that as it may, I will have my 
child obey me. He would have liked to have married, 
but, unfortunately, he had not the means. I would not 
have you write to him any more, for he will not reply. 
Without doubt, he would have died, if it had not been for 
the kindness of the old vicar. But for you, he would have 
been entirely ruined. I should have liked to accompany 
you to Madeira, but pressing business prevents me. 

* " Iria" would go >, is often used for "teria ido," would have 
'gone. 

f The imperfect is often used in this sense. 



196 



WILL OR 



LESSON CXCVL 

shall" in the sense of 
"have to be." 



MUST OE 



Se o fizer, pagdr-lhe-ML 

Quanto lhe heide dar ? 

O vinho hade ser barato est© anno. 

que heide comer ? 

Que camfnho heide tomdr ? 

Dar-lhe-hei diias patacas. 



If he does it, I must pay him. 
What shall I have to give you ? 
Wine ■will he cheap this year. 
What shall I eat ? 
What road must I take ? 
Til give you two dollars. 



JNfao se sabe em que se hade passar o tempo. Se all 
lhe poder prestar algum servico, fd-lo-Mi com prazer. 
Quando tiver sede, o que lieide beber ? JEstimd-lo-hei 
miiito, Jlcdr-lhe-hei agradecido. Ser-me-hd licito pergun- 
tar-lhe ? Apedr-nos-hemos aqui ? Sim, Senhores, Tidode 
ter bons quartos e boas camas. V. S. hade achdr os pre- 
90s mui razoaveis. Hade almogdr com-nosco. Que lhe 
heide dizer da gente ? Para que hade matar-se ? A co- 
lheita hade ser boa. Os vinhos haode ser muito bons este 
anno. Aonde havemos de parar para jantar ? 



If he finishes the printing in three weeks, I shall pay 
hwi more. How much shall I have to give the man ? 
Milho ivill be much cheaper next year. What will the 
man drink ? "Which of these two roads shall I take ? I 
shall do it with much pleasure. May I be permitted to 
inquire if you have had good news from the duke ? You 
will find the prices at the hotels very reasonable, but the 
rooms are not clean. Where shall we stop to breakfast ? 
When I am hungry, what am I to eat ? My friend, you 
will breakfast with me this morning. I will give you ten 
dollars, nothing more. 



197 
LESSON CXCVIL 

I HATE JT7ST — ACABO* DE. 



Acabdva de vir, quando. 
Acdbo de o fazer. 
Chego agora mesmo. 
Acabddo de publicar-se. 
Acabdvao de conclufr. 
Acabdva Y. S. de sair. 



He had just come, when. 
I have just done it. 
I am just arrived. 
Just published. 
They had just finished. 
You were just gone out. 



Acdbo de tomdr lima chicara de cafe. Tome a vir 
coser, quando acabar* de brincar. Acabao de entrar. 
Nao fdco mdis que chegdr da Crimea. Os Musulraanos 
acabdvao de conquistdr aquella parte da Africa. O novo 
emir acabou de avassalldr o resto da Peninsula. Que 
horas sao ? Acabao de dar nove. Os Judeus acabdvao de 
receber a lei. O peixe acdba de chegdr. Este catalogo 
acdba de ser publicado bqje mesmo. Acabdvamos de com- 
prar a casa quando lhe pegou o fogo. Acabcmdo de dizer 
isto. 



The mail has just arrived. I have just told you. 
Just published, a History of Portugal, by A. Herculano. 
They had just finished a beautiful drawing of the fortress, 
when a shot was fired. I am sorry I cannot dine with 
you, as I have just finished lunch. In reply to your kind 
letter, just received. The books, to which I refer, have 
just been published by Silva. The allies have just suc- 
ceeded in forcing the Russians to evacuate part of Sebas- 
topol. We had/ws^ bought the house, when it took fire. 
The lady had just gone out, when I called. Saving just 
said these words, he expired. 

* This idiom literally means, " I finish of doing ; " and resembles 
the French, " Je viens de faire." 



198 



LESSON CXCVIII. 



OUGHT I>EYO, DEYIA. 



Devo fazer o meu thema. 
Elle deve estar aqui. 
O vercle deve ir-lhe berii. 
Nao devo duvidar. 
O que devia dizer. 



I ought to do nvy theme. 
He ought to be here. 
Green ought to suit you well. 
I ought not to doubt. 
What I ought to say. 



Devemos trabalhar e nao brincar. V. M. deve pensar 
antes de fallar. Aquelle que nao quer trabalhar nao deve 
comer. Nao se deve deixar para amanha aquillo que se 
pdde fazer hoje. A que horas deverei estar prornpto ? 
Eu nao duvido, nem devo duvidar. Na guerra o rei deve 
ser o defensor dos povos. E certo que se fosse verda- 
deiro, devia ser adoptado. nome do Sr. E. deve ser- 
nos tao caro, como se fosse o de um compatriota ndsso. 
Este catalogo que deve considerar-se como um supple- 
ment. 



These boys ought to work, and not to play. Every 
one ought to think before speakiug. He who will not 
work, ought not to eat. This book ought to be considered 
as an answer. If my plan is good, it ought to be adopted. 
The interests of these children ought not to be sacrificed. 
Such people ought not to be admitted into good society. 
He neither doubts, nor ought to doubt. At what hour 
ought the boat to be ready ? The king ought always to 
be the defender of his country. That ought never to be 
left for to-morrow, which can be done to-day. Tou ought 
to go to Madeira in time. 



199 



LESSON CXCDL 



MUST — DETO, SEE PEECISO, E MISTBE, ETC. 



Devo comef. 

E preciso que elle seja doudo. 
E mister separar-nos. 
Preciso levantar-me. 
Preciso que me faca, etc. 



I must eat. 

He must be mad. 

We must part. 

I must rise. 

You must make me, etc. 



Agora deve tomar uma cMcara de cafe. Preciso lavar 
as maos. Preciso ir-me embora. E preciso irmos vesti- 
das em corpo. Devo tomar a direita ou a esquerda ? 
Devo fazer aquillo ? Calcarei as botas. porque deve fazer 
lama. Sera mister que me faca outro par. Sera preciso 
que eu leve a comida amanba ? Elles devem ter vindo 
mui mo^os para a Inglaterra. Devemos morrer todos. 
E mister que leve este rol. Preciso que isso esteja prompto 
para quinta-feira. A que boras deverei estar prompto ? 
Deve ser um prazer regio. 



I must write. You must cut my hair. They must 
learn. He must have been a handsome man. If you do 
not wish to lose the friendship of your uncle, you ought 
to act otherwise. He must be a tool, when he acts in 
that manner. We must part, for the steamer goes in an 
hour. You must make me a pair of stout boots. Now, 
you must take a glass of wine and water. I must wash 
my hands. We must go in full dress. Must I take the 
right hand or the left ? At this price they must be very 
good. What must be given to the coachman ? 



200 



LESSON CC. 

THERE IS, HERE IS— HA, TEM, ElS-AQTJI. 



Ha ran hdmem. 

Havia um soldado. 

Nao ha perigo. 

Nao tern pressa. 

Ha seis mezes que estou aqui. 

Nao ha quern o veja. 



There is a man. 

There tvas a soldier. 

There is no danger. 

There is no hurry. 

I have been here six months. 

You are quite a stranger. 



Ha dois annos que o nao vejo. Tres dias ha que eu 
a vi. Ha muito tempo que nao tenho o gosto de ver a 
V. S. Ha alguma cousa de novo ? ~Naolia tempo a per- 
der. Ha cartas para mim ? Devo ter lima carta no 
escaninho. Ms-aqui lindos aventaes de seda. Aqui os 
tern lindissimos. JEis-aqui o que eu aborreco. Ha alguma 
esperanca ? JE'zs-me aqui. Nada 7ia tao perigoso como a 
ma companhia. Eis-aqui um. amigo meu. Sa homens. 
Que tempo Jia que V. S. esta no Tunchal ? Ha um mez 
que elle esta doente. 



There will always be poor in the world. If there 
should be any one — . If there were but two horses. 
How long have you been in Oporto ? There is nothing 
so injurious to the invalid as excitement. She has been 
very ill for two months. Cronstadt is one of the strongest 
fortresses that exist. There is no hurry. I shall send it 
to-morrow. Here are some very fine books for sale. Is 
there anything new in the paper to-day ? Are there any 
letters for my father ? I have been five years in the 
island. 



201 



LESSON CCI. 

ADVEBBS OE PLACE. 



Onde ? por onde ? aonde ? para 

onde? embdra? 
Aqui, ahi, d'ahi, all, por aqui. 

Alem, ca, la, acola, arriba. 

Cerca, dentro, fdra, diante, atras. 



Where ? which way ? whither 
away? 

Here, there, thence, yonder, this 
way. 

Beyond, here, there, over there, 
up. 

Round, within, out, before, be- 
hind. 



Onde e a casa de — ? Yenha ca. Ya-se embdra. Eu 
aqui estou bem. Venha^or aqm. Ya por ahi. Passe 
por all. Yenha d'aqui a pouco. Yamos a pe ate Id. Por 
onde vamos ? JLis-aqui tima linda vista. Ha cinco annos 
pdra-cd. Nao se mova d'ahi. Pique ahi. Yoltemos 
par a trdz. Aonde vai o rapaz ? D'aqui a alguns dias. 
Torne atrdz. D'aqui para ali. Aqui dentro. D'aqui 
por diante. Dentro em tres dias. Tern saido/bV^. Tenho 
gente de fdra. Janta fdra. Mandar alguem adidnte. 
De hoje em diante. Deixar alguem atrdz. Alem d'isso. 



Where is the church ? Let us go on horseback. Sere 
is a beautiful watch. Where is your master ? Stay here. 
He goes out. My friend lives there. Which way did he 
go? From hence forward. He has company. My friend 
is dining out. Besides this. The church is far from this. 
Near land. It is near mid-day. The gentleman is not 
within. Nearly five years ago. I shall return within 
three weeks. My master dines out to-day, not far from 
this. Let us go up. He went down. After that, he 
went away. 



202 



LESSON CCIL 

ADYEBBS OF TIME. 



Quando, algumas vezes, desde. 
Sempre, cedo, tarde, para sempre. 
Niinca, tantas vezes, nmitas vezes, 

raras vezes, outra vez. 
Agora, antes, depois, entao. 
Hqje, hontem, hontempela nianha. 



When, sometimes, since. 
Always, soon, late, for ever. 
Never, so often, often, seldom, 

again. 
Now, before, after, then. 
To-day, yesterday, yesterday 

morning. 



Qudndo vai o vapor P Apenas tiulia saido, qudndo a 
casa cam. Hoje em dia. De qudndo em qudndo. Desde 
entao. Devemos sempre fazer o nosso dever. Miiito cedo. 
Amar para sempre. Ouvi-o dizer outr'ora. Eu antes 
quereria nozes. Vai-se fazendo tdrde. Mais do que nunca. 
Agora quer uma cousa, agora quer outra. Antes morrer 
que ser traidor. Voltei tres Inezes depois. Hontem foi 
dia santo em todo o logar. Levante-se^'i. E^a tempo. 
J a vou. J a sefoi o seu mestre ? Estive la hontem pela 
manha. Logo you. Logo que receberdes esta, vinde 
ver-me. 



When does lie return ? He had hardly gone, when he 
fell. I see him from time to time. Till now. He will 
rather die, than work. He is sometimes in town in the 
morning. Always get up early. Since then I have sel- 
dom seen him here. I shall write to yon to-day, or to- 
morrow. It is growing late, I must go home. He will 
give it you now. Yesterday was the first day of the month. 
He prefers fish. It is time to write that letter. I am 
coming directly. As soon as he died. Formerly so full 
of life. 



203 



LESSON CCIIL 

ADYERBS OF QUANTITY AND NUMBER. 



Tao quao ; lima vez, diias vezes. 
Miii, mais, menos, tanto quanto. 
Assas, apenas, tanto quanto, de- 

masiado, em quanto. 
Quasi, de nenhum mddo, so. 
Cerca, as vezes, as mais das vezes. 



So as ; once, twice. 

Much, more, less, as much. as. 

Enough, hardly, so much as, too 

much, while. 
Almost, not at all, only. 
About, at times, most frequently. 



JNao va tao depressa. Tao alto e tao branco. Tanto 
melhor. Tanto peior. Tanto por tanto. Se elle fosse tao 
prudente quao atrevido. Fiz isso tres vezes. Nem mais 
nem menos. Quer comer mais? Sao quasi dez horas. 
Quanto leva pela passagem ? Mui agradavel. Pouco 
mais on. menos. Nao se acha menos. Adiantar-se-ha 
quanto poder. Qucmto em mim for. Defendo-o quanto 
pdsso. JEmquanto a este homem castigo parece-nos 
demasiddo severo. Mmqudnto durar o miindo. Ha quasi 
um mez. De mais a mais. Emqudnto ao mais. Com- 
prido de mais. 



He goes too fast. This man is so tall. If you come 
with us, so much the better. If she were as good as she 
is beautiful. He is sixty years, neither more nor less. 
I found myself minus. How much did you pay for this 
book ? He will write as much as he can. As to this 
country, I think it beautiful. While the world lasts, 
there will be good and bad men. I shall help you as far 
as in me lies. It is nearly a year. I have not even a 
dollar. It is almost 4 o'clock. His conduct is not at all 
agreeable. So much the worse. The cholera raged, so 
that it threatened to destroy all. 



204 



LESSON CCIV. 

ADVERBS OE MANNER AND QUALITY. 



Sim, certamente, na verdade. 
Nao, amda nao, nada, nada 

menos. 
Assini, por acaso, assim mesmo. 
Como, bein, mal, melhdr, peidr. 
Talvez, pdde ser, porventiira. 
Devagar, depressa. 



Yes, certainly, indeed- 

No, not yet, nothing, nothing 

less. 
So, by chance, just so. 
How, well, ill, better, worse. 
Perhaps, may be, per chance. 
Slowly, fast. 



Creio que sim. Digo que nao. Eacamos assim. Elle 
nao me disse nada. Nao o creio. Ainda nao acabou ? 
Como diz V. S. ? Nao le bem. V. S. nao anda nada. 
Como se chama isto ? Elle falla devagdr. Talvez nao 
seja necessario. Muito hem, estarei prompto. Estimo 
muito que assim acontecesse. Como assim ? Assim seja. 
Como quer que seja ? Morrer como militar. Eerido como 
estava, fallou. Ora hem. Bempouco. Muito hem feito. 
De mal para peior. Mal disposto. Nao ha nada melhdr. 
Cdda vez melhdr. Esta peior. Nao pode ser. Yamos 



I say so. I believe not. Let him do so. I cannot go 
yet. The boy does not write well. Perhaps he will return 
to-morrow. So be it, I am quite ready. He wishes to 
die as a soldier. Ill as he was, he wrote a long letter. 
There is nothing better than pure water. Let us go back 
quickly. He grows hetter and better. Whatever he the 
case, I must go to Lisbon. The work is very well done. 
I am glad that he is so well. Go quickly. I have not 
seen it yet. Let him do so. The work is very well done. 
The poor are behaving worse and worse. Charles does not 
speak well in public. 



205 
LESSON CCV. 

ADJECTIVES USED EOR ADVERBS. 



Sinto infinito. 

Rdro pregava. 

Disse ella bdixo. 

Doce tanges, doce cantas. 

Falla cldro e distincto. 
Fallava rijo. 



I regret very much. 
He rarely preached. 
She said in a low voice. 
Sweetlythou playest, sweetly sing- 

est. 
He speaks clearly and distinctly. 
He was speaking aloud. 



Desprezando ingrdta e descuiddda os mimos com que 
foi dotada. Queira V.S. aceitar henigno a expressao de 
meu sincero louvor. TJma tal sociedade e a sentinella 
que vigia cauteldsa em torno, etc. Tenho a honra de 
dizer-lhe que me aproveitarei gostoso dos seus offere- 
cimentos. Sentindo infinito a dor que tao justamente 
afflige a Y.S. Minha mulher se reconhece agradecida. 
Eolgo infinito de ter uma occasiao de ser litil a Y.S. 
Ellas viviao seguras e quietas. Sentiu infinito a morte 
do seu amigo. Elle falla Idixo. 



Will you kindly accept this trifle ? I rejoice ex- 
to have it in my power to be of use to you. I 
shall avail myself with pleasure of your kindness. He 
watches carefully around. The monk rarely preaches. 
I grieve very much. Despising ungratefully the offers I 
made. I feel very much the grief which, etc. He spoke 
very slowly. I rejoice much to hear of your good for- 
tune. He lives quietly and securely in a cottage. Will 
you kindly excuse the trouble I give you ? I shall avail 
myself gratefully of your kindness. 



206 



LESSON CCVI. 

PHRASEOLOGY OF ADVERBS. 



Ca e la, por dra. 

Para ca e para la, sobretuclo. 

Ja la, ja agora, ja entao. 

Ja ha dias, jaja ; jaja. 

Aqui dentro, ate aqui, ate alii. 

Amda nao, algum tanto. 



Hither and thither, at present. 
Up and down, above all. 
Done with, now, even then. 
Some clays ago, quickly ; yes, y 
Within, to this, to that time. 
Not yet, rather. 



D'ha cinco annos^ara cd. Desde entao para cd sem- 
pre cri que, etc. A historia dos tempos que ja la vao. 
Estas botas sao grandes de mdis. As solas nao sao las- 
tdnte fortes. -D' aqui a tres mezes. Issojd la vai. Ld 
se foi tudo. J~d Id vai o tempo. Jdjd me lembro. Isso 
hontem seria bom,^ agora e superfluo. V a jdjd! Aqui 
jaz. D'aqut a algiins dias. D'ali a d6is dias. Ao longe 
pelos campos. jy ahi a pouco pareceu-me ouvir a voz. 
Ja chora,jd se rijd se enfureee. O Alcantara, sobre o 
qualja entao havia uma ponte^awco mdis oumenos como 
a de hoje. 



G-o very quickly. Some days hence. Acw I remem- 
ber. The higher you go, the colder it gets. This dress 
is rather short. Three months hence I shall go to 
England. He promotes directly or indirectly the instruc- 
tion of the people. Morally and socially speaking. Some 
days ago, I was walking in the Praca. Yesterday food 
would have been welcome ; to-day it is useless. Even 
then there was a bridge and a small house. I cannot go 
at present. This paper is too large. The soles of my 
boots are not strong enough. They will go to England 
within three months. The history of days gone by. 



207 
LESSON CCVIL 

ADVERBIAL PHEASES. 



Apenas, Trial, tanto que. 

Tdnto que elle sepultoti sen pai. 

Yeiu Ter-m eassim que chegou. 

Em chegando a porta. 



As soon as, hardly. 

As soon as he had buried his 

father. 
He came to see me as soon as he 

arrived 
As soon as I had arrived. 



Elle correu a mim apenas me avistou. Ella apenas 
o vira desapparecer no arco, saira detraz do reposteiro, 
Apenas descavalgou, deu varias ordens. Elle foi roubado 
pelos Berbereseos, quando apenas contava cinco annos. 
" Meu criado " gritou Brites apenas me viu, Apenas 
chegou a Tunis, foi elle comprado por ordem do bei. 
Mai se pddem ler sem horror. besteiro apenas entrou 
encaminhou-se para uma diamine. Os recursos do pastor 
apenas chegavao para sustentar as creancas, 



As soon as he had dined, he went out. They could 
hardly stand. They hesitated, as soon as they saw me. 
Hardly had the horse come, when he was bought. No 
sooner had they left the regiment, than they became the 
victims of the guerillas. The soldier no sooner entered 
the room, than he took a seat near the fire. If I do not 
get up as soon as I awake, I fall asleep again. He had 
hardly entered the house, when the assassin stabbed him. 
No sooner had the ship struck, than all order was at an 
eud. He lost his sight, when he was hardly six years old. 
He paid the money as soon as he came. 



Senao,* menos, so, nao mais do 

que- 
Ninguem senao meu pai. 
Mais nada senao- 
Tiido, menos lima affronta- 
Nao tenho senao. 
Nao tern mais do que dizer- 
Nao ha formdsa sem senao- 



208 
LESSON CCVIIL 

SEtfA.0, ETC. 

Except, less, only, only- 



No one but my father. 
Nothing more, except. 
All but an affront. 
I have nothing but. 
You have only to say. 
No beauty without a but. 



Eu esquecer-me-hia de tudo menos de urn amor puro 
e ardente. Nao se esta senao ao pe do liime. Elle nao 
tern outra culpa senao a de ter obedecido a lei do pro- 
pheta. Ninguem nos ve se^ao Deus. Nao tenho se^ao 
papel ordinario. Tudo e merecedor de respeito, menos o 
infeliz que vos falla. Nao achei se^ao homems. Nao 
espero senao pelas siias ordens. Nao faco outra cousa 
senao tossir. Nao e senao um aguaceiro. Nao faz senao 
conversar. Nao quero escrever senao um bilhete. Nao 
entrei senao para saber como estava Y. S. 



It is nothing hut water. I only eat twice a day. A 
miserable system is that of those who admit no other 
light than that of reason. "We have here hut five loaves. 
It is nothing hut an invention. This excellent man had 
nothing hut a limited income. The letter contained no- 
thing hut the usual words. During the whole three days, 
I did nothing hut write to Laura. He leaves nothing hut 
ruins. He knows no mother hut me. He has nothing hut 
an old coat. They have only a very small salary. He 
had no fault hut laziness. 

* " Se nao " means if not ; as, " Elles mdstrao se nao mutua ami- 
zade, ao menos nmtuo respeito." 



209 



LESSON CCIX. 

THAT DE QTTE.* 



Sem se lembrarem de que.f 
Este sera o signal de que, etc. 
Nao sou dfgno de que entres na,etc. 
Nao ba de que.% 
Peca que lhe deem de* beber. 



Without remembering that. 
This shall be the sign that. 
I am not worthy that you, etc. 
That is nothing. 
Call for something* to drink. 



Com a differ enga de que o periodo conta-se por annos. 
Becordei-me de que ja nem pai nem irma tinha. Elle 
dava visiveis signaes de que o sen coracao nao estava 
sereno. Avisa-lo-hei de que deve comparecer. Queixa- 
vao-se os povos de que o abbade mandava, etc. Yasco 
tremia de que o segredo fatal lhe escapasse. Todos se 
queixavao de que os tempos nao erao prosperos. Esta 
certo de que os lencoes estejao bem seccos ? Sem se 
lembrarem de que o medico disse hontem a tarde. Sinto 
muito queixar-me de que o secretario escreveu. Estou 
perfeitamente seguro de que estou dizendo a verdade. 



He remembered that he had invited the general and 
two friends to dinner. I am not certain that the sheets 
are dry. He will convince himself that his faith is weak. 
Without my remembering that the man had gone. This 
shall be the sign that I send thee. If I remember what 
the old man told us. Impressed with the conviction 
that associations are a powerful element, etc. I am con- 
vinced that your creditor will not pay the £50. Be sure 
that the bed is well-aired. I remembered that he had 
lost his brother at Cawnpore. 

* De, etc. De que often means " something]' as, " De-me de 
que beber," Give me something to drink. 

f Que is pronounced que when it finishes a sentence, as in Nao 
ha de que; otherwise it is pronounced que (e mute), as in Nao sou 
digno de que entres na, etc. 

X Equal to " Pray don't mention it j" or, " It's not worth men- 
tioning." 



210 

LESSON CCX, 

PREPOSITIONS OF EXISTENCE AND STATU, 



Em. 

Sobre, sob, entre. 
Ante, apds, contra. 
Com, sem. 
Dentro de. 



In, on, at, into. 

Upon, under, between, an, at. 

Before, after, against. 

With, without. 

Within. 



No inverno. Em casa. Em guerra. Em methodo 
breve. Em consciencia. Em ponto. Em Londres. 
Esta em si. Eicou em terra. Estive em Africa. Vai em 
biisca d'elle. Em punicao dos seus peccados. Ee um 
em outro. Em acabando, irei. Nos nossos tempos. Ee 
riia em riia. Esta sobre a mesa. Sobre longa conside- 
racao. Toma sobre si a ciilpa. Sob a figura de Mentor, 
Sob sen amparo. Entre limas arvores. Entre nds fique 
o segredo. Le a carta entre si. Ea-lo-hei com prazer. 
Sem ceremonia. Com tantas attencoes. Ante os dlhos. 



At all times. In Paris. In England. From door to 
door. Straws formed into a flower. In three days. It 
is in the drawer. In proof of his friendship. Above out 
strength. The Queen reigns over the people. The war 
in Asia. He went from one to the other. The book is 
on the table. Having dined, I shall go out. Your friend 
is not himself. He will do it with much pleasure. He 
will pay in advance. The man voted against me. With- 
out saying a word. Without delay. Without reason. 
He dines at the inn. He is at home. Amongst friends, 
I shall be there within an hour. 



211 



LESSON CCXI. 



PREPOSITIONS OE ACTION. 



De ; desde ; por. 
Por. 

A ; ate ; para. 
Ate esse ponto. 
Para com. 



Of, from, by, than ; since ; by. 
Through, by means of. 
To, at ; till; for; towards. 
So far. 
Towards. 



Peco-lhe por favor. Delas stias drdens. Da minha 
parte. Se eu vier por Coimbra. Veiu de Eranca. Da 
choupana ao palacio. Em menos de tres annos. Em vasos 
de metal. Cheio ^'agua. O pobre do bomem. Portas 
de ouro. E de Lisboa. Edicao para uso do Collegio. 
Elle sain de casa. Desde entao. Desde as tres boras ate 
as quatro. De dia. Capdz de ensinar. Viver de peixe. 
Saltar de alegria. Diante de mim. De madrugada. Elle 
se aparta do seu dever. De Eunchal a Machico ba tres 
leguas. A juizo do cirurgiao. Irei a Londres. 



A marble statue.* A writing master. I learned it by 
beart. One by one. From Madrid to Lisbon. Till that 
moment. He must go to Santarem. From man to man. 
The thief of a boy! I shall return through Grermany, in 
less than four months. Tour friend is from Spain. At 
3 o'clock. He is of a good family. A wind-mill. They 
live on fish. In the opinion of the lawyer. Erom Eun- 
chal to the Mount. He will go to Braganza. I must do 
my duty towards my pupils. Since then, I have not seen 
him. The poor woman ! 

* Such forms are translated as if " statue of marble." 



212 
LESSON CCXII. 

USES OF PABA. 



Vai para Franca. 

O amor para com o fflho. 

Trabalho para ganhar. 

Para o dia seguinte. 

Esta, para partir. 

Muito bom para xxm principiante. 



He is going to France. 

TuO\efor the son. 

I work to gain. 

For the following day. 

He is about to start. 

Very goodybr a beginner. 



Vou para Lisboa. Yai para casa d'elle. Esta para 
chover. Quero os sapatos^anz hqje. Habilidade/>ar« as 
lettras. Para dentro do mar. TJnia viagem para as Jn- 
dias. Para confirm acao d'esta verdade. Tenho hora 
dada para tratar de negdcios. Deus sabe para que. 
Para a outra vez. Vou tocar para saber^ Agua quente 
para lavarmos as maos. Para cima. Elle nao presta 
para nada. Para que Y. S. o saiba. De mim para mim. 
Ha oito para ndve annos. 61he para mim. Para a 
outra parte. Yestidos para os hdspedes. 



This bouse is for tbe countess. This pencil is for 
drawing. He is strong enough to walk. He is not the 
man for that. A house for the poor. John works for 
the public good. On the other side. Towards the end 
of the month. Much advanced for his age. We are just 
going to start. He is gone ^-stairs. They have gone 
down. Towards the south. For the future. A child of 
8 to 10 years. Four or five leagues off. A remedy for 
all diseases. He went off to France. This book is for a 
beginner. 



!1S 



LESSON CCXIII. 

USES OF POR.* 



Os males causados por Joao. 
Por toda a Xsia ; por porta. 

Por anno, mez, semana, dfa. 
Por dez annos, por culpado. 
Feito por forca, por vergonha. 
A dbra esta por fazer. 



The evils caused by John. 
Throughout Asia, through the 

gale. 
Per annum, month, week, day. 
Por ten years. As guilty. 
Done by force, out of shame. 
The work is not done. 



Por agora. Ir por vinho. Palavra por palavra. 
Trocar vinho por azeite. Por douto que seja. Por mim, 
ficarei aqui. Por todo o reino. V. S. nao o tera por 
menos de dez patacas. Eu passarei por Portugal. A 
razao de vinte por cento. Deixarao-n'o por morto. Eu 
tenho-o por meu amigo. Por mar e por terra. Vai pelo 
medico. Por exemplo^ Por inveja. Por toda a vida. 
Reputado por sabio. A noite irei ^>or sua casa. Peco-lhe 
pela nossa amizade. Um vale por muitos. Eu intercedi 
por Scipiao. A obra fi.cdu. por acabar. Pelas duas horas 
da tarde. 



For the space of a year. For money. For 160 dollars 
a year. .5y the force of friendship. i?y this letter. We 
must go for water. He exchanges wine for bread. As 
for me, I shall go. I'll not give the book for less than 
5 dollars. He pays at the rate of 10 per cent. He re- 
turns to Germany by Erance. I shall call on you about 
4 this afternoon. We must send for the doctor. How- 
ever rich he may be. Done by John. £50 per annum. 
For many ages. For two pounds. Out of spite. He 
translates verbally. The robbers left him for dead. 



Por'' is a verb; (i por" a preposition. 



214 



LESSON CCXIY. 

PKEPOSITIONAL PHEASES WITH " DE.' 



Antes,* diante,* dentro, detraz. 
Debaixo, em ciina (a cima), alem, 

atraz. 
Defronte, acerca, ardda, emrdda. 
Depois, ao reddr, em torno, ao 

longo, abaixo. 



Before, before, within, after. 
Under, upon, beyond, behind. 

Facing, about, round, around. 
After, round, in turn, along, 
below. 



Antes do sen nascimento. Antes de quiuta feira. 
Didnte de mini. Did?ite do Rei. Dentro do seu paiacio. 
Dentro do meu coracao. Dentro do anno. Dentro da ci- 
dade. Detraz da porta. Detraz do paiacio. Alem d'isso. 
Leia didnte de mini. Debdixo da mesa. Depois de ceia. 
Depois de tantas promessas. Depois de Cicero. Depois 
d\4manha. Depois de jantar. Fora da casa. Estar de- 
fronte de outro. ]N"a roda do anno. Fora da graca. Fora 
de perigo. Fora de tempo. Acerca do nmro. Acerca 
d'este negdcio. Ferto do rio. Ferto de tres horas. 



Before the creatiot). Before the house. He stood he- 
fore the fire. After the flood. BeMnd me. Within the 
house. Out of the kingdom. Out of town. 0w£ of 
doors. Beyond measure. BeMnd the house. Tinder the 
chair. After dinner. After so much work. Near the 
house. Facing the church. He went round the house. 
Along the sea-coast. Over his head. Zypo^ the table. 
From off' the chair. He sat below them. He is out of 
danger. I told him about this. Near 10 o'clock. Beside 
me. From beyond the river. Beyond sea. Under the 
show of friendship. Before breakfast. 



* "Antes" is before as to &e : 



diante^ is before as to pZace or 



215 



LESSON CCXV. 



Junto. 

Pegado, na casa pegada. 

Quanto. 

Ate. 

Conforme, segiindo. 

Tocante. 



Close. 

Near, next door. 

As to. 

Till. 

According to, suitable. 

Touching. 



A minha casa estiijzhito a sua. Junto a. cidade. Pe- 
gado as cousas do miiiido. Pegado aos jardins de Cesar. 
Quanto a dispiita. Triste ate a morte. Isso agrada ate 
aos briitos. Ingrato ate ao pai. Desde as dez horas ate 
as onze. Ate aos olhos. Ate a primeira. Julgou con- 
forme as leis. Viver conforme aos dictames da razao. 
JNada sei tocante ao assiimpto. Segundo S. Jeronymo. 
Na casa pegada a minha. Junto as margens do mar. 
Esta lista sera junta aos estatiitos. Quanto a esse ponto. 
Conforme a lista do governador. 



TiZZ the month of June. As to this subject. Accord- 
ing to your orders. According to the promise he made. 
He knows absolutely nothing in relation to the subject 
in question. The governor's palace is near the fortress 
of St. George. The prince was ungrateful, even to his 
father. As to the dispute, I think I shall leave it in 
the hands of the governor. I shall stay at home till 4 
o'clock. His quinta (villa) is very near the sea-shore. 
I know nothing relative to the subject of which you speak. 
We ought to act according to the dictates of reason. 
You must judge according to the laws. 



215 
LESSON CCXYI. 

PEEPOSITION WITHOUT "a" OE " DE." 



A, ate. 

Com, conforrne, contra. 
Durante, cle, desde. 
Entre, em, segiindo, salvo. 
Para, por, perante, sob. 
Sobre, traz, sem, tocante. 



At, till. 

With, according to, against. 

During, of, since. 

Between, in, according to, except. 

For, by, before, under. 

Upon, bebind, witbout, about. 



You a Londres. Nao chegarei a tempo. Nao sei 
inontar a cayallo. D'aqui a tres dias, A seu gosto. Ao 
principio. Elle foi a casa. Cara a cara. Ate Roma. 
Ate as orelhas. Com a ajuda ^'um amigo. Com cortezia. 
Com armas prohibidas. Conforrne o meu parecer. Con- 
forme o seu merecimento. Eallou contra mim. Contra a 
sua vontade. Durante o inverno. Yem de Lisboa. 
Elle foi a pe desde Funchal ate Camaeho. Desde o 
primeiro ate o ultimo. Conforrne este piano. Desde o 
herco. Sem dinheiro. Para mim. JEm Paris. Entre 
nos. Perd n te o juiz. 



I sball return to Spain. The bouse is on tbe right 
hand. He goes on foot. They travel by night. He lives 
in London. He speaks with elegance. According to their 
principles. The day after. According to his custom. 
I saw him face to face. Dinner is already on the table. 
During fourteen years. To the east and to the north. 
Except Arragon and Navarre. JJn der the feet. Accord- 
ing to this plan. According to the indications. From 
that period. Erom the beginning to the end. He is at 
his ease. He lives in the English fashion. A man 
let ween 20 and 30 years of age. 



217 



LESSON CCXVII. 

PREPOSITIONAL IDIOMS. 



Em lhe morrendo o pai. 
Nao podemos ir de bdtas. 
Sem irmos vestidos em corpo.* 
Precisa toma-lo emjejum. 
Sem apparato nem ostentacao. 
Pelo que me toca. 



As soon as his father is dead. 
We can't go in boots. 
Without going in full dress. 
It must be taken fasting. 
Without form or show. 
As far as I am concerned. 



Precisa ir de sapatos. Em nossa procura. Urn doutor 
em leis. Tomar de renda. P6r maos violentas em Joao. 
Bosquejar ao lapis. Yende a peso. Pagavel a vista. 
G-ente havida por incapaz de enganar. A 60 dias vista. 
A minha espera. Elles gostao de orar em pe nas Syna- 
gdgas. Ao alcdnce de toda a gente. Nao ha obra, por 
grande que seja, que se nao pdssa encurtar. Servir de 
segundo pai. Em eu Undo boa cama. Sem mostrar vai- 
dade nem soberba. Caindo em terra. Em acabando, irei. 
Os homens feitos d imdgem de Deus. Jantar na riia. 



He comes to (em) his assistance. Blindfold. Waiting 
for us. Above the level of the sea. By good fortune. 
Prom sea to sea. Tou must take that medicine fasting. 
Your brother is a doctor of laws. They laid violent hands 
on the treasures in the palace. Yon cannot go to court 
in boots. In search of you. To dine in the open air. 
I gave him a bill at 60 days' sight. This book is pub- 
lished at a price within reach of everybody. The General 
ordered the troops to march at night. He leaps/br joy. 
I am dying of hunger. He is how-legged. As soon as I 
have done, he may go. 



* Literally, "in body. 



218 
LESSON CCXVIIL 

PHRASEOLOGY — PREPOSITIONS AND NOTTNi 



A pressa, a rios, aos centos. 
A logares, a condicao de que. 
A pena de, aos montoes, a parte, 

a propdsito. 
Ao presente, a tempo, a mhldo, 

ao menos. 
&.$ a vessas, a final, a bdrdo, a, 

espera. 



Fast, in streams, in hundreds. 
In places, on condition that. 
On pain of, in heaps, aside, by 

the by (apropos). 
At present, in time, often, at 

least. 
Upside- down, finally, on board, 

in wait, or waitina. 



Afdlta de chiivas. Morto a lanca. Este rio a logares 
tern 10 bracas de fundo. Elle descobre ao Unge dois 
homens. Devo tomar a direita ou d esquerda? Fica- 
me o pe mais d vontdde. Yamos a pe. Vai a rdda do 
mundo. Ao prdprio. rei estava n'esse tempo nafldr 
da idade. Com muito prazer. A primeira vista. A tdda 
a pressa. Ao principio. Ao romper do dia. Rio a bdioco. 
A propdsito do que V. S. diz. Nao obstante isto, ambos 
erao, etc. Eu estou na cama, mas o velho esta de cama. 
Estarnos a espera. Escreve a propdsito. Fdra de pro- 
pdsito. 



Bound his heart. Little by little he lost all his money. 
Down the river. Apropos of what he was saying. They 
arrived in time. They all spoke at once. They went on 
foot. This river, in places, is very deep. The man is in 
the prime of life. The boat went down the river. Not- 
withstanding this, both were in bed. The men were in 
hundreds. He came on purpose. The fields suffer for 
want of rain. The ship has gone round the world. At 
first sight, he fled. At break of day the ship went down 
the river. 



219 



LESSON CCXIX. 

PHRASE0L0OY — PREPOSITIONS, ADJECTIVES, AND NOUNS. 

On purpose, suddenly, from 

time to time. 
By starts, slowly, by heart> on 

the away. 
In order, in short, above, at 

home. 
Quite, without fail, on foot, or 

standing. 



De proposito, — improviso, — 

quando em quando. 
De salto, ■ — vagar, — cor, — 

caminho. 
Em drdem, — fim, — cima, — 

casa. 
De todo, sem falta, em pe. 



Vestido de marinheiro. De piira numanidade me 
soccorreu. De tres em tres dias. Em cima de nds. As 
vagas accumulavao-se em serras. Por baixo de capa. 
JEm lim ella lhe diz. Em quanto impdrta isso ? Anda de 
galdpe. Esta em pe. Sobre tudo. Antes de tudo. Em 
desdrdem. Em porcoes. Em rebanhos. Na idade de 
pouco niais de vinte annos. O frasco virado de boca para 
baixo. Em primeiro logar. Elle esta em casa. Sem 
termo. Sem limites. Em lima palavra. De mdugrddo. 
Nao podemos ir de iotas nem as senhoras de chapeu. 
muito hem. 



He was dressed as a soldier. From six to eight years. 
It is raining above the sea. I see the waves in moun- 
tains. Gro slowly. Send the books to me, without fail, 
to-morrow. I am in doubt. He is not at home. I stand 
sentinel. It lies at the bottom. He was in danger of 
being drowned. The poor fellow is beside himself. 
What news ? I shall see him on the way. Go in peace. 
I am in earnest. I know him by sight. He knows me 
byname. With haste. In place of that word. He went 
to the ball in boots. They were dressed as sailors. The 
child went on all fours. 



220 



LESSON CCXX. 

PHRASEOLOGY — PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, AND NOTTNS. 



Para cima, — baixo, — diante, 

-tras. 
Para entao, para outra vez. 
Para casa, — fora, — dentro. 
Porventiira, — costume, — cima. 
Por medo, — amor, — favor, — 

isso. 



Above, below, before, behind. 

By then, next time. 
Home, out, in. 
By chance, — custom, above. 
For fear, — love, by favour, 
therefore. 



V ou para cima. Vamos para hdixo. Ya mais para 
diante. Mais para trdz ! Esta para sair para fora. Sem 
tomar por isso o titulo. O livro esta. Id em cima. Muito 
perto. Hdntem de tarde. Hontem pela manha. Depois 
d'ainanha. Antes d'hontem. Ha umito tempo. Por 
metades. So por este meio. Amanha pela manha. Mais 
adidnte. Antes mais que menos. Para entao jd teremoa 
acabado a dbra. Os cabellos atados por trdz. Por 
essa razao. Yamos para cdsa. Anda para diante. Tenho- 
o por ignordnte. JSTao o tenho^or doido. Passe por Id. 
So por so. 



I am going upstairs. They are going down. He is 
out. They will go out. I went yesterday morning. He 
will return to-morrow morning. I consider them mad. 
Go more that ivay. Eurther back. I must go home. At 
last he went in. The man is very near. For fear. I 
believe them mad. He considers me ignorant. For the 
same reason. For want of space. On account of indis- 
position. The boy is upstairs. Go on. Above the water. 
By chance, he fell into the water. Let us go upstairs to 
the library. They consider him rather foolish. 



221 



LESSON CCXXI. 

PHBASEOLOQY — COtfJUPTCTIOirS. 



Assim asshn, assim seja, como. 
Ainda quando, amda agora, de 

mddo que. 
Nao so, mas tambem. 
Nao so, mas ate ; nao — senao. 
Com tanto que. 
A saber isso ; a ser assim. 



So so ; so be it ; as. 

Even when, but just now, so that. 

Not only, but also. 

Not only, but even ; only. 

So that. 

If I had known it ; that being so. 



na paz como na guerra. Assim elle queira. 
Com tanto que. JEmqudnto ao que. Borem com tiido 
isso. Belo contrdrio. Como quer que. Tanto mdis. A 
nao ser isso, teria sido o seu amigo. Amda agora chegou. 
fille residiu quasi sempre em Portugal. Eabulas recebidas 
nao so pelos chronistas, mas ate pe]os historiadores. 
Entao, muito embora. Assim como tambem declarava. 
Assim se resolveu. E mais duvidoso ainda. Cabellos 
espessos, posto que ja grisalhos. Escrevia como fallava. 
Assim como appareceu. Assim como assim, estou decidido 
a casar. 



So that he was seldom able to work. It is hut 12 
o'clock. Why so ? They are not so. His leg is but so 
so. But for him, I should have lost my life. But yet, 
Madam. He will find but very few. But even kings must 
die. May he do so to me, and more also. A courtier 
and a patron too. If, however, you cannot go. This is 
still more doubtful. Not only praised by the people, 
but even honoured by the king. On the contrary, I shall 
remain at home. As he also promised. I should not go, 
knowing this. The man wrote as he spoke. Even when 
I went away, he was not satisfied. 



222 
LESSON CCXXII. 

NOUS'S REQUIRING "de" OR "a."* 

Means, favour, honour, pleasure. 



Meio, favor, honra, gosto, prazer, 

bondade, idea, caso. 
Esperanca, necessidade, defensao. 
Consequencia, resolucao, certeza. 

Resistencia, aversao, obedieneia. 



Hope, need, defence. 
Consequence, resolution, cer- 
tainty. 
Resistance, aversion, obedience. 



No meio de lima existencia de continuos combates. 
O pensamento de fugir. No caso de nao poder dar, etc. 
As esperdngas de obter. A idea de near senhor. A ne- 
cessidade de confiar a defensao da patria a este principe. 
Em consequencia ^' isto. Tenha a bondade de ver. Ella 
tomou a resolugao de divorciar-se. Com o intento de 
accommetter Affonso VI. Accessao ao tbrono. A sua 
volta ao Aragao. Em relagdo ao conde. Cara a cara. 
Amor a patria. Com relagao a situacao. Tern medo a 
agua? IJma longa resistencia a fortuna e a actividade 
do rei. 



I have the honour to be. Have the goodness to pass 
me the water. I am glad to bave an opportunity of being 
useful to you. The fear of being taken. Tbe pleasure 
of seeing you. It is time to go tbere. "Without loss of 
time. He had means of escaping. The result of this en- 
terprise. The news of the invasion. A method of doing. 
On account of illness. Adherence to the principles of jus- 
tice. In relation to that question. A constant inclination 
to moderate principles. Homage to the see of Borne. A 
lesson to the people. The only remedy for tbe evil. 

* The preposition which a word takes after it is called its com,' 
plement. Many of the complements in Portuguese follow the 
English idiom. 



223 



LESSON CCXXIII. 

NOUNS EEQUIRING " POE " OR " PAEA." 

Prayers, resignation. 
Enthusiasm, indifference. 
Predilection, classification. 
Propensity, motives, instrument. 
Loyalty, ability, charity. 
Assistance, walk, liberty. 



Preces, 

Enthusiasmo, indifferenca. 
Predilec^ao classificacao. 
Propensao, motivos, rnstrumento. 
Lealdade, habilidade, caridade. 
Coadjuvacao, passeio, liberdade. 



Amor pelo filho. Preces por chiiva. TJina predileccao 
por nossa pafcria. A classificacao dos habitantes por 
sexos, idades e profissoes. Enthusiasmo pela musica. 
Amor pelos homens. Indifferenca por tiido. JDesapego 
pelo mundo. Correio para Inglaterra por navios e pelos 
paquetes. camliino para ir a cidade. A propensao 
para a ociosidade. amor para o filho. Lealdade para 
seus principes. unico meio para os destruir. Liber- 
ddde para todos. progrdmma para a exposicao. A sua 
coadjuvagao para este objecto. 



There are reasons for believing. Walks for foot pas- 
sengers. Better instruments for this. Eull liberty for 
all those who, etc. An ample theatre for ambition. 
Various precautions for the defence. An excellent re- 
medy for toothache. An advantage for a son. Grou/nds 
for hoping. £ aim for your wounds. A reason for sup- 
posing me dead. Emigration to Demerara. Prayers for 
rain. He has a predilection for port-wine. The classifi- 
cation of the boys by ages. Enthusiasm for the drama. 
A subscription for the poor sailors. The way to Camacha. 
Love o/men. 



224 



LESSON CCXXIV. 



tfOTJTN'S EEQTJIBI^G " EM " OR " ENTEE. 1 



Desdrdem, prazer, influencia. 
Entrada, promocao, confianca. 
Perigo, mudanca, culpa. 
Desintelligencia, differenca, d 

tinccao. 
Allianca, vontade, emulacao. 



Disorder, pleasure, influence. 
Entrance, promotion, confidence. 
Danger, change, fault. 
Misunderstanding, difference, dis- 
tinction. 
Alliance, will, emulation. 



A influencia no ammo do rei. TJma desordem no 
estado. A entrada no poder do conde Derby. ^Elle foi 
moderado em epochas em que houve perigo em o ser. A 
promocao em honras e em lucros. A sua confianca em 
Deus. TJma mudanca na constitui9ao. Como se tivesse 
culpa em executar as ordens do rei. Um tratado entre 
os reis. A paz entre os dois inimigos. As negocia9oes 
entre os gabinetes de Londres e Paris. TJma allianca 
entre os estados. Um combafe entre a guar da e os pai- 
sanos. A luta entre a humanidade e a justi9a. 



The influence of this belief on the mind of the queen. 
There is danger in being a minister of state. His^ro- 
motion in honour was very rapid. A change in the go- 
vernment of Spain. The communication between Lisbon 
and Santarem. The peace between the two nations was 
broken. Harmony between these two souls. The space 
between the armies. Connivance between the thieves and 
the officers. A struggle between the king and the par- 
liament. A bad feeling between the sisters. A treaty 
between the kings. 



225 



LESSON CCXXV. 

NOUNS REQUIRING (1) "COM, 11 (2) " CONTRA.' 



(l)Pacto, reconcilia9ao, intimidade. 
Allian9a, contacto, harmonia. 
Combate, guerra. 
(2) Conspira9ao, suspeita. 
Tentativa, violencia, barreira. 
Querxa, reac9ao, abrigo. 



Compact, reconciliation, intimacy . 
Alliance, contact, harmony. 
Combat, war. 
Conspiracy, suspicion. 
Attempt, violence, barrier. 
Complaint, reaction, shelter. 



O resentimento contra o marido. TJma empreza con- 
tra os rebeldes. Lhe ficou dentro da alma o espinho da 
ma vontdde contra o seu successor. TJma conspiracao 
contra o imperador. Suspeitas odidsas contra a sua vi- 
ctima. Urn abrigo contra os revezes da fortuna. pacto 
do principe com o conde. Pela sua allidnga com os chris- 
taos. De accordo com elle. TJma lucta com o rei. Desejo 
ter conhecimento com elle. Guerras com os inimigos do. 
rei. S. Petersburgo estara em contacto com o Mar-Negro. 
As opinioes dos seiis amigos estavao & accordo com as siias. 



The reconciliation with the emperor. An alliance 
with the E-omans. His intimacy with my brother. In 
immediate contact with the king. The complaints against 
him. They had committed violence against the people. 
They raised barriers against the torrent. The reaction 
of the Visigoths against the Arabs. A good shelter 
against the reverses of fortune. In harmony with the 
ideas. Prom the conversation of the king with the pil- 
grim. In that terrible combat with the Russians. This 
little house is a shelter against the reverses of fortune. 
I must raise a barrier against the invasion of the enemy. 



226 
LESSON CCXXVI. 

NOUNS KEQUIKING " SOBRE" (ON, OYER). 

Discussao, reflexoes, proposta. I Discussion, reflections, proposal. 
Correspondencia, juizo, observa- Correspondence, judgment, obser- 

cao. vation. 

Influencia, estiidos, supremacia. ' Influence, studies, supremacy. 
Accao, conqufsta, ponte, yigilan- j Action, conquest, bridge, vigi- 

cia. lance. 

Tratado, artigo, prestador, noti- j Treaty, article, lender, news. 

cia. 



Na discussao sobre o acto. Toda a correspondencia 
solve qualquer objecto. nosso juizo sobre tao impor- 
tante discussao. Algumas reflexoes sobre este assumpto. 
Propostas a camara sobre finaucas. A acgao sobre as for- 
cas productivas da terra. TJm tratado sobre os lhnites 
das fronteiras. A promessa de sdque sobre o Porto. As 
nossas observacoes sobre a questao. JEstudos sobre o 
Christianisino. Dois artigos sobre as moedas Portuguezas. 
Elle tinha auctoriddde superior sobre a Peninsula. Supre- 
macia sobre a Peninsula. Supremacia sobre os outros. 
L m prestador sobre penhor. 



The conquests over the Spaniards. Information on all 
necessary points. Watchfulness over this business. Our 
correspondence on this subject. A few reflections on his 
conduct. A powerful influence on the public mind. The 
action of the water on the stone. A lender of money on 
pledges. He has entire supremacy over the minds of his 
followers. Two articles on the Eastern question. The 
general had no authority over his officers. The action of 
the water on tlie walls of the city. My opinion on this 
subject. 



227 
LESSON CCXXVII. 

ADJECTIVES WITH li DE." 



Aeompanhado, occupado, dis- 

tante. 
Bordado, matizado, tirado. 
Capaz, digno, rfco, dependente. 
Indigena, facil, privado, cego. 
Prdprio, sedento, inconsolavel. 



Accompanied, busy, distant. 

Bordered, decked, drawn. 
Capable, worthy, rich, dependent. 
Native, easy, deprived, blind. 
Proper, thirsting, inconsolable. 



Acompanhdda de seu augusto esposo. A palrneira e 
indigena ^'estas ilhas. Plantas aromaticas prdprias dos 
climas da zona torrida. Uma roupa borddda de ouro. 
Capdz de dirigir. Banido ^'esta camara. As noticias 
sao destituidas <^'interesse. Urn trbncopartido da arvore. 
Uma idea tirdda dos livros Bomanos. E digno de notar-se. 
Sedento de vinganca. Rico de despojos. Dependente da 
coroa. O prelado suspenso do officio pastoral. Brivddo 
de ornato. Esta planta e propria da Ilha da Madeira, 
Aquelle distincto senhor e digno de ndssa admiracao. 



Accompanied by models. 'Extracted from the best 
writers. Occupied with graver studies. Deprived of 'your 
estimable society. These letters are more easy to write. 
The imagination occupied with the principal object. In- 
consolable for the absence of Ulysses. A league distant 
from the sea. Cares inseparable from the throne. The 
shepherdesses crowned ivith laurel. Covered with con- 
fusion. He showed himself indifferent to these successes. 
Territories covered with woods. Deprived of sight, Blind 
with anger. JPeopled with Jews. 



228 
LESSON CCXXVIIL 

ADJECTIYES WITH "PARA? 



Bom, efficaz, proveitoso. 
Preparado, destinado, cdmmodo. 
Essencial, util, importante. 
Necessario, obrigatdrio, precise 
Prdprio, conveniente, achado. 
Satisfactdrio, sufficiente. 



Good, effectual, profitable. 
Prepared, destined, fit. 
Essential, useful, important. 
Necessary, binding, needful. 
Proper, convenient, found. 
Satisfactory, sufficient. 



Preparado para estas eventualidades. Noticias uteis 
para calculos e especulacoes. E miiito horn para a saude. 
Obrigatorio para as duas partes. Esta obra era destindda 
para a instruccao do Diique. Locaes proprios para ellas. 
Sera satisfactdrio para mim participar. Essencial para 
a dignidade do governo. Auctoridade sufficiente para se 
declarar superior. Tempo sufficiente para reflectir. As 
qualidades precisas para a paz. Urn dos meios mais 
efficdzes para consolidar. Este livrinho e destinado para 
o uso dos meninos Portugueses e Inglezes. 



Advantageous conditions for the inhabitants. Good 
for him. Prepared for those who had to fight. "Wood 
good for building. Site suitable for a factory. An event 
whose consequences were immense for the progress of 
civilization. Destined for the habitation. Not less im- 
portant for the interest. Our verse is sweet enough to 
give all the effects. I must he prepared for these occasions. 
This climate is very good for people with chest-disease. 
It is satisfactory for me to say, that I am pleased. The 
most effectual means of saving him. 



229 
LESSON CCXXIX. 

ADJECTIVES AtfD PARTICIPLES WITH " POR 



Conhecido, distmcto, celebre. 
Povoado, habitado, illustre. 
Cercado, banhado, responsavel. 
Disperso, perseguido. 
Regido, conquistado, escolhido. 
Singular, notavel, famoso. 



Known, distinguished, famed. 
Peopled, inhabited, famous. 
Surrounded, bathed, responsible 
Scattered, persecuted. 
G-overned, conquered, chosen. 
Singular, notable, famous. 



Conhecida pela excellencia dos seus dleos. A Hespa- 
nlia foi povodda por diias niigracoes. O territorio cer- 
cado pelo occea.no. __ Troia foi tomdda pelos Gregos. Dis- 
persos pelo paiz. Essa provincia era regida por umle- 
gado. Umsitiomuitoyre^e^^^o^eZosliabitantes. Todos 
distinctos pelo merito pessoal. Os paizes banhddos pelo 
mar. Celebre pelo importante cargo que, etc. JRoubddo 
pelos piratas. Favorecido por esta eircunstancia. Urn 
povo singular por opinioes religidsas. Coimbra, famosa 
por sua universidade. Epsom, notavel por- suas aguas. 



Sheffield, celebrated for its cutlery. Brighton, known 
for its sea-baths. This region was inhabited by many 
barbarous nations. The country was at last conquered 
by Charles the Great. He was chosen successor to the 
crown. He escaped, followed by Grarcia. A stranger, 
but illustrious by blood. I am responsible for these 
things. This cause aided by many others. The state 
surrounded by the sea. Sebastopol was taken by the 
allies. Waterloo was famous for its battle. England 
was peopled by various races. Caldas, noted for its warm 
baths. 



230 



LESSON CCXXX. 



ADJECTIVES WITH "EM. 



Envolto, posto, convertido, la- 

vado. 
Dividido, interessado, attento. 
Iuexoravel, sepultado, sito. 
Util, fiel, destro, usado, felfz. 
Fundado, talhado, disfarcado. 
Transformado, trocado, submer- 

gido. 



Involred, placed, converted, 

bathed. 
Divided, interested, attentive. 
Inexorable, buried, situated. 
Useful, faithful, clever, used. 
Founded, cut out, disguised. 
Transformed, changed, submer- 



Envolto em obsciira noite. Dividido em diias partes. 
Os habitadores diversos em racas, em costumes, em lin- 
guas. Os prisioneiros forao postos em liberdade. Urn 
pacote embrulbado em papei pardo. Inexoravel em me 
condemnor. Mais util na pratica. Eundado na impossi- 
bilidade. Minerva transforniada em Mentor. Submer- 
gido nets profundezas do mar. Absorto eon urn. profundo 
silencio. Talhado na rdcha viva. Juno disfarcada em 
velha. Alguns convertidos em pdrcos. Yulcano lavado 
em suor. Interessado em o enganar. Sepultado nas 
ruinas. 



The Egyptians divided into bands. Eaithful in keeping 
a secret. So attentive in listening to all. Men dexterous 
in the construction of ships. A king skilled in war. 
Eaithful in his alliances. Rivalry converted into pro- 
found hate. Involved in thick darkness. These men 
divided in two parties. The soldier was set at liberty. 
The poor workman was bathed in sweat. The soldiers 
were buried in the ruins of the fortress. The boy was 
interested in finishing the work. Useful in labours. 
Gaul was divided into three provinces. 



Coberto,* cego, contente, satis 

feito. 

Compativel, tratavel, parallelo. 
Associado, identificado, mistu 

rado. 
Parecido, commensuravel. 
Casado, inquieto, humilde. 
Curvado, armado, conhecido. 



231 
LESSON CCXXXI. 

ADJECTIVES WITH " COM." 

Covered, blind, content, satisfied. 



Compatible, tractable, parallel. 
Associated, identified, mixed. 

Like, commensurate. 
Married, restless, humble. 
Bent, armed, know. 



Similhante estado nao e compativel com o progresso. 
A Lusitania antiga acha-se associdda com Portugal. Um 
filho tao parecido com seu pai. Menelau era casado com 
Helena. Curvado com o peso dos friictos. Pygnialiao 
cego com a paixao que tinha por ella; Contente com poder 
salvar a vida. Tratdvel com os seus visinhos. Inquieto 
com os progressos dos christaos. Os habitantes identifi- 
cddos com os E-omanos. Os indigenas misturddos com as 
outras racas. Armado* com armas prohibidas. Furioso 
com a resposta. 



Not contented with making himself feared. The 
streets parallel with the rivers. The sun covered with 
clouds. Content with the wages. Charity is not com- 
patible with hatred. Punishment commensurate with 
crime. Grood and humble with all. Vineyards mixed 
with orchards. The height known now by the name of 
Bairro-alto. Meets laden with spoils. Madeira favoured 
with the best climate in the world. He was associated 
with the count in that undertaking. They were in time 
mixed with the invaders. The street was parallel ivith 
the river. 

* Takes also de ; "coberto de trapos." 



232 
LESSON CCXXXII. 

TEEBS EEQUIEIKQ- "DE," OF. 



Dispor, deixar, gostar, provar, 

morrer. 
Lembrar-se, esquecer-se, ausen- 

tar-se. 
Precisar, aproveitar-se, depender. 
Desesperar, cessar, sair, vir, pri- 

var-se. 



Dispose, leave, like, taste, try, 

die. 
Remember, forget, absent one's 

self. 
Want, avail one's self, depend. 
Despair, cease, go out, deprive, 

come. 



Disponha do seu criado. Deixemo-nos de comprhnen- 
tos. Nao gosto de tantas ceremonias. Ilorro de sede. 
Lembra-se d'isso ? Gosta de queijo ? Esqueci-me do 
seu nome. Bnderico se apossou da coroa. JPreciso das 
minhas botas. Aproveitdr-me-\\e\ do seu offerecimento. 
Elle e applaudido de to da a gente. Nao se me da d'isso. 
Elle ause?ita-se da minlia casa. Ella apeia-se do cavallo. 
Isto ndsce da sua negligencia. Accdrdo d'uvi sonho. 
Ella cdra de vergonha. Estou encantddo ^'isto. Isto nao 
depende de mim. Sustenta-se de trigo. Elle fdge do 
perigo. 



I remember this. He has forgotten the name. He 
does not like such forms. We like beef. I want a room. 
I shall avail myself of jour offer. He wept for joy. He 
fled for fear. I come from Lisbon. Overcome by pain. 
They absented themselves from the house. I jumped off 
the horse. What do you like to drink at dinner ? This 
filled him with indignation. Forgetful of the obligations 
contracted by the promise made to Alphonso. Try them 
both. He enjoys good health. I am persuaded of the 
contrary. Using the power. It is composed often. 



233 



LESSON CCXXXIII. 

VERBS EEQUIRLN G" SOB RE," UPON ; "ENTRE," BETWEEN. 

P6r, recair, lanear, arrojar. Put, fall, throw, hurl. 

Conversar, tomar, disputar, de- Converse, take, dispute, delibe- 

Hberar. . rate. 

Apertar, vigiar, discordar, cha- Tighten, watch, disagree, call. 

mar. 

Distinguir, metter, luctar, dividir. Distinguish, put, struggle, divide. 



Conversou sobre differentes materias. !Elle delibera 
sobre isto. Pondo sobre o liombro a cruz vermelha. 
Esta accusa9ao pesa sobre sl memoria de Henrique. Lan- 
9ar lima censiira severa sobre as leis. Discordamos sobre 
os meios. Arrojei-me sobre eile. As suspeitas tinhao 
recaido sobre o homem. TJma monarcliia repartida entre 
os tres filhos. A cidade fechada entre a bahia e o oceano. 
Apertado entre cabecos ingremes. Ha pouca differenca 
entre est as palavras. Chamdr a attencao publica sobre 
este acto. Nao podendo tomir sobre si. 



Struggling between remorse and love. They came to 
consult him on almost all subjects. Reflecting on this. 
The invisible world exercises an immense influence over 
us. I am not able to take wpon myself the expense. 
The sword raised above the head. Dividing amongst 
themselves the provinces of the Roman empire. He 
threw himself on the foe. Suspicions have fallen upon 
him, as the murderer of the count. He took the blame 
upon himself. Putting the poor old man on his shoulder, 
he left the city. There is much diiference between the 
languages of Spain and Portugal. 



234 



LESSON CCXXXIV. 

YEEBS BEQITIEISTG "ATE," TO; " CO NTRA," AGAINST. 

Chegar, ir, pelejar, levar. j Keacli, go, war, carry. 

Alcancar. j Attain. 

Marchar, votar, defender. j March, vote, defend. 

Murmurar, peccar, protestar. [ Murmur, sin, protest. 
Declamar, defender. Declaim, defend. 



A devastate* chegou ate os districtos da Idanha. 
You ate Coimbra. Alexandre foi ate a India. E neces- 
sario pelejar ate veneer. Levava ate mil sol dados. Mar- 
chou contra o rei. Elles votarao contra o projecto. As 
folhas francezas alcancao ate 2 de Marco. 'Ellepartiu 
para o Oriente. Nao tern razao para murmurar contra o 
amo. bosque chega ate o mar. A Providencia alcanca 
ate as avezinhas. Pecca contra Deus. Elle defende a 
causa da liberdade contra os tyrannos. O orador de- 
clainou contra a guerra. 



The English papers come down to the 16th of May. 
The general set off for North America. The pupil had 
no reason to murmur against the teacher. "We must 
fight till we win. Julius Caesar went as far as the river 
Thames. The rebels marched against the emperor. The 
president declaimed against the terms of the peace. 
Hofer defended the cause of liberty against the tyrant. 
The sad destruction reached to the very gates of the city. 
He sins against Grod in telling lies. He set out for Bala- 
clava in the steamer. He must vote against the measure. 
The rebels marched against the queen. 



235 

LESSON CCXXXY. 

VERBS REQUIRING "POR," TOR, BY. 



Esperar, designar, trabalhar. 
Pagar, dar, agradecer, trocar. 
Pedrr, perguntar, levar. 
Ir, haver, addptar, tomar. 
Arriscar, tomar, pugnar, passar. 
Vigiar, acudir, substituir. 



Hope, designate, work. 
Pay, give, tbank, change. 
Beg, ask or inquire, carry. 
Gro, hold, adopt, take. 
Pisk, take, fight, pass. 
Watch, help, substitute. 



Espere por inim. Quanto devo pagar por isso ? 
Quanto pede por semana ? A noite irei por sua casa. Es- 
pera elle pela resposta ? JEstou por isso. Fdgo por isso. 
Perguntei pela saiide de V. S. Comega por queimar isto. 
Y. S. passou pela minha casa ? Deite-se por terra. A 
Gralliza era regida por diversos condes. Tendo por fron- 
teira. Arriscdndo a vida pela monarcliia. !0ila vigidva 
pela seguranca da casa. Ir pelo mar. Quanto leva pela 
passagem ? _Dar-lhe-hei tres patacas por estes. Eico- 
lhe agradecido por esta visita. 



He waits for us. How much have we to pay for the 
horses ? How much does he ash a month ? To-morrow 
I shall call at jour house. He helps me. To substitute 
one expression/or another. He must wait for an answer. 
He called at his house. Give him a dollar for the dog. 
He risked his life for the country. He will throw him- 
self on the ground. You must watch for the safety of 
the ship. To fight for the laws. "We may begin by ex- 
amining this question. Praising him for the resolution. 
He designated him by this title. The love he felt for 
Egilona. He passes for a good man. 



236 

LESSON CCXXXVI. 

VERBS REQUIRING- "EM" IN, INTO, ON. 



Entrar, admittrr, converter. 
Empenhar-se, situar, influir. 
Deitar, dividir, residir, converter, 

achar. 
Gl-anhar, introduzir, envolver. 
Escrever, viver, folgar, encontrar. 



Enter, admit to, convert into. 
Engage in, situate, influence. 
Throw in, on ; divide, reside, 

find. 
Gain, introduce, involve. 
Write, live, rejoice, meet. 



Entremos rfesta mata. Veja no seu reldgio. Perco 
nHsso. Deite o cha nas chicaras. Granho n'isso um dia. 
Esta em casa. Consinto n'tsso. JNao posso dormir em 
terra. Tradiiza isto em Inglez. Deu com-sigo no chao. 
Dei no pensarnento do auctor. Isto ha de dar-lhe na 
cabeca. Anda em corpo. Esta em pe. Estou em duvida. 
Nao esta em perigo. O velho esta na cama v Portugal 
abiinda em vinhos. Convenho na proposta. Elle se des- 
faz em lagrimas. Pegou ffl'um pau. Ealhou na empreza. 
Cain no chao. Estamos no campo. 



He entered the town. He beat John in the race. He 
writes in good language. They enter into disputes. He 
had been introduced into the court. Involved in the 
struggle with Henry. The man seized a stick. He en- 
gaged in an enterprise. He throws wood on the fire. He 
writes with his own hand in the sand. Admitted to the 
court of the king. His actions lie buried in profouud 
darkness. A monastery situated in Burgundy. A monk 
influenced the affairs. To live in peace. He resided in 
Portugal. The merchant rejoices in traffic. I shall be 
at home. It consists in forming a new kingdom. 



237 
LESSON CCXXXVIL 

VEEBS BEQUIBING "Af 9 TO, AT. 

Forbid, belong, give, refer, send. 



Prohibir, pertencer, dar, referfr, 

mandar. 
Desagradar, custar, bater, valer. 
Conceder, entregar, apear-se, 

levar. 
Yoltar, ir, dirigir-se, unir-se. 



Displease, cost, knock, to value. 
Concede, deliver, alight, carry. 

Gro, return, address, unite. 



Principia-se a segar os trigos. Perguntemos ao co 
cheiro. Conduza o senhor ao seu quarto. Chegado ao 
logar. A ser assim. Estou as ordens de V. S. Elle 
aspira a fama. navio se dirige ao porto. A lenha se 
rediiz a cinzas. Elle cede aos sens rogos. Opponho-me 
a isso. Elle falta a sua palavra. Elle se entrega ao pra- 
zer. Indo por sitio a Santarem. Igual scrte cdube a 
Lisboa. A infanta foi entregue a E-aymundo. Prohi- 
bindo essas viagens aos Hispanhoes. Yoltando a Mau- 
ritania. Esta pertence a viiiva do conde. 



This displeases the old prince. These triumphs cost 
the Saracens rivers of blood. He dresses in the English 
mode. I go to Lisbon. He applies to study. He laid 
siege to Santarem. When do you set sail ? Take this to 
the gentleman. I want to go to the opera. Take me to 
the bridge. They knock at the door. Can you send it 
for me to No. 10 ? He withdraws his shoulders from the 
wheel. Exposed to the sun. A people given to fishing. 
In order to resist misfortunes. Carried to the last point. 
Deliver this letter to the gentleman. 



238 
LESSON CCXXXVIII. 

TEEBS KEQUIBING "COM" WITH. 

Honrar, estar^ fallar, vestir. Honour, be, speak, dress. 

Morrer, tremer, alegrar-se. Die, tremble, to rejoice. 

Contrastar, congracar, concordat*. Contrast, ingratiate, agree. 

Ter, calcular, cumprir, coinpeth\ Have, calculate on, discharge, 

compete. 

Tratar, casar, alliar-se, ligar. Treat, marry, ally, bind. 

Confundir, occupar, acabar. i Confound, busy, have done. 



H6nre-me com as siias or dens. Estou com muita 
fome. Com quern falla Y. S.? Morro com calma. Tre- 
mendo com frio. Este painel contrasta com a abundancia. 
Irei ter com V. S. a boca da noite. Querernos fazer com 
elle contas. Elle esta com capote. Cumprirei com o pro- 
mettido. Esta com defhixo. Elle trata-me com rigor. 
Nao posso competir com elle. Disputei com elle acerca 
d'isso. Elle ameacou-o com sua viuganca. JNao cumpre 
com o seu dever. Atindu com o caminho. Occupado 
com guerras. Sua filha casara com Moiiiz. 



He will honour them with his commands. He is very 
hungry. With whom will you speak ? The boy is trem- 
bling with cold. Can I speak with the lady ? Let us 
have done with this. He will fulfil his promise. The 
king threatens her with his vengeance. The soldier dis- 
charges his duty. His aunt is married to Mr. P. I am 
glad of it. They disputed with the king. She has caught 
cold. My teacher treats me with kindness. I agree 
with him in this. Marrying Alice. He calculated on 
war, I am dying with heat. 



239 



LESSON CCXXXIX. 

VEEES EEQTjIEING ^PARA" FOE, TO, T0WAE33S, 
IN OEEEE TO. 



Ir, voltar, partfr, vir. 

Bitscar, faltar. 

Olhar, estar, servir. 

Deitar, tender, deixar, reservar. 

Armar, prestar, tirar. 

Avancar, contribuir. 



To go to, return, set out, come. 

Search, fail. 

Look, be, serve. 

Throw, tend, leave, reserve. 

Prepare, be good, draw. 

Advance, contribute. 



Olhe para mini, Deitemos os dlhos pdra estes cam- 
pos. Voltemos para casa. Vou pam a escola. A que 
horas parte o vapdr para L6ndres ? JEntre para a lancha. 
O quarto delta para a rua. Xsto nao presta para nada. 
Eu emigrei de Portugal para Inglaterra. Os chefes ti- 
nhao avancado para Castella. Armado para a conquista. 
Os reis buscavao-n'o para juiz das suas contendas. Vim 
para te ver. Estd para o nascente. Estou para partir. 
Vai para meia noite. Eu tirarei para mini. So fait 6 u 
um Stentdr para tornar a scena completaT 



Look this way. Look ye ? He cast his eyes on these 
fields. He returned home. The boy is going to school. 
At what o'clock does the coach go to Lisbon ? He came 
to see him. I am about to write. Bodies tend to the 
centre. "Will you stay/br dinner? We shall leave for 
another opportunity. I have written to England. We 
reserve for the conclusion of this article. It contributes 
to the discovery of truth. He came to see you. The 
window of my room looks on the street. The clock is 
good for nothing. I am about to set off. When does 
the French steamer start for Teneriffe ? 



240 
LESSON CCXL. 

VEEBS INCLUDING PBEPOSITIONS.* 



Almocar, jantar, cear. 

Vestir, calcar. 

Fallar, agradecer. 

Subir. 

Mergulkar. 

Aproveitar, ajustar, roubar. 



Breakfast on, dine on, sup on. 

Put on, put on (boots). 

Speak of, thank for, avail of. 

Go up. 

Dive for. 

Profit by, agree for, rob for. 



Falldmos artes, poesia, politica. Vestirei a minha 
casaca nova. Quer calgdr sapatos ? Eu^esfo'este habito 
para isso. velho franciscano s^&zW os degraus do altar. 
JFallou-se litteratura. O que quer V. S. almogdr I Niinca 
calgou esporas. Elles cdlgao-lhe muito bem. Quer almo- 
gdr ovos ? J&ujantarei vitella amanha. Elle ceou peixe. 
Hei de vestir as minhas calcas novas. meu amigofdlla- 
me politica ? O homeni mergulha perolas. Aproveitei 
essa occasiao para — . Muito agradego a sua bondade. 
Ajustdndo a passagem em quatro mil reis por cada 
pessoa. 



These men are fishing for pearls. I shall breakfast 
on beef and bread. He will put on his new coat. I bar- 
gamed for the passage at four shillings each person. 
They spoke of art, poetry, and history. They never put 
on spurs. The old sailor dined on ducks and green peas. 
I shall avail myself of this opportunity. The marquis 
went up the steps of the throne. I thank you for your 
politeness. You must put on the stout boots. We 
shall dine on roast beef to-day. The boys were diving 
for pearls in the Red Sea. 

* Tbese verbs govern the noun without an intervening preposi- 
tion : " almogdr dvos," to breakfast on eggs. 



241 



LESSON CCXLI. 

INTEBJECTIONS. 



Q.uieto ! caluda ! 

Ah! apage! safa! 

Ora bem ! ora esta ! dra essa ! 

Ai de vds ! 

Pois bem ! poi3 nao ! bem ! 

Oraveja! asn&ira! vaibonito! 



Softly! hush! 

Ah! away! off! 

Very well! good! capital! 

Woe to you! 

Well ! of course ! well ! 

Only see ! nonsense ! very fine 



Oh desgracado de mim ! De joelhos I Ai de nos ! 
Oh! es tu, meu pobre Claudio? Ah! senhor, acudi-me ! 
Pois nao! " Hum !" exclamou Er. Joao, daudo aos hom- 
bros. Que tal! mas veja. Ora, grdgas a Deus, foi-se ! 
Deus me perdoe! Se morreu, paciencia! Louvado seja 
Deus! Famoso! Tom a sentido! Deus o permitta ! Mis- 
ericordia! Valna-me Deus ! Optimo! ObrigadXssimo! 
Toda a santissima noite ! Justo ! Deus nos acuda ! Mas, 
avie-se! Asneira! Almas bentas, valei-me ! Nada de 
gracas ! Justamente ! Ah, muito bem ! Que admi» 
racao ! 



I never closed an eye, the whole Messed night! Blessed 
Spirits, save me ! Bless me ! what's the matter ? God 
bless me ! Beally ! Lord preserve us ! Lord help me ! 
Of course ! Exactly so ! Very good ! Capital ! That's 
a good one ! Oh, the rogue ! Come on ! Come along ! 
JN"o doubt ! Take care ! Certainly. It is a pity ! Help ! 
help! By no means! "Why not? "We are lost! God's 
will be done ! Certainly not ! Thank God ! Eamous ! 
It can't be helped ! Undoubtedly ! Well then, speak 
out! 0, yes, sir. Off! Out! Go away! 



APPENDIX, 



OUTLINES OF PORTUGUESE GRAMMAR 
WORD-BUILDING. 



HINTS ON "WORD-FORMATION. 

A few weeks' careful study of the following rules, the 
result of a long] comparison, will enable the learner to 
acquire a stock of several thousand terms, chiefly literary 
and scientific, but many in every-day use. 

I. Portuguese is one of the many dialects descending 
from Latin, a sister of the Spanish, but no more a cor- 
ruption of it than Italian is. "With the Latin stock a 
few Greek, Celtic, and Gothic words have been preserved. 
Arabic terms were introduced in the middle ages, and 
recent times have contributed largely from French, 
English, and other languages. Still, the mass of Por- 
tuguese is Latin, and our first hints are therefore ad- 
dressed to the Latin scholar. The changes by which 
Latin becomes Portuguese are chiefly the following : — 
1. Suppression of cases, using prepositions . instead of 
inflections. 2. Frequent suppression of the passive, 
simplification of conjugation, and use of auxiliaries. 

3. Use of the Latin ablative as a Portuguese nominative. 

4. Suppression of neuter gender. 5. Slight changes in 



244 

terminations. 6. Contractions, transpositions, and suppres- 
sions in roots. 7. Alteration in the quantity of syllables. 

(1.) Many words are the same as in Latin. Those in 
a : acacia, barba, barca, canna, casa, cera, dea, ecloga, 
fama, gemma, bora, idea, juvenca, lingua, meta, nota, 
orbita, palma, quadra, serra, terra, iiva, vacca, zona. In 
or : amor, cantor, delator, exterior, intercessor, professor, 
etc. In I: sol, sal, consul, mel, fel. In x: appendix, 
index, calls. Altar, echo, chaos, lexicon, etc. 

(2.) Many retain the Greek and Latin prefixes un- 
altered : «pathia, aversao, adherir, «wputar, ampliiiheatro, 
analyse, rmfepassar, rmf/poda, apostata, fr/color, cataracta, 
circumferencia, ccwjunecao, co^radistinccao, cfepositar, 
didmetro, distrahir, dilacerav. educacao, exchisao, epi- 
theto, extrajudicial, 7?y^e;-critico, Jii/pocrita, «;ifringir, in- 
/ercepto, introdiMzir, onetd^hora, o&edecer, ^ermittir, post- 
hiimo,^rematuro,^/'ohibir, rescrever, retrocesso, sz^jugar, 
subtetfugio, sujoerfiwo, syno&o, transformer, ultramariiio. 
Some of these are modified (as in Latin and English) to 
suit the following letter, e. g., ad becomes ac in cccumu- 
lar ; con varies into co, col, cog, etc. ; in changes into ig, 
il, im, etc. ; and so of oo, sua, and syn. Des, as a Portu- 
guese prefix, is equal to dis in English: desarmar, disarm.; 
or un: cfesataear, untie. In sometimes becomes em or en : 
inter, entre. Ex becomes es. 

(3.) Many words modify the Latin root by prefixing 
a letter — abarbar, eseorpiao, esphera, estatua. 

By inserting — farina, farinha; vino, vinlw; speculum, 
espellw. 

By rejecting — sanctus, sdnto; melius, meio; aer, ar; 
c7zarta, carta; tales, tdes; canes, cdes; camisia, cainisa. 

BY CHANGING 

an intoou — «wrum, ouro; aua\ire, ouvir; awtumnus, outono 

b „ v — &ebere,dever; habere, haver; arbore, drvore 

c „ g — laco, J ago ; lacrima, lagrima ; secret o, segredo 

c „ i — nocte, noite; lecto, leito; secta, seita 

c „ u — doctor, doutor ; doctrina, doutrina 

C „ qu — calens, quente ; crepare, qiiebrdr 

c „ z — dicere, dizer ; facere,fazer 

d „ j — Yideo, vejo ; desiefero, desejo 

d ,, t — co^urnix, codorniz 



245 

BY CHANGING 

e into h — linea, linha ; castanea, castdnha 

e „ i — esca, isca ; sentio, sinto ; equalis, igudl 

f „ v — prq/ectus, proveito 

fl ,, cli— ^amma, chdmma 

g „ j — anyelus, dnjo ; sponyia, esponja; gemi,joelho 

hy „ j — hi/SLcmthus, Jacinto 

i ,, a — cam'stra, candstra 

i „ e — spissus, espesso ; capital, cabeddl ; luve, neve 

is „ io — navw, navio 

j „ i — mayor, maidr ; pe/or, peior 

1 „ li — cZamare, cTiamdr ; cZave, chdve 

1 „ r — bZandus, ordndo ; ob/igatio, obrigacdo 

li „ i — moZmo, moiiiho 

li „ Hi — fi.lio,filJio ; muliev, mulhe'r ; ioli^folka 

n „ i — are^a, areia ; ave^a, aveia ; catena, cadeia 

p „ b — ca£>ra, cabra ; aperire, abrir ; q^eriare, obrdr 

pi „ cb — ^Zumbo, cliumbo ; plws'm, chuva ; pleno, cheio 

q „ g — a^ua, dgua ; e^ua, egua ; sequi, seguir 

t „ c — malitfia, malicia; mentfio, mencao 

t „ d — materia, madeira ; vita, vida ; lafro, ladrdo 

u „ o — wnda, onda ; triinco, trdnco ; stopa, estopa 

s „ z — cru#, cruz ; lu#, luz ; ^&x,paz; fziux,f6z, etc. 

By altering the termination : — 

anis „ ao — canis, cao ; ^anis,pao 

anus \ ~ ( manus, mao ; sanus, sdo ; \anus, vdo ; 

anum) a0 ( ip&ganus, pagao ; granum, grdo 

ana ,, a. — \ana, la; cana, ca 

onus,, om — "bonus, bom ; tomes, torn; sonus, som 

nm „ o — ferrum, ferro ; tem^\um,templo ; solum, solo 

us „ o — anuws, anno ; Yentus, vento ; mundzw, mundo 



By cutting o^tbe termination, as emblems, emblem :- 

siiiSj am — causal^, causal ; singulars, singular. 

His — fva,gilis,frdgil; babiZis, hdbil ; utiZw, util. 
n — carme?i, carme; nomew, nome. 
re — mare, mar ; amare, amar. 
udus — crudus, cru ; nucfoj, nu. 
x — caLr, cal. 



246 

(4.) Many Portuguese nouns and adjectives are 
Latin ablatives — anno, baculo, calarno, discipulo, edicto, 
foco, gremio, habito, idolo, juramento, labio, medico, 
negocio, odio, panno, quarto, refdgio, sacco, typo, urso, 
vento, zelo : from 1st and 2nd decl. Similarly from the 
3rd— ave, carne, dente, ente, fonte, gente, herde, igno- 
rante, labe, marmore, nave, drbe, ponte, quadriipede, sorte, 
valle. Those of the 4th change the abl. u into o — cornu, 
corno ; arco, porto, etc. In the 5th — acie, carie, effigie, 
serie, and superficie are the only illustrations. The ex- 
ceptions are — ablatives in ane, ano, and one becomes ao y 
cane, cao ; gvdno, grao ; opinion, opiniao ; ono is om, as 
bono, bom; ine, ion, as fine, Jim ; ine, em, as homine, 
liomem. Others modify the root, e. g., regno, reino ; 
luna, liia; coelo, ceo; dolente, doente ; pede, pe' ; rete, 
rede ; lege, lei ; rege, rei ; libro, livro. 

(5.) Many words have undergone such changes that it is 
sometimes difficult to recognize the original Latin — anima, 
alma; auricula, orelha ; audire, ouvir ; bracchium, brdco ; 
capilli, cabello ; caseus, qiieijo ; denarius, dinlieiro ; ec- 
clesia, igreja ; facere, fazer ; genu, joelho ; lac, leite ; 
magister, mestre ; nepos, neto ; oculus, ollw ; puteus, 
pogo ; questus, qiieixa ; regula, regra ; sinus, se'io ; tur- 
bidus, turvo ; umbra, sombra; vesica, bexiga. 

(6.) Many Latin words become Portuguese by modi- 
fying the affix : — 

ans into ante — am ans, nmante ; tolerant e 
antia „ ancia — to\emntia y tolerancia ; vigilancia 
are „ ar — amare, amdr 

arius „ ario — advers^nws, adversario 
ator „ ador— senator, senador ; orador, pescador 
bilis „ vel — dbm&bilis, amdvel 
ens „ ent — ip&tens, patente ; regente, decente 
entia „ encia — scientia, sciencia ; benevolencia 
ere „ er — capers, caber ; saber 

icus „ ico — paciftaw, pacijico 
io „ ao — successio, successao ; opiniao, religiao 

itas „ idade — ciVAitas, civiliddde 
itas „ idez — rigiditas, rigidez 
tio „ cao — nsitio, nagao ; devocao 
urn „ o — templww, templo ; beneficio, feno 

us „ o — activi^, activo ; adverso, barbaro, calvo 



247 

II. — The following observations will prove useful to 
ihe English scholar : — 

(1.) Many words are exactly the same in "both lan- 
guages, such as end in a, e, al, el, il, ul, ar, or, on, ude, 
idea, diploma, base', cone, animal, signal, cruel, civil, 
consul, singular, successor, lexicon, longitude, etc. ; the 
pronunciation alone marks the difference. 

(2.) Many become Portuguese by adding a letter, 
often a, e, or o — artist, artiste; part, parte; moment, 
momento ; or by assuming a syllable, such as ar, er, 
ir — abandon, abandonoV; vend, vender; applaud, ap- 
plaud^*. 

(3.) Many words in Portuguese, as in other lan- 
guages, consist of prefix, root, and affix, the second 
modified by the first and third. The effect of a prefix is 
seen in conformir, oeformar, mformar, Cransformar, re- 
former ; and of affixes in observer, observacfo, observao'or, 
ohservagao, obserYancia, obserYatorio, observance. The 
following digest must be carefully studied : — 

]S T OUNS OF 

doing end in ao, ida : exclusao, sahida 

doer end in ador, or, eiro, ante, ico, ista : porta^or, feitor, 

cocheiro, negociante, medico, dentista 
done (state) end in ancia, mento : abaixawenfo, tolerdncia 
place end in ario, orio, ouro, ada, eto, ica : semindrio, 

escriptorio, levaoa, lazarezto, botica 
condition end in ez, lira, dade, eza, ela, or : mu&ez, gor&ura, 

yerddde, belleza, cliente7a 
instrument end in eiro, eira, oura, ador, a : pimenteiro, 

cafeteira, tesoura, iurador, harpa 
place for things end in al, ol, ar, ia, el, aculo : Puncho7, 

pombaZ, paio7, pomar, livrarza, grane7, receptacnZo 
manner, creed, end in ismo : gallicismo, caikolicismo, egoismo 
quantity, number, end in ame, utne, ada, agem, alha: 

enxdme, legume, mmdda, folh.dgem, metrdlha 
trees, plants, end in eira, eiro, oro : palmeiVa, ipmheiro, 

sycamoro 
science and art end in a, ia, ia, ica, ura : algebra, astrono- 

mia, historia, musica, architectwra 
augmentation end in ao, az, asco, acho, ona : dinheirao, 

villanaz, pennacno, sabichona 



248 



NOUNS OF 

diminution end in mho, ella, ete, ito, ilha, etc. : rapaz/w&o, 

-pagella, bilhefe, pahVo, baetWia 
office, dignity, end in ado, ia : consulage*, con&ddo, baronza 
made of end in aca : palbrt'f « , b&gdca 
strokes end in ada : pancacfo, ipalmdda, chicotaJtf 
feminine end in a, ora, oa, eira, essa, eza, ina, etc. : tia, 

senhora, pavo«, lavade/m, condess#, duqueza, menma 
dweller in, native,lend. in ano, ez, ol, eo : Eoina?io, Erance2, 

Hespanho'Z, Ilheo 
contempt end in ao, chao, ota, zarrao: ratao, sabic^ao, 

jandta, komenzarrao 



TABLE OF COEEESPOKDIXO TEEMIJSTATIOJSTS. 



English 




Portuguese. 


a 




a 


able 




al 


able 




avel 


ability 




abilidade 


aceous 




aceo 




1 


acio \ 


ace 


ace > 




asso ) 


acle 




acnlo 


act 




acto 


acy 


{ 


acia ) 
asia j 


ad 




ada 


ade 




ada 


age 




agem 


age 




agio 


aign 




anha 


ain 




ao 


ain 




anha 


ain 




anho 


al 




al 


al 




o 



Examples. 

idea, panorama, magnesia, aurora 
vegetable, vegetal 

curable, curavel ; favoravel, toleravel 
probability, probabilidade; habilidade 
herbaceous, herbaceo 

palace, palacio; prefacio; pace, passo ; 
grace, graca, raca 

obstacle, obstaculo ; oraculo, pinaculo 
fact, facto; acto, contacto, contracto 
primacy, primacia ; contumacia, fal- 

lacia, apostasia 
salad, salada ; nomada, monada 
grenade, grenada ; cruzada, arcada 
image, imagem ; passagem, vantagem 
suffrage, suffragio 
campaign, campanha ; champanha 
captain, capitao ; montao, grao 
mountain, niontanha 
gain, ganho 

filial, social, metal, mineral, original 
eternal, eterno ; miiito, individuo 



249 



ality 

an 

an 

an 

ance 

ance 

ane 

ant (adj.) 

ant (n.) 

ant 

ant (adj.) 

ar 



ard 



are 



asm 



ate (v.) 
ate (adj.) 
ate (n.) 
silent e 
„ e (n.) 
» e (v.) 
» e (v.) 
» e (v.) 
„ e (n.) 
bility 
We 

ble (n.) 
He (adj.) 
ble (adj.) 



idade 

ano 

ao 

o 

ancia 

anca 

ano 

ante 

ente 

o 

ante 

ar 

arda 

ado 

arar 

asmo 

asma 

ar 

ato, ado 

ado 



( arda ) 

( ado ) 

arar 

( asmo \ 

\ asma j 



c 
c 
c 

ce 

ch 
cious 



er 
ir 

ar 

o 

bilidade 

vel 

bula 

bre 

bil 

ca (no.) 

co (adj.) 

co (no.) 

cio, cia, 

9a 
cha 
z 



!cio, cia, ") 
9a ) 



cula,go,| 



cnlo 



ct 



cle 
cto 



t 



nationality, nacion alidade 
human, humano ; Romano, pelicano 
organ, orgao ; pagao, sacristao 
European, Europeo ; Indio, plebeo 
abundance, abundancia ; fragrancia 
finance, financa ; danca, balan9a 
profane, profano ; mundano, urbano 
abundant, abundante ; importante 
assistant, assistente ; defendente 
servant, servo 

militant, militante ; emigrante 
solar, regular, altar, titular 

drunkard, bebado 

compare, comparar ; preparar 

enthusiasm, enthusiasmo ; pleonasmo 

animate, animar ; perpetuar, fabricar 
ornate, ornato ; immediato, privado 
consulate, consulado ; pontificado 
conclave, phrase, cone, catastrophe 
dame, dama ; fama, danca, lan9a, fata 
absolve, absolver ; dissolver, revolver 
assume, assumir ; dividir, resumir 
vote, votar ; consolar, admirar 
fume, fumo ; conciso, concreto, modo 
visibility, visibilidade ; risibilidade 
admirable, admiravel; visivel, terrivel 
fable, fabula 
noble, nobre 
ignoble, igndbil 

music, miisica ; arithmetica, ldgica 
optic, optico ; lunatico, erratico 
critic, critico ; arco, po^mico 
preface, prefacio ; commercio, silen- 

cio, essencia, far9a, for9a 
epoch, epocha ; monarcha, patriarcha 
loquacious, loquaz ; tenaz, feroz 
particle, particula ; artigo, especta- 

culo 
conflict, conflicto ; distincto, objecto 



250 



d 




do 


dom 




ado 


ect 




eito 


ect 




ecto 


ected 


5 


ecto ^ 
igido j 


ection 
ector 




eicao 
eitor 


ed (from") 
ar) ) 

ed(rroin") 
er&ir)j 


ado 

ido 


eer 


{ 


eiro 
heiro 


ee 




ado 


ee 




ia 


el 




elo 


el 
ent 




il, el 

ente 


ent 




ento 


er 




eiro 


er 




or, ador 


er 




o ? e 


er y 






esce 




escer 


ess 




iz 


ess 




essa 


ess 




eza 


ess 




eira 


ess 




esso 


et 




eta 


eur 




eza 


fy . 




near 


ge 




J a 


ge 
hood 




gio 
er 


ia 




OS 


ian 




o 


ic 




030 


ice 




icio 


ice 




ico 



liquid, liquido ; rnethodo, placido 
dukedom, ducado ; earldom, contado 
perfect, perfeito ; effeito, respeito 
object, objecto ; projecto, aspect o 
erected, erecto ; corrected, corrigido ; 

renectido 
perfection, perfeicao ; imperfei^o 
elector, eleitor ; reitor 
adapted, adaptado ; venerado, re- 

putado, suffocado, separado 
converted, convertido ; concedido, 

dividido 
engineer, engenheiro ; carabineiro r 

mosqueteiro, mulateiro 
refugee, refugiado 
guarantee, guarantia 
camel, camelo 

funnel, funil; barril, coronel 
agent, agente ; inconveniente 
convent, convento; armamento 
banker, banqueiro ; lanceiro 
reformer, reformador 
astronomer, astronomo ; litliograplio 
artillery, artilbaria 
effervesce, effervescer 
actress, actriz ; empress, imperatriz 
countess, condessa 
baroness, baroneza; duqueza,princeza 
heiress, herdeira 

process, processo; excesso, successo 
poet, poeta ; lanceta 
grandeur, grandeza 
purifj, purificar ; qualificar, edificar 
forge, forja; arrange, arranjar; loja 
college, collegio ; refugio, privilegio 
widowhood, viuvez 
effluvia, effluvios 
theologian, theologo 
majestic, magestoso 
sacrifice, sacrificio ; edificio, officio 
service, servico 



ice 


icia, 19a 


ice 


icho 


ice 


eza 


ics 


ica 


ier 


eiro 


iet 


ieto 


igm 


igar 


ile 


il 


iliate- \ 


ilhar 
iliar 


ime 


imo 


in 


em 


ine 


nho 


ine 


nlia 


ine 


in a 


ine 


ino 


ing. 


ando 


ing 


endo 


ing. 


indo 


*®g 


ante 


ing 


ente 


ion 


10 


ion 


iao 


ion 


nhao 


ion 


ao 


ious- 





is 


e 


isc 


isco 


isli 


ir 


ish (adj.) ez 


ish (dim. 


) inho, ac 


ism 


ismo 


ist 


ista 


ist 


ICO 


it 


lto 


it 


ite 


it© 


ita 


ite 


itio 


ite 


ito 


ited 


ido 


ity 


idade 



251 

police, policia : noticia, malicia 

caprice, capricho 

avarice, avareza 

statics, statica ; mathematica 

cashier, caxeiro ; financeiro, f usileiro 

quiet, quieto 

fatigue, fatigar 

puerile, pueril ; fertil, imbecil, ddcil 
I humiliate, humilhar ; conciliate, con- 
) ciliar 

maritime, maritimo 

margin, margem ; origem, virgem 

marine, marinho 

line, linha 

mine, mina ; disciplina, machina 

divine, divino ; libertino, feminino 

dancing, d: ncando ; formando 

reading, lendo ; concedendo 

persuading, persuadindo ; dividindo 

during, durante 

dominion, dominio 
religion, religiao ; opiniao, centuriao 
pavilion, pavilhao 
vision, visao ; divisao, explosao 
perfidious, perfido 
ellipsis, ellipse ; these 
disc, disco, obelisco 
abolish, abolir ; brandir, finir, polir 
English, Inglez ; Irish, Irlandez 
lo whitish, branquinho 

paganism, paganismo ; baptismo 

dentist, dentista ; economista, purista 

botanist, botanico 

decrepit, decrepito ; habito 

limit, limite 

levite, levita; hypocrita 

site, sitio 

definite, definito ; erudito, exquisito 

united, unido 

brevity, brevidade ; santidade 



252 



ity 


ez 


solidity, solidez ; fluidez, rapidez 


ity 


eza 


nobility, nobreza 


ive 


ivo 


positive, positivo ; fugitivo, motivo 


ize 


izar 


•baptize, baptizar ; immortalizar 


k 


co & que 


frank, franco ; banco ; tank, tanque 


kin 


inho 


lambkin, cordeirinho 


le 


lo 


ample, amplo ; templo, exemplo 


le 


lilo 


title, titulo ; discipulo 


let 


inho 


rivulet, rebeirinho 


liant 


hante 


brilliant, brilhante 


ling 


inho 


gosling, gansinho 


lock 


inho 


hillock, onteirinho 


ly (adv.) 


mente 


finally, finalmente ; totalmente 


m 


ma 


system, systema; sympt6ma,emblema 
drama 


me 


mo 


supreme, supremo ; extremo 


nm 


mna 


column, columna 


nee 


ncia 


ignorance, ignorancia ; distancia 


nee 


nca 


vigilanca, differen9a 


ne 


ona 


vigilance, zone, zona 


ness 


ura 


fineness, finura ; altura, frescura 


ness 


eza 


firmness, firmeza ; franqueza 


nt 


nta, nte 


aiFront, affronta ; font, fonte 





o 


canto, embargo 


on 


ao 


prison, prisao ; dragao, galleao 


on 


ao 


sermon, sermao ; salmao, prisao 


or 


or 


terror, horror, tremor, inventor 


or 


ario 


proprietor, proprietario 


or 





error, erro 


ose 


or 


impose, impor ; compor, suppor 


ose 


oso 


verbose, verboso 


ose 


osa 


prose, prdsa 


ot 


ota, ota 


patriot, patridta ; pilot, piloto 


OU3 





various, vario ; contiguo, adventicio 


OUS 


oso 


generous, generoso ; glorioso 


ph 


pho 


paragraph, paragrapho 


ply 


plicar 


multiply, multiplicar 


que 


CO 


burlesque, burlesco ; pittoresco 


re 


ro, er 


centre, centro ; sepulchro, desastre 


rious 


re 


illustrious, illiistre 


rn 


rno 


modern, moderno ; interno 



253 



rfc 


He 


se 


so 


ship 
ship 


ade 
ia 


some 


6so 


sque 
t 


SCO 

to 


te 


to 


te 


ta 


ter 


tro 


tion 

tie 

tie 


cao 

tolo, tola 
tello 


tor 


dor 


ture 


duro 


ty 


dao 


ube 


ubo 


uce 


uzir 


ucb (v.) 


ir 


net (a.) 
ude 


licta, ucto 
ude 


ude (v.) 


uir 


ude 


ao 


ul 


ul 


ulse 


ulso 


ult (v.) 


ultar 


um 


o 


ure 


ura 


urn \ 


lirno ") 
urna ) 


us 


o 


X 


xo 


X 


xto 


V 


Ta 


7 


ia 


J 


io 


J 


ea 


J 


o 



fort, forte 

use, uso ; abiiso, abstruso, vaso, verso 

friendship, amizade 

lordship, senhoria ; capitania, legacia 

toilsome, laborioso ; trabalhoso 

picturesque, picturesco ; burlesco 

alphabet, alphabeto; distincto, quieto 

remote, remoto ; voto, absoliito 

note, nota 

barometer, barometro ; thermometro 

nation, na9ao ; ra9ao, propor9ao 

apostle, apostolo ; epistle, epistola 

castle, castello 

orator, orador ; cultivador, regulador 

mature, madiiro 

laxity, laxidao 

cube, ciibo 

conduce, conduzir ; deduzir, induzir 

instruct, instruir 

conduct, conducta, pro duct o 

latitude, longitude, plenitude 

conclude, concluir 

gratitude, gratidao ; solidao 

consul 

impulse, impulso 

consult, consultar 

asylum, asylo ; delirio 

manufacture, manufactura ; fractura 

turn, turno 

apparatus, apparato ; genio 
complex, complexo ; sexo 
context, contexto ; pretexto, texto 
academy, academia ; economia, espia 
family, familia ; memoria, historia 
adversary, adversario ; observatories 
assembly, assemblea 
destiny, destino 



254 



ABSTKACT OP PEECEDING- TABLE, 

Applicable to "Words in English, and Portuguese having 
the same Greek or Latin root : — 

1. "Words in a, al, ar, or, ude, are the same in both 
languages, with few exceptions. 

2. Words in ant, ent, add e. 

3. "Words in act, an, ect, ess, ic, id, il, ism, x, and xto, 
add o — fact, facto. 

4. "Words in on, ion, tion, sion, change these into ao, 
iao, and cao — prisao, religiao. 

5. Words in cy, dy, ly, my, gy, ry, sy, change y into 
ia, ncy into ncia, and ice into icia. 

6. Words in ce, ge, ary, ery, ory, change e and sy into 
io — palace, palacio. 

7. Words in ane, ate, be, ete, ite, ote, ute, ene, ine, 
ive, ire, se, etc., change e into o — humane, huinano. 

8. Words in ch (hard), c, ist, ot, add a — monarch, 
monarcha. 

9. Words in ity change ity into idade — city, cidade. 
10. Words in ade, ics, change the last letter into a. 
31. Words in ous take oso ; in eous, eo ; cious, z. 

12. Words in us and urn, change these into o. 

13. Words in ate (verbs), change ate into ar ; inginto 
ando, endo, indo ; ed into ado, ido ; tor into dor. 



ADJECTIVES 



Are sometimes roots, or primitive words, as diiro, caro, 
cavo; but more frequently derivatives, with the following 
affixes: — 

ADJECTIVES MEANING 

acting : ante, ente ; fvlmindnte, -potente 
j)ower to act : ivo, az ; active-, tendz 
acted on : ado, ido ; vasgacfo, vestido 
able to he: avel, ivel, uvel, atil, ico; amdvel, y'iswsI, soluvel, 
-povtdtil, levad/po 



255 

ADJECTIVES MEANING 

belonging to: ano, ar, ario, ez, ico, il, ino ; paisa^o, polar, 

alimentary, portugueiz 
full of: ento, oso, lirno, 6z, ez ; lamacewfo, ranioso, tacit- 

^m0, atro'z, cortex 
made of: eo ; SLureo, ferreo 
having much of: tido ; BarbwJo, lanudo 
tearing, causing: fero, fico ; frondi/ero, paciyfoo 
Semy : ante, ente, ido ; constante, decente, humido 
apt to he, going to: biindo; furihundo, morihundo 
like, tending to: ado, idulo ; achumbddo, advents, 

acidulo 
diminutive, fond of : inho, ino, zinho ; bomtinho 

Adjectives in o become feminine by changing o into a: 
activo, active. Adverbs are formed by adding mente to 
the feminine of adjectives, e.g., SLctiv&inente. Diminutives 
by putting "inho" ino, or zinho, instead of o: homtinho, 
pequenmo, grandezinho. These diminutives have often 
the force of "ish" in English, as largw7*, blackM; hut far 
more frequently are expressive of endearment, like "petit," 
in French ; e.g., bonitinho means ''pretty little dear," and 
rarely pretty^. 



YEEBS 

Are primitive, as por ; and compound, or derivative, as 
im^ov. Their terminations are of course significative, of 
which the following are specimens : — 
do, act, he : ar, er, ir, or ; apromptir, receber, impeil/r, 

suppor 
grow, hecome : ecer ; envelhecer, esclarecer, anoitecer, em- 

branquecer 
do often, or habitually: ejar ; gotejdr, apedre/ar, cvayejar, 

trovejdr, Tp&dejdr 
act as, make like: ear; pastor ear, pedantear, pavonear-se 
imitate, mimic : ezar ; a£remcezdr, aportugue^ar 
make he : izar, isar, itar ; fertil^ar, humamsar, f&cilitdr 
act in a small way : iscar, icar, igar ; chxxviscdr, bebemVa'r, 

choiomig dr 



256 



OUTLINES OP GPAMMAB. 

I. The Article is thus declined : — 

The sing. on. o f. &plur.on. os f. as 
of the do da aos das, comp. of de, of 

to the ao a dos as, „ a, to 

in the no na nos nas, „ em, in 

by the pelo pela pelo pelas, „ por, by 

A or an is um, uma ; of a, de um, de uma ; to a, a vm, 
a uma, etc. 

Examples. — sol, terra, a do mar, da barba, no ar, na 
agua, a hora, pela lingua, na orbita, da terra, pelo pro- 
fessor, os navios, as horas, aos cantores, dos navios, as 
ideas, pelos professores, nos navios, pelas barbas. Um 
professor, uma palma, de um consul, a uin pastor, de uma 
vacca, a lima dea, a casa do governador, a influencia da 
lingua. 

II. The NouiS" hasno inflection for case ; the objective 
or accusative is preceded by the particle " a" when there 
is danger of ambiguity : as, " Joao ama a Pedro," " Lobo 
nao mata a lobo." 

JSumber. — The folloAving are the rules for the forma- 
tion of the plural : — 

Pule 1. A noun ending in a vowel takes s: filha, fil- 
has ; vento, ventos ; gru, grus. 

Pule 2. A noun ending in a consonant (except / and 
on) takes es : senhor, senhores ; colher, colheres ; inglez, 
inglezes ; cor, cores ; paiz, paizes. 

Pule 3. A noun ending in I drops it before taking es: 
animal, ammdes ; lencol, lenco^s ; azul, azues. JEl and il 
become eis : papeZ, pape7s ; aocil, docm\ " iZ," when 
accented, becomes is : fusil, fusz's. Consul, cal, mal, and 
pensil follow Pule 1 : consules, cales, males, pensiies. 

Pule 4. A noun ending in on changes m into ns : 
homem, homers ; bom, bons ; fiin, fins ; algum, algu^s ; 
aturn, atu7is. 

Pule 5. Nouns in ao form the plural in three ways : — 
(1) By adding s; (2) by changing ao into aes ; (3) by 
changing do into oes. No rule is so safe as lists — 1. Ac 



257 

maos, pagaos, oregaos, drfaos, drgaos, sdlaos, temporaos, 
vaos, zangaos. 2. Allemaes, caes, capellaes, capitaes, Cata- 
lans, charlataes, deaes, ermitaes, escrivaes, guardiaes, 
massapaes, paes, sacristaes, tabelliaes. 3. Accoes, con- 
fissoes, coracoes, and fully 1000 more, being all the femi- 
nine nouns in do, cdo, and tdo, except mao and hengdo. 
Aldeao, anao, and villao take aos or oes ; also, soldao and 
volcao, oes, or aes. The first and second lists are com- 
plete ; all other nouns in do come under the third. 

Some have no plural, Lisooa ; some no singular, can- 
gdlhas, anjinhos (when meaning a double thumb-screw) ; 
some are the same in both numbers, pires, cdes, ourwes, 
etc. 

II. G-endee. — The Portuguese language has two gen- 
ders, masculine and feminine. The grand general rule is, 
all nouns ending in o are masculine ; all in a, feminine. 
Some special rules follow : — 

Rule 1. Nouns in e, i, o, and u are masculine : caffe, 
pe, lacre, leite, sangue, livro, alcali, peru, and many 
others. 

Exceptions. Chemine, se, fe, face, alface, sede, parede, 
vide, tarde, longitude, etc. ; fonte, fronte, ponte, arte, 
parte, sdrte, fdme, carne, noite, febre, tdsse, classe, chave, 
neve, sege, nao, avo, enxd, md, tribu, and a few others of 
no moment. 

Rule 2. Nouns in I, m, n, r, and z are masculine: saZ, 
hornet, pesar, lapis, nariz. 

Exceptions. Cal, rnivem, drdem, and those in gem, as 
imagem ; mulher, colher, cor, cor; dor, flor ; paz, raiz, fdz, 
ndz, vdz, cruz, Mz, and all in dez, e.g., timidez, etc. 

Mule 3. Nouns in a, do, ei, ade, ede, and ude are femi- 
nine : as rainha, opiniao, lei, amizade, sede, virtu de. 

Exceptions. Dia ; names of professions in ista, den- 
tista ; Greek nouns in a, diadema ; words in a, cha, alvara ; 
but pa is feminine. 

III. The Adjective forms its plural as the Noun 
does, and its feminine thus : — 



258 

o becomes a : douto, dout« ; novo, ndv# 

ao , , a : v«0, \a ; sac, sa 

ez, 61, or, u, and um, add a : inglez, ingleza ; hespanhdk, 

protectors, mia, uma 
oso becomes osa : generoso, generosa 
e, 1, r, and z (except or, ol, and ez) do not change: breve, 

finaZ, visiveZ, faeiZ, tenaz, cortez 

The Comparative and Superlative are formed by pre- 
fixing metis and o mais, as alto : metis alto, o mais alto. 

Exceptions. Bom,melhor,6ptimo; mao,peior,pessimo; 
grande, maior, maximo ; pequeno, menor, minimo. Some 
take the following : — Issimo, as antigo, Biitiqmssimo ; 
nobre, TiobHissimo ; fiel, n&elissimo. Xllimo, as facil, 
f&cillimo; humilde, humillimo. JErrimo, as agro, acerrimo; 
pobre, pauperrmo, and -pobrissimo. 

The following are irregular : — Bom, boa ; mao, ma. 
Commum is now invariable. 

Examples of Nouns and Adjectives. As opinioes dos 
capitaes. Os coracoes dos animaes. As maos dos guar- 
diaes. As cruizes dos Christaos. As margens dos ribei- 
rinhos. O gatinho do pastorinho. Panno Hespanhdl. 
Uma fragata Americana. Os generaes Russos. Yinho 
branco. Um cavallo Arabe. Uma febre agiida. As boas 
maneiras dos officiaes superiores. Came crua. Um mao 
jantar. Doutrina sa. Ares saos. Homens ainaveis. 
Senhoras Allemas. Grandissima actividade. Mais nota- 
vel. A maior affabilidade. A melhor vida. O mendr 
tempo. 

The Numerals are — Cardinals: nm, dois, tres, quatro, 
cinco, seis, sete, oito, nove, dez, onze, doze, treze, quatorze, 
quinze, dezaseis, dezasete, dezoito, dezanove, vinte, vinte- 
um, trinta, quarenta, cincoenta, sessenta, settenta, oitenta, 
noventa, cem, duzentos, trezentos, quatro centos, qui- 
nhentos, etc., mil, dois mil. Ordinals: primeiro, segiindo, 
terceiro, quarto, quinto, sexto, septimo, oitavo, nono, de- 
cimo, undecimo, duodecimo, decimo-tercio, etc., vigesiroo, 
vigesimo-primeiro, trigesimo, quadragesimo, etc., cente- 
simo, millesimo. 



259 



IV. The Pko^otjns have the following forms : — 
1. The Personal Pronouns are — 



1. 


2. 


3. m. 


3./. 


eu, nds 


tu, yds 


elle, elles 


ella, ellas 


de, a, para mim, nds 


ti, vds 


elle, elles 


ella, ellas, si 


(ace. form) me, nos* 


te, vos* 


0, OS 


a, as, se 



The first line contains the nominative forms : I, we, 
etc. The second, the forms used after prepositions, as a, 
de, por, para, com, etc., contraction taking place only in 
delle, delles ; della, dellas ; and comigo, com-nosco, for 
com mim, com nos. The third represents the forms 
equivalent to accusatives or objectives, governed by active 
verbs. "It is I" is " sou eu ;" " it is he," " e elle ;" " it 
is said," " diz-seT " Se," used with a reflective verb, is 
equal to one, toe, they, people ; like "on" in French, as 
" come-se" "one eats;" "bebe-se bom vinho aqui" "they 
drink good wine here." 

2. Conjunctive pronouns are joined to verbs : o, him ; 
a, her ; os, them (m.); as, them (/!); se, himself, herself, 
themselves ; Ihe, to him or her ; Ihes, to them. These 
frequently combine with the Personal Pronouns,- thus — 
m'o, or mo, it to me; as "De-wo," " Give it to me, :> 
referring to a masculine object ; ^e-ma, if feminine; 
Je-mos, if masculine plural ; <^e-mas, if feminine plural. 
The table exhibits the possible combinations : — 

It(m.)to me, mo thee, to him, her, Vho us, nolo you, volo self, selo 
It(y.)to „ ma „ ta „ „ lha „ viola „ vola ,, sela 
Them \ 
(m.) to J 
Them -> 
(/.) to I 

Examples. Diga-me. Eu o digo. Elle ama. Paga- 
me. De-lhe o livro. De-lho. De-lhe a penna. De-lJia. 
De-lhe os livros. De-llios. De-lhe as pennas. De-lhas. 
Sem mim, della, de ti, dellas, para elle ; encha-o ; de-me 
um eopo, peca-ZAe uma vela, metta-o no sacco, mande-os 
cedo. Elle den-mo. Ella deu-lhos. A si. 



me, mo 

„ ma 


thee, to 
„ ta 


„ mos 


„ tos 


„ mas 


„ tas 



him, her, Iho 
„ „ lha 

,, „ llios 



„ nolas 



nolas 



volos 
volas 



„ selos 



* Nds and vds, in the nominative and after prepositions, always 
have the accent, and are pronounced as if ndss, vdss ; but in the ac- 
cusative as if nooz or nuz, vooz or viiz. 



260 

Pronouns are further modified in combining with 
verbs ; e.g., instead of " amar 0," to love him, it becomes 
"ama-fo," or "amal-0," or "ama^o;" and so of the 
others — amal-«, amal-os, ami-las. Again, amamos-0 be- 
comes amamo-Zo. Also, for euphony 0, a, os, and as 
take n after third plural of the verb — adomo-o becomes 
adordo-^o. 

3. The JPossessives are — 



Meu 


mmha 


meus 


minhas 


my 


Teu 


tua 


teus 


tiias 


thy 


Seu 


sua 


seus 


siias 


his, her, its, their, your 


Ndsso 


ndssa 


ndssos 


ndssas 


our 


Ydsso 


vdssa 


vdssos 


vdssas 


your 



The possessive often requires an article : meu livro, 
my book ; a minha casa, my house ; but the article is not 
used before persons: meu pai, meu irmao, vdssa senhoria, 
etc. 

4. The Demonstratives — 

Este esta estes estas (isto) this, these 

Esse essa esses essas (isso) that, those 

Aquelle aquella aquellea aquellas (aquillo) that, those (yonder) 

JEste is exactly "this;" esse is "that" near; aquelle is 
"that" yonder. They combine with outro, forming esf- 
outro, this other ; esfoutros, these others ; ess'outro, 
aquell'outro. Isto is "this" used alone, like "ceci;" isto 
is "that;' like "cela." 

Mesmo mesma mesmos mesmas self, same, very one 

O a os as that, those 

Mesmo is used thus : j@u mesmo, I myself; elles mes- 
mos, they themselves. Also, mesmo homem, the same 
man ; ao mesmo tempo, at the same time. " O," as a de- 
monstrative, is used thus : que, he who; also, de, that 
of. All these combine with de, as desle, desta, destes, 
destas, disto ; desse, daquelle ; do mesmo, da mesma, dos 
mesmos, das mesmas ; do, da, etc., with em, as neste, nesta, 
nestes, nestas, nisto ; nesse, naquelle, naquillo, no mesmo, 
no, na, etc. 



261 

Examples, ^ste livro, esta mesa, estes livros, estas 
mesas; deste cavallo, desta questao, destes homens, destas 
mulheres ; a este rapaz, a esta rapariga, a estes rapazes, 
a estas raparigas ; neste quarto, nesta cama, nestes quar- 
tos, nestas camas ; aquelle livro, aquella casa, aquelles 
livros, aquellas casas ; daquelle criado, daquella eriada, 
daquelles criados, daquellas criadas ; aquelle homem, 
aquella mulher, aquelles homens, aquellas mulheres ; 
naquelle navio, naquella caina, etc. No mesmo dia, isso 
mesmo, pela mesma razao, ella mesma ; o mimero dos 
que — , dois remos, o do temor, e o da esperanca, os do 
ndsso dia. (1 Cor. xv. 39). 

5. The Relatives are — 

Que (invariable), who, which, that, whom 

O que, a que, os que, as que, what, which ; he, she, or those who 

Ciijo, ciija, etijos, cujas, whose 

Quern (invariable), whoever ; he or she who ; what 

O qual, a qual, os quaes, as quaes, who, which ; the which 

" Que " is used with both genders, both numbers, with 
verbs, and prepositions : " o que " is equal to that, wliich, 
or what, in the phrase what he says is true. It is declined 
like o, a, do que, da que, etc. " Cujo " (de quem) takes 
the preposition but no article, de cujo cavallo — not do. 
" Quem " has the force of who in the phrase " who steals 
my purse," or the Latin "sunt qui;" it takes preposi- 
tions. " qual " is used instead of que to prevent 
ambiguity, as lequel is in French ; it is declined with the 
article, and takes the prepositions : do qual, da qual, dos 
quaes, das quaes ; no qual, pelo qual, etc. 

Examples. O professor que falla, a eriada que canta, 
os pensamentos que sao vaos, estas palavras que digo. 
O relogio que tenho. A filha que elle ama. O homem 
que vejo. A casa em que ; as circunstancias em que \ a 
penna com que, o negocio de que ; o homem esta certo 
do que diz. Nos dizemos o que sabemos. que tern a 
esposa e o esposo. Nao sei o que e. O homen de cujo 
livro, etc. A mulher de cujo relogio. ^ O rapaz de cujas 
maos, a rainha de cujos cavallos. Da a quem te pede. 



262 

Como quern tinha autoridade. Quern nelle ere nao e con- 
demnado. Somos quern soinos. De quem teni a honra 
de ser. Deos a quem havia crido, Nao sabia quem elle 
era. (See also John vii. 25.) Diante de Deos, a quem 
havia crido, o qual da vida aos mortos ; sua graca, a qual 
elle derramou ; os filhos entre os quaes vivemos ; pelas 
quaes cousas ; pelo Evangelho do qual eu fiii feito 
ministro. (Col. ii. 3. ; Eph. iii. 12. ; iv. 16.; Philem. 12. ; 
2 Cor. xi. 29. ; Eom. ix. 20.) 

6. The Interrogatives are — 

Que? (invariable), what? 

Quem ? (invariable), who ? whom ? 

Ciijo, cuja, ciijos, cujas ? whose? (de quem? is more usual) 

Qual, quaes ? which? (i.e., which of two or more) 

Examples. Que livros tern elle ? Que boas novas ha ? 
Com que autoridade ? Que rua e esta ? Que diremos ? 
Que diz a Escritura ? Que distancia ? Que horas sao ? 
Que quer ? A que fim ? Quem e ? Quem me livrara ? 
Quem nos separara ? Quem sabe ? De quem e isto ? 
Com quem fallou ? De quem e esta imagem ? De quem 
e elle filho ? Quaes sao as riias ? Qual pois o ama mais ? 
Qual e mais facil ? Qual e o caminho ? Qual e o pre90 
disto ? A qual dos sete ? Qual delles ? Qual dos 
dois? 

7. The Indefinites are — 

Alguem (ind,), somebody, any one ; muito, much, many ; pouco, 

little, few ; tal, qual. 
Algtim, some, any ; nenhiim, no, none ; quanto, how great, what j 

tudo (ind.) 
Ambos, both; ninguem (ind.), nobody j qualquer, any, whatever ; 

tan to, so great, so much, so many. 
Cada (ind.), each (not every) ; outrem (ind.), others ; quemquer 

(ind.), whatever ; uns, lirnas, some. 
Certo, a certain ; outro, another, other ; so, alone. 
Fulano, such-a-one; os mais, the rest; todo, all (pi.), every. 

Examples. Conheee Y. S. alguem ? Tern alguma 
queixa contra algum ? alguns de vossos poetas algumas 
pessoas, ambos gritarao, cada homem, cada casa, cada um, 



263 

disse-me certa pessoa, fulano diz, muito vinho, muita 
prudencia, nrnitos hdmens, miiitas filhas, nenhiim homen, 
nenhtima casa, nenhiim de sens amigos, ninguem la esta, 
sem outrem em casa, outro dia, nao ha outro meio, os 
Hiais fugirao, pouco tempo, pouca agua, poucos, poucas 
pessoas, quanto tempo, com quanta dor ! quantos traba 
lhos ! quantas noites ! qualquer hdmein sabe isso, quaes 
quer que sejao 6s perigos, elle so, ella so, a so excepcao, 
todo {all) o anno, toda a noite, todos os dias (every), 
todas as noites, tal pai, tal filho, taes e taes cousas, tal e 
qual, alguns dos quaes, elle e tal qual Y. S. o tern co- 
nhecido, tiido ia bem, tanto dinheiro, vinte e tantos, um ao 
outro, uns aos outros, uns e outros, uns doze homens, 
umas meias, um e outro. 

Y. Yeebs. — The Portuguese Yerb is regular in its 
structure, and presents few difficulties to the Latin 
scholar. Yerbs are chiefly derived from nouns — dlho, 
olhar, ar, arejar — the root being modified by prefixes 
and affixes. The peculiarities are — 

1. An inflected or personal infinitive, amar eu, amares 
tu, amar elle, am&rmos ncs, amarcfes yds, amarem elles = 
my loving, thy loving, his loving, etc. 

2. The use of four auxiliaries — ter, haver, ser, and 
estdr — and the remarkable distinction between ser, re- 
presenting a permanent, essential quality, and estdr, a tem- 
porary state or circumstance. 

3. Richness in compound tenses and idiomatic forms; 
and singular combinations with pronouns, expressing deli- 
cate shades of meaning : e. g., tenho or Aei amado, tinha or 
havia amado, tive or houve amado, etc.; anddndo vendo, 
hei de amar, ter sido amado, tenho de ir, acdbo de ouvir, 
estd para pedir, o cair da folha. Tenho que escrever, 
Jiavemos de nos divertir, estou a temer, escrever-lhe-hei, te- 
lo-ha Y. S. apprendido. Deve-se-abrir as janellas, batei, 
e abrir-se-vos-ha. Perdodr-se-lhe-ha. Fa-lo-hei. 

4. The gerund* (present participle active) combines 
with estdr to form progressive tenses in ndo like the 
English ing : e. g., estou amdndo, I am loving. It is 

* Constancio's nomenclature. 



264 

joined to nouns (without undergoing inflection) ; e. g., a 
cabega naddndo em sdngue. It is used absolutely, evitdndo 
expressoes bdixas. Often conveys a. future contingent idea : 
havendo logdr, irei: if I have time, I shall go. 

5. The supine* (past participle) in ado or %do (for 
irregulars, see p. 147), combines with ter and haver to 
form the compound tenses of the active, and with ser 
and estdr, those of the passive ; in the first, invari- 
able ; in the second, inflected like an adjective. Elle 
e amado, ella e amad«, elles sao amados, ellas sao 
amad«5. It does not follow the Erench construction 
(as it once did) in such phrases as, " le livre que j'ai 
ecrit ;" ie la lettre que j'ai ecrite ;" but remains invari- 
able. It is often used like an ablative absolute (inflected) : 
chegddo o tempo, the time being come ; consultddos os 
capitdes. Employed actively, as well as passively, as an 
adjective: " cangddo" is tiring and "tired;" " esquecido" 
" forgetful," and forgotten" It is elliptically used with- 
out the verb to be ; e. g., " suspeito de infecto," for " sus- 
peito de ser infecto," suspected of being infected. 

6. Reflective, reciprocal, impersonal verbs and re- 
flectives as impersonals, are in constant use, the whole 

tendency of the language being to employ the third per- 
son, like "on" in Erench. They are, of course, connected 
with the appropriate pronouns, me, te, se, etc., except in 
the few cases where tne impersonal is pure : abstenho- 
me de beber, nao me esquecerei. Often equivalent to 
the passive, sdbe-se, it is known, divide-se a easa. Reci- 
procals are Englished by " each other :" muito se querem 
os dois amigos. Impersonals are reflective, as, vdi-se (one 
goes), chega-se,faz-se ; or pure, as vale, chove, convem. 

7. The Moods are nearly the same as in other lan- 
guages. No optative form, the defect being supplied by 
oxald, oxald que eu tivesse, etc. The subjunctive is used — 
(1.) When contingency is in the second or subordinate 
clause: quero que elle fdga isto. (2.) As & polite im- 
perative : diga-lhe. (3.) Instead of the English infinitive ; 
diga-lhe que suba, tell him to come up. (4.) After words 
of need, duty, possibility, etc. : e preciso que eu vd. 

* Constancy's nomenclature. 



265 

(5.) Often after verbs of doubt, fear, or emotion ; espero 
desejo, estimo, receio, quero, aconselho, rogo, peco, creio 
temor, etc. Espero que V. 8. esteja melhdr ; receio que 
tenhdmos um verao quente ; duvido que assim seja. (6.) 
After words and phrases indicating purpose, paraque, 
afim que : or concession, aindaque, posto que ; condition, 
se, no caso que, comtanto que, etc. ; para que tome este 
logar ; afim que elle tenlia bons exemplos. (7.) In 
prayers, wishes, hlessings, etc. : a graga seja com todos, 
paz seja aos irmaos. 

{Note. — The Portuguese subjunctive is not always 
used to express purpose, as it is in Latin after " ut ;" para 
with the infinitive is generally used like "pour" in 
French, or in old English "for to," as para fazer isto. 
The great distinction between the infinitive and subjunc- 
tive in the subordinate clause is, that the infinitive is to be 
used in Portuguese when the verbs in both clauses refer 
to the same person. " Quero fazer Isto" I wish to do that: 
the subjunctive in Portuguese, when the verbs refer to 
different persons : " Quero que elle fdga isto," I wish him to 
do that, though translated by the infinitive in English.) 

The conditional (potential or suppositive) affirms, de- 
pending on a previous doubt, whereas the subjunctive 
doubts, depending on a previous affirmation : eu sahiria, 
se o tempo estivesse bom, I should go out, if the weather 
were good ; quero que elle fdga. The infinitive is often 
used as a noun : o cahir da folha, the fall of the leaf ; 
o unico ser humano, the only human being. 

8. The Tenses require attention. The present in Por- 
tuguese is used as in English, but also often stands for a 
future, vou ja, I shall go directly. JNao dou tanto, I 
shall not give so much. The imperfect is not a past 
definite (as given in most Portuguese grammars for Eng- 
lishmen), hut a, progressive tense, aseu Zmquando elle entrou 
— not I read, or did read, but I was reading when he came 
in. The preterite definite or perfect tense shows the de- 
finite a,ct,fallei, I spoke ; but it also represents the Eng- 
lish compound of the present when the act is definite, 
thus, jantei, I have dined ; o vapor chegou, the steamer 
has arrived ; ja lhe disse, I have already told you. {Note 
this carefully.'] The preterite indefinite much as in Eng- 



266 

lish, tenho escripto tres on quatro cartas sem effeito, 
and so of the others. The future indicative as in Eng- 
lish ; but the future subjunctive in ar, er=to the English 
present (when used as a future), se vier, if he comes : se o 
vapor chegdr, if the steamer arrives. The Portuguese 
tense in cisse, esse, use, generally called imperfect sub- 
junctive, is hypothetical; sometimes past (after a past), 
elles nao derao provas que tivessem, etc., they did not give 
proof that they had (as if it were " could have''''), e como 
estivessem olhando para o ceo (Acts i. 10) ; sometimes 
future, SQpodesse ser, if it could be ; se eu desse, if I were 
to give. The compound forms follow the same usages, 
dira tudo o -que tiver ouvido, he will say all he has heard, 
i. e., that he may or shall, have heard ; se elle me tivesse 
fallado, if he had spoken, i.e., if he could have spoken. 
The pluperfect in ra, amara. 

9. The persons are the same as in other languages, 
but the usage is different. Where the English use the 
second person plural "you" in speaking to all, the 
Portuguese always use the third person in speaking to 
superiors and equals, and often in addressing inferiors ; 
e.g., " Como esta hoje ?" is, literally, " How does (he) to- 
day ?" Hence, to prevent ambiguity, the frequent neces- 
sity of putting Y. E., Y. S., or V. M. before the verb — 
the first for Vossa JExcellencia, when speaking to persons 
of rank, or ladies ; the second, Vossa SenJwria for gentry 
and the middle-classes ; the third Vossa Merce (pro- 
nounced Vosmece) to work-people and upper servants ; 
and Vosse amongst intimate friends and to the lowest 
classes. The pronouns — personal, possessive, etc. — 
must, of course, all be in the third person : " Como esta 
seu irmao ?" How is your brother ? Hence " a sua casa" 
would mean " your house," a casa delle, his house. " Tu" 
is used in prayer; amongst friends, in families, to 
servants, and the poor. Vds is employed in elevated 
style; in sermons, lectures, addresses; "Yos, Senhor," 
to the king; when used for "tu," the verb is plural, 
the adjective singular : vos, minha filha, estais louc#." 
In Portuguese novels, professing to represent people 
speaking as in real life, all the dialogues are in 
" vos," instead of being in the third person singular ! 



267 

The third person plural is spelled with em or eein, 
ao or am. 

10. Formation of Tenses. The student will master the 
verbs with ease, if he carefully notices the formation of 
the tenses from the infinitive, (1.) In the first person, 
the personal infinitive and the future subjunctive are the 
same as the present infinitive, but are inflected, e.g., am-ar 
am-ar, am-ar. (2.) Present participle formed thus : am-ar, 
am-dndo ; past participle, am-ar, am-ddo. (3.) Future, 
amar, amar-e^; conditional, am-ar, amsLY-m. (4.) Plu- 
perfect amar, amar-$. (5.) Imperfect subjunctive, am-ar, 
a.m-dsse. (6.) Present indicative, am-ar, am-o, and pre- 
sent subjunctive, am-ar, ame. (6.) Imperfect indicative, 
am-ar, &m.-dva, and perfect indicative, am-ar, am-ei. 

The correspondence of the tenses is extremely impor- 
tant. In the indicative — 1. The present and future may 
be followed by any tense. 2. All the tenses may be fol- 
lowed by the present, in affirmations. 3. The perfect 
and imperfect are followed by the imperfect when the 
action is not complete, by the perfect when it is. In the 
subjunctive, the tense is determined by the tense of the 
indicative verb that precedes — (1.) The present indicative 
is followed by the present subjunctive, when the second 
action is future ; by the perfect subjunctive, when the 
action is complete; by the hypothetical form in sse, when 
the act is incomplete. (2.) The perfect indicative and 
conditional are followed by the form in sse, when the act 
is future ; by the perfect subjunctive, when it is past. 
(3.) The future indicative takes the present subjunctive 
and future subjunctive when the act is future ; the future 
perfect subjunctive when the act is to have been done. In 
the imperative, the governing or leading verb takes the 
infinitive, or present subjunctive with que. 

In the conditional — 1. The form in ria takes after it 
the form in sse. 2. The form in dra, in the first clause 
requires the same form in the second. 3. The compound 
eu o " teria avisado," in the first clause, requires " se elle 
ma tivesse pedido " in the second. 



268 



AUXILIAEY VERBS. 



LSTDICATIYE. 



Present. 



eu hei, I liave tenho, I have 

tu has, thou hast tens, etc. 
elle ha, he has tern 
ndshavemos,we tenios 

have 
vds haveis, you tendes 

have 
elles hao, they tern, or teem 

have 



sou, I am 

(always) 
es 
e 

somos 

sois 



estou, I am 

(sometimes) 
estas 
esta 
estamos 

estais 

estao 



Imperfect. 



havia, had, was tmha, had, was 



having 


having 


havias 


tmhas 


havia 


tinha 


haviamos 


tinhamos 


havieis 


tfnheis 


haviao 


tmhao 


houve, had 


tive, had 


houveste 


tiveste 


houve 


teve 


houvemos 


tivemos 


houveste3 


tivestes 


houverao 


tiverao 



era, was (always) estava, was (then 

or there) 

eras estavas 

era estava 

eramos estavamos 

ereis estaveis 

erao estavao 



Perfect. 



fiii, was (always) estive, was (then) 

foste estiveste 

foi esteve 

fomos estivemos 

fostes estivestes 

forao estiverao 



Pluperfect. 



houvera,had had 


tivera, had had 


fora, had been 


estivera, had been 






(always) 


(then) 


houveras 


tiveras 


foras 


estiveras 


houvera 


tivera 


fora 


estivera 


houveramos 


tiveramos 


foramos 


estiveramos 


houvereis 


tivereis 


foreis 


estivereis 


houverao 


tiverao 


forao 


estiverao 



269 



Future. 



haverei, shall 


terei, shall have 


serei, shall be 


estarei, shall be 


have 






(always) 


(then) 


haveras 


teras 




seras 


estaras 


havera 


tera 




sera 


estara 


haverenios 


teremos 




serenios 


estareraos 


havereis 


tereis 




sereis 


estareis 


haverao 


terao 




serao 


e3tarao 




Future Conditional. 




haveria 


teria 




seria 


estaria 


haverias 


terias 




serias 


estarias 


haverfa 


teria 




seria 


estaria 


haveriamos 


teriamos 




seriamos 


estariarnos 


haverieis 


terieis 




serieis 


estarieis 


haveriao 


teriao 




seriao 


estariao 






Impebative. 




ha (tu) 


tern 




se 


esta 


havei (vos) 


tende 




sede 


estai 



SlJBJUNCTIYE. 

Present. 



haja, have 


tenha, have 


seja, be, may be 


esteja, be, may be 


hajas 


tenhas 




sejas 


estejas 


haja 


tenha 




seja 


esteja 


hajamos 


tenhamos 




sejamos 


estejamos 


hajais 


tenhais 




sejais 


estejais 


hajao 


tenhao 




se]ao 


estejao 






Imperfect. 




houvesse, should tivesse, should 


fosse, might be, 


estivesse, might 


have, or had 


have, or 


had 


were 


be, were 


houvesses 


tivesses 




fosses 


estivesses 


houvesse 


tivesse 




fosse 


estivesse 


houvessemos 


tivessemo; 




fossemos 


estivessemos 


houvesseis 


tivesseis 




fosseis 


estivesseis 


houvessem 


tivessem 




fossem 


estivessem 






Future. 




houver, shall 


tiver, shall have 


for, shall be, were estiver, shall be, 


have 








were 


houveres 


tiveres 




fores 


estiveres 



houver 
houvermos 
houverdes 
houverem 



tiver 
tivermos 
tiverdes 
tiverem 



for 

formos 
f6rdes 
forem 



estiver 
estivermos 
estiverdes 
estiverem 



270 



Infinitive. 

Impersonal. 



haver, to have 






ser, to be (always) 


ter, to have 




estar, tobe (some time or place) 






Personal. 




haver eu, or houver, ray having ser, 


my being 


haveres tu, 




thy „ seres, 




haver elle, 




his „ ser, 




havermos nos, 




our „ sermos, 


»' r> 


haverdes vos, 




your „ serdes, 


5i JJ 


haverem illes, 




their ,, serem, 


3> 5> 


t&r, 




my „ estar, 


J5 59 


teres, 




„ ,, estares, 


55 55 


ter, 




„ ,, estar, 


55 55 


termos, 




„ ,, estarmos, 


55 SJ 


terdes, 




„ „ estardes, 


55 55 


terem, 




„ „ estarem, 

Paeticiples. 
Present. 


55 55 


havendo 




tendo sendo 
Past. 


estando 


havido 




tido sido 
Compound Tenses. 


estado 


tenho havido 


I have had 


tenho tido 


I have had 


tinha „ 




I had „ 


tmha „ 


I had „ 


terei „ 


I s 


hall have „ 


terei „ 


I shall have „ 


tenlia „ 


I] 


may have ,, 


tenha „ 


I may have „ 


(se) tiver „ 




if I have „ 


tiver „ 


if I have „ 


(se) tivesse „ 




if I had „ 


tivesse „ 


if I had „ 


ter „ 




to have „ 


ter „ 


to have „ 


tendo „ 




having „ 


tendo „ 


having „ 


tenho sido 




I have been 


tenho estado 


I have been 


tinha „ 




I had „ 


tinha „ 


I had „ 


terei „ 


I shall have „ 


terei ,, 


I shall have „ 


tenha „ 


I may have „ 


tenha „ 


may have „ 


tiver ,, 




if I had „ 


tiver „ 


if I have ,, 


tivesse „ 




if I had „ 


tivesse „ 


if I had „ 


ter „ 




to have „ 


ter „ 


to have „ 


tendo „ 




having „ 


tendo „ 


having „ 


Observations 


(1.) Hei, havia, etc., may be used for 


tenho, tinha, 


etc 


., throughout. (2.) Saver 


de and Ter de, 


followed by the infinitive, foi 


-m a complete 


series of com- 



271 



pound tenses ; e. g., Hei de ser, I have to be, or shall be ; 
Havia de ser, I had to be ; Haverei de ser, I shall have to 
be, etc. (3.) PJstdr similarly combines with the present 
participle Ustou sendo, I am being ; JEstdva sendo, and so 
on. (4.) The compound form, ter sido, unites with the 
participle of the verb, to compose the passive voice: Tenho 
sido amaio, ella tern sido amida, nos temos sido amados, 
ellas tern sido amidas, and so on, the sido invariable. 



The Three Regular Conjugations, in ar, er, and ir ; 
the Verb Por. 







Indicative. 








Present. 




fallo, I speak 


como, I eat 


abro, I open 


pdnho, I put 


fallas, thou 


comes 




abres 


poes 


speakest 










falla, lie speaks 


come 




abre 


poe 


fallamos, we 


comemos 




abrimos 


pomos 


speak 










fallais, you speak comeis 




abris 


pondes 


fallao, they speak comem 




abrem 


poem 






Imp 


erfect. 




fallava, I was 


comia, was eat- 


abria,was open- 


punha, was put 


speaking 


ing 




ing 


ting 


fallavas 


comias 




abrfas 


piinhas 


fallava 


comia 




abria 


piinlia 


fallavamos 


comiamos 




abriamos 


punhamos 


fallaveis 


comieis 




abrfeis 


punheis 


fallavao 


comiao 




abriao 


punhao 






Perfect. 




fallei, spoke 


comi, eat, 


ate 


abri, opened 


piiz, put 


fallaste 


comeste 




abriste 


poseste 


fallou 


comeo 




abrio 


poz 


fallamos 


comemos 




abrimos 


posemos 


fallastes 


comestes 




abristes 


posestes 


fallarao 


comerao 




abrirao 


poserao 






Pluperfect. 




fallara, had 


comera, had 


abrira, had 


posera, had put 


spoken 


eaten 




opened 




fallaras 


comeras 




abriras 


poseras 


fallara 


comera 




abrira 


posera 


fallaramos 


comeramos 


abriramos 


poseramos 


fallareis 


comereis 




abrireis 


posereis 


fallarao 


comerao 




abrirao 


poserao 



272 



fallarei, shall 


m 

commerei, shall 


mere. 
abrirei, shall 


porei, shall put 


speak 


eat 


open 




fallaras 


comeras 


ahriras 


poras 


fallara 


comera 


abrira 


pora 


fallarernos 


comeremos 


abriremos 


poremos 


fallareis 


comereis 


abrireis 


poreis 


fallarao 


comerao 


abruao 


porao 




Conditional. 




fallaria, should 


comeria, should 


abriria, should 


poria, should put 


speak 


eat 


open 




fallarfas 


conierias 


abririas 


porias 


fallaria 


comeria 


abriria 


poria 


fallariamos 


comeriamos 


abririamos 


poriamos 


fallarieis 


comerieis 


abririeis 


porieis 


fallariao 


comeriao 


abririao 


poriao 




Impekatiye. 




s. falla, speak 


come, eat 


abre, open 


poe, put 


p. fallai, speak 


comei, eat 


abri, open 


ponde, put 




SUBJUNCTITE. 






J? resent* 




falle, speak 


coma, eat 


abra, open 


ponha, put 


falles 


comas 


abras 


ponhas 


falle 


coma 


abra 


ponlia 


fallemos 


comamos 


abramos 


ponhamos 


falleis 


comais 


abrais 


ponhais 


fallem 


comao 


abrao 


ponhao 




Imperfect.^ 




fallasse, spoke, 


comesse, eat, 


abrisse, opened 


posesse, put 


should speak 


should eat 


should open 




fallasses 


com esses 


abrisses 


posesses 


fallasse 


comesse 


abrisse 


posesse 


fallasseinos 


comessemos 


abrissemos 


posessemos 


fallasseis 


commesseis 


abrisseis 


posesseis 


fallassein 


comessem 


abrissem 


posessem 



* It is incorrect to translate the subjunctive present by " may." 
Its force can only be understood in a sentence : Diga-lhe que falle, 
tell him to speak. Nao coma, don't eat. Abra a porta, open the 
door. 

t Better called hypothetical, for it is so used ; e. g., Elle iria, se 
eu fallasse, he would go, if I spolce ; seria melhor, se comesse, he 
would be better if he ate, or would eat. 



273 



(se) fallar, if I 



fallares 

fallar 

fallarmos 

fallardes 

fallarem 



fallar 



fallar eu 
fallares hi 
fallar elle 
fallarmos nds 
fallares vds 
allarem elles 

comer en 
eomeres tu 
comer elle 
comermos nds 
comerdes vds 
comerem elles 



Future, 

(se) comer, if I (se) abrir, if I 

eat open 

eomeres abrires 

comer abrir 

comermos abrirmo3 

comerdes abrirdes 

comerem abrirem 

Infinitive. 



comer abrir 

Personal. 



(se) puzeYj^I put 

puzeres 

puzer 

puzermos 

pnzerdes 

puzerem 



por 



my 
thy 
his 



your 
their 



my eating 
thy „ 
his „ 
our „ 
your „ 
their ,, 



abrir eu 
abrires tu 
abrir elle 
abrirmos nds 
abrirdes vos 
abrirem elles 

por eu 
pores tu 
por elle 
pdrmos nds 
pordes vos 
porem elles 



my opening 
thy „ 
his 



your „ 

their „ 

my putting 

thy „ 

his „ 

our „ 

your „ 

their „ 



Participles. 

Present. 
fallando, speaking comendo, eating, abrindo, opening, pondo, putting 

Perfect. 
fallado, spoken comido, eaten abrido, or aberto, posto, put 

opened 

Compound Tenses. 

(1.) Tenho fallddo, I have spoken ; tinha fallddo, I 
,iad spoken ; terei fallddo, I shall have spoken ; tenha 
■fallddo, I may have spoken ; se eu tiver fallddo, if I have 
spoken ; se eu tiv esse fallddo, if I had spoken ; ter fallddo, 
to have spoken ; tendo fallddo, having spoken ; and simi- 
larly of the other conjugations. (2.) Forms with haver ; 
Hei de fallar, I have to speak, i.e., I shall speak ; havia 
de fallar, I had to speak, and so on. (3.) Forms with 
ter : e.g., tenho que escrever, I have to write ; and so on 

T 



274 

throughout the verb. (4.) Forms with estar: estou 
falldndo, I am speaking ; estou parapedir, I am about to 
speak ; estou a comer, I am eating. (5.) Passive form : 
Sou amddo, somos ainados, etc. ; estou encantado ; and so 
on throughout. 



IEEEGULAK VERBS OF THE EIEST 
CONJUGATION. 

1. "Verbs in car change c into qu before e : Rear, 
iique, locdr, toquei. 

2. Verbs in gar insert u between g and e : entregar, 
entregue, chegar, cheguei. 

3. The irregular participles, in verbs of the first con- 
jugation are, chiefly, aceito for aceitado, entregue for en- 
tregado, enxuto for enxugado, gdsto for gastado, morto for 
inatado, pdgo for pagado. 

4. The irregular verbs are estdr and dar, the former 
already given. The latter is regular in ddva, dar Si, daria, 
ddndo, dado, and all compound tenses. 

Present Indicative. 
ddu das da damos dais dao give 

Perfect Indicative. 
dei deste deo demos destes derao gave 

Pluperfect Indicative. 
dera deras dera deramos dereis derao had given 

Present Subjunctive. 
de des de demos deis dera gi^e 3 m ^y give 

Imperfect Subjunctive. 
desse desses desse dessemos desseis dessem might give 

Puture Subjunctive. 
der deres der dermos derdes derem if, — give 

Idiomatic Pheases. 

Bar audiencia, cor, espaco, gloria, lei, lugar, 6rdens,etc. , 
as in English ; dar beneficio, privilegio, meios, confer 
benefits, etc.; dar fratos, uva, produce, yield. Dar 



275 

combines with nouns thus : dar saltos, to leap ; — gritos, to 
cry ; — salva, to salute. Dar de comer, de beber, de vestir, 
to give food, drink, clothing; dar a entender, give to 
understand; dar em, strike; — sobre, attack; — para, 
face. Deo-se por medico, gave out that he was a doctor ; 
dou-me bem aqui, I am well here ; dou-me bem com elle, 
I am good friends with him ; demos que assim seja, admit 
it to be so. Quern me dera ! How I desire ! Nao te de 
cuidado, never mind. 



IBREGTTLAB, VEEBS OF THE SECOND 
CONJUGATION. 

1 . Verbs in ger, change g into j in the present indi- 
cative, and subjunctive : abranger, abranjo, abranja. 

2. Yerbs in cer change c into c before o and a : descer, 
desco, desca. 

3. Verbs in oer change o into 6 before o and a : moer, 
moo, moa. 

4. Perder changes d into c in the first person singu- 
lar, present indicative, and subjunctive: perder, perco, 
perca. 

5. The irregular participles are chiefly absolute, ab- 
sorto,acceso, contento, contradito, convicto, corrupto,defeso, 
descripto, despeito, dico, eleito, escripto, feito, incurso, 
interrupto, mantendo,morto, preso, quisto,resoluto, retendo, 
revisto, roto, visto, volto. (Those in italics have also re- 
gular forms, usage determining the application, as in 
English, absolved, absolute ; hung, hanged ; worked collar, 
and yet, wrought iron.) 

Present. 

creio, believe leio, read sei, know vejo, see 

cres les sabes ves 

ere le sabe ve 

digo, say posso, can trago, being 

dizes pddes trazes 

diz pode traz 

faco, do quero,* want valho, avail 

fazes queres vales 

faz qner vale 

* Eequerer makes xequeiro Yequeira. 



276 



The other persons regular : emas, eis, era, or eem. 
Imperfect (was, ing; used to, would), 
cria, was believ- fazia queria v#lia 



ing 

dizia 


lia 
pocKa 


trazia 
sabia 




via 






Eegular 


throughout 


: ia, ias, ia, iamos, 


ieis, 


iao. 






Perfect (d, did). 










ere, believed 

creste 

creo 

cremos 

crestes 

crerao 


If 

leste 

leo 

lemos 

lestes 

lerao 


trouxe 

trouzeste 

trouxe 

trouxemos 

trouxestes 

trouxerao 


vi 
viste 

V1U 

vimos 
vistes 
virao 




disse 

disseste 

disse 

dissemos 

dissestes 

disserao 


piide 

piideste 

pode 

podemos 

pudestes 

puderao 


soube 

soubeste 

soube 

soubemos 

soubestes 

souberao 


i 








fiz 

fizeste 

fiz^ 

fizemos 

fizestes 

fizerao 


quiz 

quizeste 

quiz 

quizemos 

quizestes 

quizerao 


vali 

valeste 

valeo 

valemos 

valestes 

valerao 












Pluperfect (had, would have). 






crera 
quizera 


dissera 
trazera 


fizera 
soubera 


lera 
valera 




podera 
vira 


(E.) 




Future (shall, will). 








crerei 
quererei 


direi 
trarei 


farei 
saberei 


lerei 
valerei 


poderei 
verei (R.) 


Conditional (mi 
creria diria 
quereria traria 


ght, could, would, should) . 
faria leria poderia 
saberia Valeria vena (E.) 


creia 
crede 


diz 

dizei 


Imperative. 

faz 
fazei 


le 
lede 




pdde 
podei 




quer 
querei 


traz 
trazei 


sabe 
sabei 


vale 
valei 




ve 
vede 





277 



ere 



cresse 
quizesse 



crer 
quizer 



crendo 
crido 



diga 
saiba 



SUBJUNCTIYE. 

Present. 

faca 

traga 

Imperfect. 



soubesse 



disser 
souber 



dizendo 
dito 

sabendo 
sabido 



querendo 
querido 

Caber (suit, jit into) 
caiba, coubesse, couber, 



trouxesse 

Future. 

fizer 

trouxer 

Participles. 

fazendo 

feito 

trazendo 
trazido 



leia 
valha 



lesse 

valesse 



ler 

valer 



lendo 
lido 

valendo 
valido 



possa 
veja 



(E.) 



(R.) 



poder 
vir 



podendo 
podfdo 

vendo 
visto 



makes caibo, cabfa, coube, coubera, caberia, 
cabendo, cabido. 



Idiomatic Pheases. 

1. Crer: — de leve, easily ; — de boa mente, readily ; 
— a olhos fechados, blindly. En lho creo ! I believe you ! 
Motivo para — , reason to — . Nao creia isto, don't 
believe that ; — em, a, — in. 

2. Dizer : — que sim, to say yes, assent ; — que nao, 
to say no, refuse ; — mal de, to speak evil of ; — bem 
de, to speak well of. Que quer dizer isto ? "What does 
this mean ? Quer dizer, that is to say. Diz, it is said. 

3. Fazer: — vir, rir, make come, laugh, etc. ; — gastos, 
spend. "With de fazer de bobo, play the fool ; — papel 
de, play the part of ; por chegar, try to arrive. Elle se 

faz surdo, he pretends. Faz lua, it is moonlight. 

4. Ler : Nao sei ler, he cannot read. Pdde ter de 
cadeira, he could lecture, he knows it well. Ler a cartilha 
a, to tell one his faults. Leia devagar, read slowly. Leu 
a cartel, he read the challenge. 

5. Poder : Pode ser, may be, perhaps. Nao pdsso 
mais, I can do no more. Sinto nao poder, I am sorry I 
cannot. Ate nao poder mais, till no more could be done. 
Nao posso com isto, I can't lift it. Fode-se fazer, it may 
be done. 



278 

6. Querer: — bem a, wish well to ; — mal a, wish harm 
to; — antes, prefer ; como quizer, as you please. Quanto 
quer, what do you ask ? Quer queira, quer nao queira, 
whether you will or no. 

7. Saber : — de cor, know by heart ; sem eu o — , 
without my knowledge. Ninguein, que eu sdiba, no one 
that I know of. Nao sdbe mentir, he cannot lie. Sdbe- 
se, it is known. Vir a saber-se, become known. 

8. Trazer : por forca, bring by force ; ■ — a memoria, 
bring to mind ; — na memoria, carry in the mind. Vento 
trdz chiiva, wind brings rain ; - — guerra, wage war ; 
— origem, descend ; ■ — - vontade, wish. 

9. Valer mais, to be worth more. Nao vale a pena, 
it is not worth while. Nao vale nada, it is good for 
nothing. Mais val, it is better to. Vol tanto, it is worth 
so much. Valer-se de, avail one's self of. 

10. Ver mundo, see the world ; — vir, see what will 
come of it ; ate mais — , good-bye ; fazer — , show. Esta 
por — , it remains to be seen ; a meu ver, in my opinion ; 
faz que nao ve, he pretends not to see. 

11. Caber has no exact English equivalent ; it means 
to be contained in, to be held : e , g., O vinho nao cdbe na 
garrafa, literally, the wine is not contained in the bottle ; 
or, in English, the bottle will not hold the wine. Nao 
me cdbe, it does not suit me. Nao cdbe erro, no room 
for error. — com elle, to suit, please him. 



IKBEGULAE, VERBS OF THE THIRD 
CONJUGATION. 

1. Yerbs in gir change g into j before o and a : 
fdgir, fujo ; tingir, tinjo. 

2. Verbs in guir lose the u before o and a : seguir, 
sigo ; distinguir, distingo. 

3. Yerbs in entir and ertir, erir, edir, estir, change e 
into i : sentir, sinto ; vestir, visto ; repetir, repito. 

4. Yerbs in udlr, ulir, etc., change u into o in second 
and third person singular, and third person plural, pre- 
sent indicative, and in imperative : acudir, acodes ; acode, 



279 



acodem, acode tu. So all verbs in ir, with u before d, g, 
1, m, p, q, s, and ss. 

5. Dormir makes durrno ; pedir, pego ; ouvir, ougo ;. 
medir, wiego. 

6. The irregular participles are : aherto, ahstrdcto, of- 
flicto, assumpto, avmdo, coherto, compulso, concluso, con- 
tracto, desavindo, descoherto, digesto, directo, diviso, enco- 
berto, erecto, excluso, exhdusto^ exempto, expulso, expresso, 
extincto,frito, impresso, incluso, infuso, instructo, oppresso, 
repulso, represso, suhmerso, sdrto, tinto, vindo. 

Indicative. 

Present. 



YOU, gO 


sirvo, serve peco, ask 


rio, laugh 


vais 


serves 


pedes 


ris 


va 


serve 


pede 


ri 


vamos 


servimos 


pedrnios 


rim os 


ides (obs.) 


servis 


pedis 


rides 


vao 


servem 


pedem 


riem 


saio, go out 


subo, go up venho, come 




sais, saes 


sdbes 


vens 




sai, sae 


sobe 


vem 




saimos 


subimos 


vimos 




sais 


subis 


vmdes 




saem 


sdbem 


vem 




Imperfect (was - 


— ing, was to — , 


would — ) 


ia 


seryia 


pedia 


ria 


saia 


subia 


vinha 
Perfect. 




fiii 


servf 


pedi 


ri 


foste 


serviste 


pediste 


riste 


foi 


servio 


pedio 


no 


fomos 


servimos 


pedimos 


rimos 


fostes 


servistes 


pedistes 


ristes 


forao 


servirao 


pedirao 


rirao 


sahi 


subi 


vim 




sahiste 


subiste 


vieste 




sahfo 


subio 


veio 




sahmios 


subimos 


viemos 




sahistes 


subister 


viestes 




sahirao 


subirao 


vierao 
Pluperfect. 




fora 


servira 


pedira^ 


rira 


sabira 


subira 


viera 





280 

Future and Conditional. 



ir-ei, — 
sahir-ei, 


1a 


ia 


servir-ei 
subir- ei. 


, — ia pedir-ei, — ia 
— fa vir-ei, — ia 


rir-e 


vai 
ide 






serve 
servi 


Imperative. 

pede 
pedi 


ri 
ride 


sai 
sahf 






sobe 
sobf 


vem 
vinde 

Subjunctive. 





Present. 
va sirva peca ria 

saia suba venha 

vas, etc., all regular (except vos vades), — as, — a, — amos, 



Imperfect. 



fosse 

sahisse 


subisse 
servisse 


pedisse 
viesse 

Future. 


(se) for (if) 
sahir 


servir 
subir 


pedir 
vier 




Infinitive and Part 


ir 

mdo 
ido 


servir 

servmdo 

servido 


pedir 

pediudo 

pedido 


sahir 

sahindo 

sahido 


subir 

subindo 

subido 


vir 

vmdo 
vindo 



nr 

rindo 

rido 



Idiomatic Phrases. 
Ir adiante, to go forward ; — atraz delle, heMnd him ; 
— por pao, etc., for bread, etc. ; — contra, — against ; 

— com a torrente, — with the stream. Vou buscar, I am 
going to fetch. 

Ia dizer, I ivas going to say. Vd ver, go and see. 
Fa-se embora, go away. 

SaMr a publico, to be made known. Sdi a seu pae, he 
is like his father. SaMrd caro, it will cost yon dear ; 

— fora, to go ont (of the house). Ao sahir do sol, at 
sunrise. Sdia o que sair, come what may. 

Servir o estado, — the state ; — um amigo, a friend ; 

— a merce, return the kindness ; — de, act as. Nao serve 



281 

de nada, is of no use. Sirva se de mim, make use of me ; 
para que serve — , what's the use of. 

Subir ao pulpito, mount the pulpit ; — uma arvore, 
climb a tree. Sobe o f'umo, the smoke ascends ; os anjos 
subindo, the angels ascending. Suba, come up. Eaca 
favor de subir, come up, please. 

JPedir justica, ash justice ; — perdao, pardon ; — pao, 
ash for bread ; o negocio pede cautela, the business re- 
quires caution. JPedi-lhe por favor, I ashed him as a 
favour. 

Bir as gargalhadas, laugh heartily, horselaugh ; — ate 
nao mais, — his fill ; por-se a — , burst out laughing. 
Hir-se muito alto, laugh out ; — de, laugh at ; — com sigo 
mesmo, have a quiet laugh. 

Vir as maos, come to blows ; — ao pensamento, — into 
mind, occur to ; — a prova, — to the proof; — a saber se 
— to be known. Vierao cartas, letters have come. Vira 
tempo em que, the time will come when. Vindo a noite, 
night being come ; logo que vier, as soon as he comes; 
em vindo aprimavera, spring coming, or when spring 
comes. Grosto que viesse {literally, I like he should 
come), I should like him to come. 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



These are conjugated throughout with the reflective 
pronoun: — 

acho-me, I find myself atrevo-me, I venture 

achas-te, thou findest thyself atreves-te., thou ventured 

acha-se, he finds himself atreve-se, he ventures 

achamo*-nos, we find ourselves atrevemo*-nos, we venture 

achais-vos, you find yourselves atreveis-vos, you venture 

achao-se 3 they find themselves atrevem-se, they venture 

Reflective Verbs as Passives and Neuters. 

The passive voice in Portuguese is much more fre- 
quently represented by the annexed forms than by the 
compound £orms with ser and estdr : e.g., " achdo-se 
rosas," is, literally, "roses find themselves," but it 

* s omitted for euphony. 



282 

means "roses are found;" confirma-se a noticia, the 
news is confirmed ; fdlla-se, it is said; conta-se, it is 
related; nutre-se a alma, the soul is nourished; torna-se, 
it grows. 



IMPERSONAL, OE UNIPEESOKAL VEEBS. 

These are chiefly the following : —Acabou-se, it is 
done ; bdsta, it is enough ; consta, it is stated; chove, it 
rains ; convent, it suits ; cumpre, it is fitting ; nao fax 
conta, it does not pay ; gela, it freezes ; ha, there is ; 
importa, it matters ; neva, it snows ; parece, it seems ; 
relamjpeja, it lightens ; rest a, it remains ; succede, it hap- 
pens ; troveja, it thunders ; vale, it is worth. These have 
the usual tenses : e. g., chove, it rains ; cliovia, it was 
raining ; se chover, if it rains ; and so on. The verb 
" haver" is the chief unipersonal verb, and uses the third 
person singular throughout for both singulars and plurals. 
Ha leite, there is milk ; ha ovos, there are eggs. Its parti- 
ciple does not vary : e. g., Se tivessem havido flores, 
teria havido fructos, if there had been flowers, there 
would have been fruits. 

Combined Eoems. 

1. With pronouns. — Diga-Z7ze, tell him ; diga-lhes, tell 
them. Comprei-o para d&r-lho, I bought it to give it to 
him. A penna e boa, elle wCa dara. Elle assentou se-lhe 
ao lado. Comeca a turvar se-me a, cabeca. 

2. "With pronouns and auxiliaries : — Dar-me has 
prazer, you will give me pleasure. Cortar -Ihe-hemos uma 
talhada. Ser-?ne-hia impossivel. ~Fic&v-lhe-hei muito 
obrigado. Continuar-se-A«. Escrever-ZAe-Aei amanha. 

CONTEACTED EoEMS. 

1. The infinitive loses r in combining with the 
pronoun; amar o, becomes ama-lo, amal-o, or amallo; 
ve-lo, for ver-o; cre-lo for crer-o; abracd-los. Naohpode 
negd-\o. Te-lo-ha. 

2. Some infinitives are further contracted : Fazer be- 
comes faze, far, and fa; e. g.,/ar-me-hia o favor ;/a-le-hei 



283 

com prazer ; ipensalo e faze-lo sao cousas differentes ; nao 
e preciso dize-lo, dir-lhe hei. 

3. Quer is sometimes quel, as quel as justas, do you 
like them a close fit ; hemos and hia, hiamos, in com- 
pounds are contractions for havemos, havia, haviamos. 

4. In reflective verbs the first person plural loses s 
before nos, as achdmo-nos, for achdmos-nos. 

5. The third person plural makes the governed pro- 
noun take n, for euphony ; adorao-^o, for adorao-o ; elles 
matarao-wo, or iCo. 



ADVERBS. 



Adverbs of quality are chiefly derived from adjectives, 
by adding u mente'" (equal to the English "Zy") to the ad- 
jective; cy.,habil, habilmente; prudente, prudentemente. 
If the adjective has a feminine form, the affix "mente" is 
appended: justo, just«, justamente. Example. — Bom 
makes boamente,but prefers hem; mao takes mal, etc. Ad- 
verbs are thus compared : cedo, mais cedo, o mais cedo, 
soon, sooner, soonest ; menos justamente, less justly. 
"When two adverbs in "mente" concur, the first "mente" 
is suppressed, as "franca e lealmente fallando." 

1. Or Place. 

acola o homem esta acold, the man is over there, 

yonder 
ahi ahi esta, there he is ; ahi mesmo, just there; 

d'ahi a alguns dias, some days hence 
alem diem d'isso, besides that ; alem daque, besides ; 

alem das suas forcas, beyond his strength 
all, alii mora ali, he lives there, yonder ; por ali, that 

way ; em d'alli, thence ; para alii, thither 
aquem. aquem do rio, this side of the river ; muito aquem 

de, much below ; within, beneath, less than 
arriba dito arriba, said above ; — de dez, above ten ; rio 

— , up stream; de baixo — ,from head to foot 
atraz como disse — , as I said above ; fica — , he falls 

behind : deixar — , to leave behind 



284 



ca venha cd, come here ; de cd, give here ; ca e la, here 

and there ; chegue-se para cd, come nearer 
cerca meio dia on a — , noon or about it ; a — de mil, 

«£ow£ 1000 ; morto on dcerca, dead or almost 
dahi — por diante, thence, from that place (more 

nsed as adverb of time) 
debaixo — da mesa, under the table 
dentro — de casa, within doors ; ir para — , go in ; — da 

cidade, in the city; por — , inside 
diante va — , go on ; para — , on, forwards ; ir por — , 

continue ; andar — , precede, anticipate 
fora — out, not at home ; jantar — , dine out ; esta 

— , he's out ; gente de — , company ; — de si, 

out of his senses 



la 

longe 
onde 
perto 
traz, tras 
aqui # 

agora 

ainda 
antes 
avante 
cedo 

* Aqui, 
alii, where 



there, in that place ; para — , thither ; de — , 
thence ; — em cima, up there ; — baixo, 
down there 

miiito — , very far ; ao — ,far off; — da cidade, 
far from town ; tao — , come as far as 

— queira, where you please ; de — , whence ; 
para — , whither ; por ■ — , how 

mora aqui — , he lives near here ; mais — ,nearer ; 

— de o fazer, near doing it ; de — , nigh 
para — , back, backwards ; ir a — de, to pursue ; 

andar para — , turn back, relapse 
esta aqui, he is here ; aqui dentro, in here ; ftaqid, 

hence; ate aqui, thus far 

2. Or Time. 

now: ate — ,tillnoiv, ainda — , just now; desde — , 
henceforth ; , now now ; — mesmo, in- 
stantly 

yet, still: elle — nao veio, he is not come yet; — 
mais tempo, still more time; — nao, not yet 

— de jantar, before dinner ; — do dia, before 
the day ; — de pagar, before paying 

passar — , pass on ; ir — , go on ; a obra vai — , 

the work goes on 
venha — , come soon ; miiito — , very early ; de- 



where the speaker is ; 
neither is. 



where the one spoken to is : 



285 



man ha — , early in the morning , tao — , so 

early 
depois — de jantar, after dinner ; o dia — , the day 

after ; — disso, afterwards ; logo — , imme- 
diately 
entao then, at that time : ate — , till then ; desde — =, 

since then ; pois — , well then, in this case 
hoje to-day : — em dia, this day ; — faz nm anno, 

a year to-day ; de — em diante, from to-day 

onwards 
ja — paguei, I have paid already ; vou — , I am 

going directly ; , quickly ; — se ve, it's 

quite clear 
logo — vou, I am going presently ; oy and oy ; — que 

receber, as soon as you receive ; ate — , good- 

oye : 

minca never : — mais, never more ; — jamais, never 

more ; para — mais, for ever 
quando ivhen : ate — , till when ; — mais at most ; — 

menos, at least ; desde — , since when 
hontem yesterday: antehontem, the day before yesterday 
sempre always, ever : para — , for ever ; para todo — , 

without end ; — que penso, every time I 

think 

3. Quantity. 

acerca — de quinhentos soldados, ahout 500 soldiers 
apenas — tive tempo de, I hardly had time to — ; — 

chegou foi elle vendido, he had scarcely come 

when he was sold* 
assaz fico — contente, I am sufficiently satisfied 
demais estas botas sao grandes — , these boots are too 

large 
mais — \dnho que cerveja, more wine than beer ; 

pouco — ou menos, thereabouts 
menos — frio, less cold ; ao — , at least ; nem mais 

nem — , neither more nor less 
mui — agradavel, very pleasant 

muito — bom, very good ; nao — , not much ; quando — , 

at most ; — apertado, too tight 

* Arenas is equal to Tiardhj^ when. 



286 



quao 
quanto 
quasi 
sequer 

tao 
tanto 

assim 

bem 

coino 
nada 
nao 
sim 

talvez 
mal 

porque 
ora 



— bello ! how beautiful ; tao formosa — boa, as 
fair as she is good 

— em mini for, as much as in me lies ; — posso, 
as much as I can ; em — , while 

— duas horas, almost two o'clock ; o — morto, 
nearly dead 

nem — , not even ; nem — um so, not even one ; 

nem — teve tempo de, he has not even had 

time 
vai — de pressa, he goes so fast ; — rico como, 

so rich as ; — bom ! so good ! 

— melhor, so much the better ; — monta, it 



amounts to so much 



algum — , a little 



Quality. 

-, let us do so ; — seja, so be it ; 
tanto — , 



como, as soon as 



-, he sings 
-, all right ; 



4. 

so : facamos — 

, so so 

so that 
icell : miiito — , very icell ; canta 

well ; — cheio, very full ; esta - 

— pouco, very little 
how : assim — , as, like, just as ; — assim ! how 

so ! — se, as if ; doente — • esta, ill as he is 
elle nao me disse — , he said nothing to me ; — 

menos, nothing less ; nao e — , it's nothing ! 
no : — o creio, I do not believe it ; — le bem, 

he does not read well ; digo que — , I say no 
yes : creio que — , I believe so ; mas — , but 

rather ; dar o — , consent ; agora — , now 

indeed 

— nao seja assim, perhaps it is not so ; — que 
nao, perhaps not 

estou — , I am ill ; — feito, ill-made ; de — para 
peior, from bad to worse ; — o vio, hardly 
had he seen him 

— nao va ? why don't you go ? — nao quero, 
because I won't ; sem — , without cause 

— um — outro, now one, now the other ; — vai ! 
now go ! — segue-se, now it follows 



287 



PBEPOSITIONS. 

1. Some prepositions govern words directly : e. g., 
para mini, for me ; por mar, by sea ; para ver, in order 
to see. 

2. Some prepositions require a, de, etc. : tocante ao 
assnmpto, touching the subject ; diante de mim, before 
me. 

3. The prepositions a, ate, com, contra, de, em, para, 
etc., por, sobre, form complements to nouns, adjectives, 
and verbs. 

Nouns. — Amor a allianca com, o intento de, con- 
fianca em, subscripcao para, preces por, tratada entre, 
conspiracao contra, reflexoes sobre. 

Adjectives. — Exposto a, contente com, digno de, fiel 
em, proprio para, famoso por, inserto sobre, conspirado 
contra, castello campeando sobre o terreno, ingrato para 
com elle. 

Verbs. — Chegar ate, pertencer a, gostar de, pensar 
em, peccar contra, contrastar com, distinguir entre, olhar 
para, esperar por, conversar sobre. 

4. The same verb has different complements: e.g., 
dar a, give to ; dar com, meet with ; dar em, strike ; dar 
para, face, front; dar sobre, rush on; dar atrdz, run 
after. 

5. Prepositions intervene between the governing and 
governed verb, when the verb expresses a definite act : 
acdbo de escrever, continuo a ler ; but not when indefinite : 
devo dizer Jt /apo saber, etc. 

6. The preposition is often in the verb, as jantdr 
peixe, to dine on fish ; almogdr dvos, breakfast on eggs ; 
calcdr botas, put on boots ; vestir roupa, put on linen ; 
agradecer lhe o livro, thank him for the book. 

7. The safest rule is, at first, to follow the literal 
translation of the English prepositions, to, a; of,de; 
with, com ; for, para ; for, by, por. The dictionary and 
practice will meet such cases as think of, pensar em ; em 
extremo, extremely. 

8. Prepositions before infinitives, in Portuguese, are 
ofter rendered by prepositions and participles in English : 



288 



longe de querer, far from wishing ; em visitdr os orphaos, 
in visiting the orphans ; comecou por queimdr o livro, he 
began by burning the book ; niotivo pdrajicdr, reason for 
remaining ; depois de eu ler a carta, after my reading the 
letter ; sem conhecer, ivithout knoiving ; e depois de o 
terem examinado, and after their having examined it. 

9. Prepositions before infinitives are sometimes equal 
to a finite verb : e preciso pelejar ate veneer, we must fight 
till we conquer. 

10. Em governs the present participle, and is equal to 
when, or as soon as: em morrendo-lhe seu pai, when his 
father dies ; em sendo 2 horas, when it is two o'clock ; 
em eu tendo boa cama. Em acabando, irei. 

1. Simple Pkepositions. 

a vou a Lisboa, I go to Lisbon ; — tempo, in 

time ; — sua vontade, at one's ease ; — pe, 
on foot ; — ingleza, in the English style ; 
— des vintens,tf£l(W.; — razao de,at the rate 
of ; — vela, under sail ; ■ — proposito, by the 
by ; — forca de, by dint of; — falsa fe, with 
treachery ; a x a = a 

ate — o natal, till Christmas; — amanha, till to- 

morrow; — os mais vis, even the vilest ; — 
Londres, as far as London ; — agora, till 
now ; — entao, till then 

com cortar — uma faca, cut with a knife ; esta — 

medo, he is afraid ; — veneer, in conquer- 
ing 

confdrme trajar — a estacao, dress according to the 
season ; — o uso, according to custom 

contra — against me ; — o parecer do medico, against 
the doctor's opinion; — a noite, towards 
night 

de vem — Franca, he comes/romPrance; — ponte- 

pedra, stone-bridge ; — boa raca, of good 
family ; amado — mim, loved by me ; — dia 
by day ; — porta em porta, from door to 
door ; viver — peixe, live on fish ; menos — , 
— less than; e — crer, it is to be believed; 
e — , belongs to ; pobre — mim ? poor me ; 



289 



o bom do luonge, the poor monk ; — cor, by 
heart ; forms many phrases, de vagar, de 
pressa, de graca, de veras, etc. 

desde — Pariz ate Londres, from Paris to London ; 
— as tres horas ate as quarto, from three 
to four o'clock ; entao, since then 

durante — a guerra, during the war ; — todos os dias 
da sua vida, during all the days of his life 

apds — isso, after that ; correr apoz elle, run after 

him ; busque paz, e va apos della 

em vinho — garrafa, wine in bottle ; — casa, at 

home ; — guerra, in war ; de riia — riia, from 
street to street; dormir — terra, sleep on the 
ground ; nao esta — si, he's not in his senses. 
Before a present participle equal to as soon as: 
em chegando na cidade, as soon as he arrived 
in the city ; no dia, in the day ; na hora, in 
the hour ; nos quartos, in the rooms ; nas 
camas, in the beds ; — nossa prociira, in 
search of us; — jejuni, fasting. 

entre — nos, between ourselves ; — as 10 e 11 horas, 

between 10 and 11 o'clock ; — dia, during 
the day ; — maos, in hand ; — tanto, mean- 
while ; um costume — os francezes, a custom 
amongst the Prench ; — o povo, amongst the 
people 

para 1. Person ft? ovfor: carta — Joao, letter for 

John ; isto e — mim, this is for me ; — 
elle,j^or him 
*2. Before infinitive, in order to : trabalho — 
ganhar, I work to gain ; estudo — chegar a 
ser sabio 

place : vou — India, I am 
— o ar, upwards; — o sul, to 



3. Motion to a 
going to India 
the south 

4. Time, period 



o dia seguiiitej/br next day ; 
— hoje, for to-day ; — o fim da semana, 
towards the end of the week. 

* Est6u para pagar a conta, I am just going to pay the account ; 
a conta estajpor pagar, the account is to be paid, or, is not yet paid, 
or w»paid. 

V 



290 

5. Por (purpose) : nao presta — nada, good 
for nothing ; bom — , good for ; feito — , 

made /or 

6. About to : esta — partir, lie is about to 
start ; — chover, going to rain 

por 1. Done by : causado — elle, caused by him ; 

tornado pelos gregos, baken by the Greeks. 

2. Object: — amor de min, for my sake; 
faco — isso, I work for that ; trabalha — 
dinheiro 

3. Place : pelas riias, in the streets ; — toda 
a Asia, throughout Asia ; passarei — Beira, 
I shall go through Beira 

4. Means : ganhei o — empenho, I got it by 
interest ; — esta carta vera, you will see by this 

5. Manner : feito — forca, done by force ; — 
cujas chagas, by whose wounds 

6. Time : — anno, per annum ; — mez, by the 
month 

7. Value : — menos de 4, for less than 4 ; 20 
— cento, 20 per cent; — quanto,for how much 

8. Exchange : troca vinho — pao, he barters 
wine for bread; tanto — cabe9a, so much a 
head 

9. Favour : intercedi — Joao, I pleaded for 
John ; estou — isso, I am for that ; estao — 
ella, they are for her 

10. In lieu of: padeceu — nos, suffered for us 

11. Equality : um vale — nruitos, one goes for 
many ; olho — olho, e dente — dente 

12. As, for : ir — consul, go as consul ; — 
men amigo, as my friend; — morto, for 
dead ; tomar — 

13. Before infinitive, to be : a dbra esta — 
fazer, the work is to be done 

14. Fetching : foi — vinho, he has gone for 
wine ; va pelo medico, go for the doctor ; 
ir — lenha, go for wood 

15. As for : — mim, fico aqui, as for me, I stay 
here ; com as maos por lavar, with unwashed 
hands 



291 

16. However : por douto que seja, however 
learned he may be ; — muito rico que seja, 
— bem que eu faca 

17. Though : por ser pobre, though poor 

18. Reason /br; famoso — , famous for; — 
vergonha, for shame ; — inveja, through envy 

segundo — a came, according to the flesh 
sem 1. — amigos, without friends ; — vida, without 

life ; — ceremonia 

2. (Before infinitive), — qiierer, without wish- 
ing ; — irmos, withoat our going 

3. (Present subjunctive) — que tudo esteja 
prompto, without all being ready ; — que o 
chamem 

4. (Imperfect subjunctive) , todos forao mdrtos, 
sem que um so escapdsse, without one escaping 

sob — a figiira de Mentor, under the form : — cor 

de, under colour of ; — pena de ; — Poncio 
Pilatos 

sobre — a mesa, on the table ; — ndssas forcas, 

beyond our strength ; estar — , be above ; — 
longa consideracao, after ; reinar — , reign 
over ; tomar — si, take on himself 

2. Compound Prepositional Phrases. 

a a cerca c?esta materia, about this matter ; a cirna 

^elle, above him ; ao pe de\\&, near her ; a 
forca de bra^os, by force of arms ; a nianeira 
de, like ; a pezar de mim, in spite of me ; a 
tempo, in time ; a parte, aside ; a pressa, in 
haste ; a rios, in streams ; ao longe, at a dis- 
tance ; a sua vontade, at his ease ; a pe 5 on 
foot ; a espera Jelle, waiting for him ; ares- 
peito disto, as to this ; ao longo da riia, along 
the street ; atrdz da casa, behind the house ; 
afdlta de,for want of 

de de bdixo da condicao, under the condition ; de- 

balde, in vain ; de brucos, prostrate ; de cor, 
by heart ; de proposito, on purpose ; de im- 
proviso, suddenly ; de vagar, slowly ; de 
pressa, quickly ; de caminho, on the road ; 



292 

de joelhos, on one's knees ; de botas, in boots; 
de luto, in mourning ; de marinheiro, as a 
sailor ; de boca para baixo, mouth down- 
wards ; de gatinhas, on all fours ; de repente, 
suddenly ; estou de cima e elle debaixo, I 
am above, and be below ; de cima para baixo, 
over and over 

em esta em baixo, be is below ; em casa, at borne ; 

em cima da cama, on tbe bed ; em cima, 
besides ; em diivida, in doubt ; em fim, in 
fine ; em pe, on foot, up ; em breve, shortly ; 
em summa, in short ; em vivos, ivliile living ; 
em primeiro logar, in the first place ; em- 
frente do pregador, before tbe preacher ; em- 
torno do templo, round the church; em logdr, 
delle, in his stead 

para para com os pobres, toivards the poor ; para 

comigo, toioards me ; de mim para mim, as to 
me ; para baixo, dowmvards ; — cima, up- 
ivards ; — diante, forwards ; — traz, back- 
ivards ; para la, that way ; para ca, this way 

por por amor de, for love of ; atado por traz, tied 

behind ; por isso, therefore ; por cima da 
cabeca, above the head ; por baixo delle, 
beneath him ; por tiirno, in turn ; por modo 
de dizer, so to speak ; por mar e por terra, 
by sea and land ; um por um, one by one ; 
10 por todos, ten in all ; por isso, therefore ; 
por isso mesmo, for that very reason ; por 
causa de, on account of, by reason of ; por 
baixo, underneath; — cima, above; — diante, 
before ; — detraz, behind ; — dentro, within ; 
— fora, without 
And many others, all more or less adverbial. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



Some simply connect words, as conjunctives, condi- 
tional, causal, etc. ; some require the indicative, some 
the subjunctive ; some the infinitive, some participles. 



293 



mas 



nem 



ou 



ora 

pois 

porem 

que 

quer 

tambem 

todavia 
senao 

2. 

a proporcao 



1. Puke Conjunctions. 

Joao e eu, John and I ; branco e preto, 

white and black ; e que tenho eu com 

isso, and wh&t, etc. 
but : — ainda, but still ! — antes, but 

on the contrary ; — com tiido, hut for 

all that 

— um — outro, neither; — mais — 
menos, neither more nor less ; — ■ eu 
tao pouco, nor I 

elle — eu, he or I ; — rico o pobre, 
whether rich or poor ; — leia 6u 
escreva, whether you read or write 

— digo eu, still I say, etc. ; — ■ veja, just 
havia homem, now there was a 



see; — 
man 
- va, go 



then; — entao? what then? 
bem, be it so ; — sim, oh, of course 
(ironical) ; — nao, most certainly 

— Mentor que temia, etc., however, etc. ; 
e certo, — que, it is certain, however, 
that — 

diz — quer, he says that he wants, etc. ; 
diga-lhe — venha, tell him to 
come ; tenho — ir me, I must go ; 
jantemos, — 6 tarde, let us dine, /or it 
is late ; menos — , less than 

— publico — particular, whether public 
or private ; se — , at least, at any rate ; 
— sim — nao, all one, quite the same 

eu — sou Erancez, I too am a French- 
man ; nao somente, mas — , not only, 
but also 

— nao podia pagar o dinheiro, neverthe- 
less he could not pay the money 

nao tenho — ouro, I have nothing hut 
gold ; nao so — , not only, hut also ; 
nao faz — , does nothing hut 

Conjunctions with Indicative. 

que — estiida, apren de, as he studies, he learns 



294 



ainda que — alguns dizem though some say 

como — era de esperar, as was to be expected ; 

rico — elle e, rich as he is ; falla — 
quern sabe, as one who 
de maneira que — ambos estavao inquietos, so that both 

were uneasy 
de pois que — isso aconteceo, after that happened 

de sorte que — nao posso ler, so that I can't read ; — 
pareciao amigos, so that they seemed 
friends 
durante — eu retardava, ivhile I was delaying 

em quanto que — eu faco, while I am doing 
logo que — chega, digo me, as soon as he comes, 

tell me 
por que — nao sabia, because he did not know 

se bem que — nao faco, though I do not make 

segiindo — y ejo, as far as I see ; — dizem, as 

they say ; — o que esta escripto, ac- 
cording to what, etc. 
se bast a me, — ainda vive, enough if he 

still lives ; — o vizir vai, if the Y. goes 
se nao ■ — posso pagar, ifl cannot pay, etc. ; se 

ainda o nao leu, if you have not read it 
visto que — os sao inferidres, since these are in- 

ferior. 

3. Co^jttnctions with Subjunctive. 

ainda que — elle me reprehenda, though he chides 

me 
ainda quando — assim fosse, even if it were so 
antes que — venha, before he comes ; — aconte- 

cessem, before they happened ; — elles 

chegassem 
ate que — me pdgue, till he pays me ; — - eu viva, 

as long as I live 
a menos que — elles me nao convidem, unless they 

invite me ; — que elle estiide, unless 

he studies 
bem que — estivesse escripto la, though it was 

written there 
comtanto que — o facao, provided that they do it ; — 



295 



me nao faca mal, so that he does not 
hurt me 
caso que — eu nao pdssa pagar, in case I can't 

como seja — for, be that as it may ; — quer que 

seja, however that may be ; — elle nao 

la esteja, if 
para que — se acabe, that it be finished ; — viva- 

mos, that we may live 
posto que — venha, nao irei, though he should 

come, I won't go 
primeiro que — isso aconteca, sooner than that should 

happen 
como se — eu fosse crianca, as if I were a child ; 

fallou — tivesse perdido o juizo, he 

spoke as if 
embora — censiirem os criticos, what though the 

critics censure 
logo que — Y. S., receber esta carta, as soon as you 

get this letter 
no casa que — V. S., seja enganado, in case you may 

be wrong 
por bom que — eu podesse, even if I could 
pode ser que — parta hoje, he perhaps goes to-day 
se — elle pagar, ^he pays ; — quizer, if you 

like ; — me der, if you give me ; — 

eu estivesse 
sem que — demos, without our giving ; fossem 

ouvidos, without their being heard 
A fim que — eu seja rico, that I may be rich; — 

vos nao ouca, that I may not hear you 
que diga-lhe — me traga, tell him to bring 

me ; nao faltao pessoas — se appli- 

quem, etc. 

4. Conjunctions with Infinitive. 

a* — ser assim, if it is so ; — saber isso, if 

this were known; — nao ser isso, 
hut for this 



* A is strictly a preposition, but has here a conjunctive force. 



296 



alem de — apanhar o fructo, curtou a arvore, 

besides plucking the fruit, etc. 
antes de — morrer, before dying 

ate — nao poder mais, till he could do no 

more 
em vez de — o ajudar, instead of helping him ; — 

de fugir, instead of running away 
como sei — fazer, I know what to do 

confdrme — eu achar a terra, as I find the 

country 
depois de — ler o Hvro, after reading the book 

em logar de — escrever a carta, instead of writing the 

letter 
em quanto — durar o miindo, while the world lasts 

quer-quer — choVa — faca bom tempo, whether it 

rains, or is fine 
longe de — ser, far from being 

no caso de — V. S. vir, in case of your coming 

sem — ser religioso, without being religious 

visfco — ser tao tarde, seeing it so late 



ai 



arra ! 
ah! 

apre ! 

cia! 
fora ! 
old! 



ta! 
ora 



INTEEJECTIONS. 

— meu filho, ah, my son ! — que prazer ! oh, 
what joy ! ■ — que desgraca ! what a pity ! 

oh ! ah ! you rogue ! 

— irmao ! oh my brother ! — meu nobre 
aino ! ah, my noble master ! 

(marks aversion) get away ! off ! the deuce ! 

hang it ! 
come on ! look sharp ! quick ! 

— cao ! get out, dog ! out ! out ! 

(calling) holla ! hoy ! 

— fora d'aqui ! be off ! out of this ! 

— ! — ! hush ! hush ! 

— sus ! on ! on ! 



" Uhm, rosnou o clerigo," "hum, muttered the priest." 

Inteejectional "Woeds aitd Pheases. 
affasta — te, get out of the way ! be off ! 



ai de mim ! 
animo ! 
aqui d'elrei! 

avante ! 
asneira ! 
basta ! 

caluda ! 
com affeito ! 
coitado ! 
cuidado ! 

coisas ! 

de veras 
deus 



deus 



por, etc. 
que duvida ! 
misericordia 

que — ! 
oxala 

olha! 

optimo ! 
paciencia ! 
psio ! 

qual! 
por forca 
silencio ! 



297 

woe is me ! oh, dear me ! 
cheer up ! 

— gritou o homem ! help ! murder ! cried 
the man ! 

upa ! firm ! — ! — ! 
nonsense ! 

estou contente ! enough ! enough ! I 

am satisfi ed ! 
hush ! silence ! 
really ! 

— do povo ! poor people ! 
take care ! 

filha, tu dizes coisas ! child, don't talk 

nonsense ! 
indeed ! 

— nos acuda ! God help us ! — o permitta ! 
God grant it ! — to pague ! may God 
reward you ! 

gracas a — ! thank God ! — me salve ! God 
help me ! — me perdoe ! God forgive me ! 
exactly ! just so ! that's it ! 

— piedade ! for mercy's sake ! 
why not ! no doubt ! of course ! 

— ! bradou o mdnge! "mercy!" cried the 
monk 

— gente ! what people ! 

— que seja feliz ! may you be happy ! — 
que venha, oh if he would come ! 

— faca isto ! see, do this ! — Yenha ca ! I 
say, come here ! 

capital ! very good ! 

no help for it ! make the best of it ! 

o Manuel — psio ! chega a falla ! Manuel, 

hist, 
what ! 
of course ! 
silence ! 



* The Portuguese always prefix o in ealling any one: "Psio" 
and " olha" are commonly used to attract attention, like " Heh," I 
say, in English. 



298 



truz ! truz ! truz ! truz ! a porta ; rap, rap, rap, 

at the door 
sentido ! take care ! look out ! 

filha da minha alma ! isso agora ! calle 

a bocca ! pobre da inae ! 
valha-me — deus, Grod help me ! 
viva ! long live, etc., — ; good morning ! how do 

you do ? 
seja, etc. — pela saude de V. S., G-od bless you ! deus 

queira que — , God grant it may he so ! 
vamos come along ! go on ! 



THE END. 



Thomas Harrild, Printer, Salisbury Square, Fleet Street, Loudon. 



4:, 









& 


4** 


■ 1 


■ 
1.' 


i 


* 2 










1 1 



t* 



3. f 



